OWNER'S MANUAL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make changes at
any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be
carried out.
This manual applies to all HYUNDAI models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.
As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply
to your specific vehicle.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO
YOUR HYUNDAI
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE
WARNING
Your HYUNDAI should not be modified in any way.
Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safety or durability of your HYUNDAI
and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations
established by the U.S. Department of
Transportation and other federal or state agencies.
This manual includes information titled as DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
WARNING
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR
TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible
for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio
or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic
systems. For this reason, we recommend that you
carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your HYUNDAI dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you
choose to install one of these devices.
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, could result in death
or serious injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
NOTICE
NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not
avoided, could result in vehicle damage.
F2
HYUNDAI VEHICLE OWNER PRIVACY POLICY
Your Hyundai vehicle may be equipped with technologies and services that use information collected,
generated, recorded or stored by the vehicle. Hyundai has created a Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy to explain
how these technologies and services collect use and share this information.
You may read our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy on the Hyundaiusa.com website at:
https://www.hyundaiusa.com/owner-privacy-policy.aspx
If you would like to receive a hard copy of our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy, please contact our Customer
Connect Center at:
Hyundai Customer Care
P.O. Box 20850
Fountain Valley, CA 92728
800-633-5151
consumeraffairs@hmausa.com
Hyundai's Customer Connect Center representatives are available Monday through Friday,
between the hours of 5:00 AM and 7:00 PM PST and Saturday and Sunday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM
PST (English).
For Customer Connect Center assistance in Spanish or Korean, representatives are available Monday
through Friday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM PST.
F3
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing HYUNDAI. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of distinguished people who drive HYUNDAIS. We are very proud of the advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each HYUNDAI we build.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI. To become familiar with
your new HYUNDAI, so that you can fully enjoy it, read this Owner's Manual carefully before driving your new vehicle.
This manual contains important safety information and instructions intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's controls and safety features so you can safely operate your vehicle.
This manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance safe operation of the vehicle. It is recommended that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. HYUNDAI dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.
This Owner's Manual should be considered a permanent part of your vehicle, and should be kept in the vehicle so you
can refer to it at any time. The manual should stay with the vehicle if you sell it to provide the next owner with important operating, safety and maintenance information.
HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA
CAUTION
Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that
do not meet HYUNDAI specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the
specifications listed on Page 8-7 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
Copyright 2017 HYUNDAI Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored
in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI
Motor America.
F4
GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS
1. What are HYUNDAI Genuine
Parts?
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are the
same parts used by HYUNDAI
Motor Company to manufacture
vehicles. They are designed and
tested for the optimum safety, performance, and reliability for our
customers.
2. Why should you use genuine
parts?
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are
engineered and built to meet rigid
manufacturing
requirements.
Damage caused by using imitation, counterfeit or used salvage
parts is not covered under the
HYUNDAI New Vehicle Limited
Warranty or any other HYUNDAI
warranty.
In addition, any damage to or failure of HYUNDAI Genuine Parts
caused by the installation or failure of an imitation, counterfeit or
used salvage part is not covered
by any HYUNDAI Warranty.
3. How can you tell if you are purchasing HYUNDAI Genuine
Parts?
Look for the HYUNDAI Genuine
Parts Logo on the package (see
below).
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts exported to the U.S. are packaged with
labels written only in English.
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are only
sold
through
authorized
HYUNDAI Dealerships.
F5
Introduction
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
SAFETY MESSAGES
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner's Manual can
assist you in many ways. To gain an
overview of the contents of your
Owner's Manual, use the Table of
Contents in the front of the manual.
The first page of each Chapter
includes a detailed Table of Contents
of the topics in that Chapter.
To quickly locate information about
your vehicle, use the Index in the
back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in this manual and
the page number where it can be
found.
For your convenience, we have
incorporated tabs on the right-hand
page edges. These tabs are coded
with the Chapter titles to assist you
with navigating through the manual.
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. This Owner's
Manual provides you with many safety precautions and operating procedures. This information alerts you to
potential hazards that may hurt you
or others, as well as damage to your
vehicle.
Safety messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
these hazards and what to do to
avoid or reduce the risks.
Warnings and instructions contained
in this manual are for your safety.
Failure to follow safety warnings and
instructions can lead to serious injury
or death.
Throughout this manual DANGER,
WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and
the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL will
be used.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to
potential physical injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol
to avoid possible injury or
death. The safety alert symbol precedes the signal words
DANGER, WARNING and
CAUTION.
DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious
injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious
injury.
F6
Introduction
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
could result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
NOTICE indicates a situation
which, if not avoided, could result
in vehicle damage.
Your new vehicle is designed to
obtain maximum performance with
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emissions and spark
plug fouling.
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having an octane
number ((R+M)/2) of 87 (Research
Octane Number 91) or higher. (Do not
use methanol blended fuels)
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the engine
and engine components, never
add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified.
Consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for additional information.
WARNING
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off
when refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.
Gasoline containing alcohol or
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol) are being marketed along with or
instead of leaded or unleaded gasoline. For example, "E15" is a gasohol
comprised of 15% ethanol and 85%
gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 15% ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Either of these fuels may
cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system, engine control system and emission control system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
F7
Introduction
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel comprised of 85 percent ethanol and 15
percent gasoline, and is manufactured exclusively for use in Flexible
Fuel Vehicles. "E85" is not compatible with your vehicle. Use of "E85"
may result in poor engine performance and damage to your vehicle's
engine and fuel system. HYUNDAI
recommends that customers do not
use fuel with an ethanol content
exceeding 15 percent.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to your vehicle’s
engine and fuel system:
• Never use gasohol which contains methanol.
• Never use gasohol containing
more than 15% ethanol.
• Never use leaded fuel or leaded
gasohol.
• Never use "E85" fuel.
Your
New
Vehicle
Limited
Warranty does not cover damage
to the fuel system or any performance problems caused by the use
of "E85" fuel.
F8
Using Fuel Additives (except
Detergent Fuel Additives)
Using fuel additives such as:
- Silicone fuel additive
- Ferrocene (iron-based) fuel additive
- Other metallic-based fuel additives
may result in cylinder misfire, poor
acceleration, engine stalling, damage to the catalyst, or abnormal corrosion, and may cause damage to
the engine resulting in a reduction in
the overall life of the powertrain.
- The Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate.
NOTICE
Damage to the fuel system or performance problem caused by the
use of these fuels or fuel additives
may not be covered by your New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains harmful
manganese-based fuel additives
such as MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl
Manganese Tricarbonyl).
HYUNDAI does not recommend the
use of gasoline containing MMT.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle
performance and affect your emission control system.
The malfunction indicator lamp on
the cluster may come on.
Detergent Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
good quality gasolines treated with
detergent additives such as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, which help prevent deposit formation in the engine.
These gasolines will help the engine
run cleaner and enhance performance
of the Emission Control System. For
more information on TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, please go to the
website (www.toptiergas.com).
Introduction
For customers who do not use TOP
Tier Detergent Gasoline regularly,
and have problems starting or the
engine does not run smoothly, detergent-based fuel additives that you
can purchase separately may be
added to the gasoline. If TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline is not available,
one bottle of additive added to the
fuel tank according to the maintenance schedule is recommended
(refer to the Maintenance Schedule
in chapter 7).
Additives are available from your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer along
with information on how to use them.
Do not mix other additives.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
• This vehicle should not be modified. Modification of your vehicle
could affect its performance, safety
or durability and may even violate
governmental safety and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from any
modification may not be covered
under warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
By following a few simple precautions
for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you
may add to the performance, economy and life of your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is needed to properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
F9
Introduction
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
WARNING
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Items contained in motor vehicles or emitted from them are
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth
defects or reproductive harm.
These include:
• Gasoline and its vapors
• Engine exhaust
• Used engine oil
• Interior passenger compartment components and materials
• Component parts which are
subject to heat and wear
In addition, battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead, lead compounds
and other chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm.
F10
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Your Vehicle at a Glance
1
Safety System of Your Vehicle
2
Convenient Features of Your Vehicle
3
Multimedia System
4
Driving Your Vehicle
5
What to Do in an Emergency
6
Maintenance
7
Specifications, Consumer Information and
Reporting Safety Defects
8
Index
I
Your vehicle at a glance
1
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior Overview ..................................................1-2
Interior Overview ...................................................1-4
Instrument Panel Overview (I) .............................1-5
Instrument Panel Overview (II) ............................1-6
Engine Compartment .............................................1-7
Your vehicle at a glance
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
■ Front view
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1. Hood......................................................3-39
5. Tires and wheels ..................................7-38
2. Windows ................................................3-30
6. Headlamp ..............................................7-67
3. Sunroof..................................................3-34
7. Side repeater lamp................................7-70
4. Wiper blade ..........................................7-32
8. Daytime running light (DRL)..................7-67
OPDE017001N
1-2
■ Rear view
1
Your vehicle at a glance
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1. Door lock ..............................................3-12
4. Side view mirror ....................................3-27
2. Liftgate ..................................................3-40
5. Antenna ..................................................4-3
3. Fuel filler door ......................................3-42
6. Rear combination lamp ........................7-71
OPD017002N
1-3
Your vehicle at a glance
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Inside door handle ................................3-13
2. Side view mirror control switch ..............3-29
3. Power window switches ........................3-30
4. Power window lock switch......................3-33
5. Instrument panel illumination control
switch ....................................................3-46
6. Blind spot detection(BSD) system
button ....................................................5-56
7. Lane keeping assist system (LKAS)
button ....................................................5-74
8. ESC (Electronic Stability Control)
OFF button ............................................5-48
9. Fuse panel ............................................7-54
10. Steering wheel ....................................3-17
11. Steering wheel tilt/telescope lever ......3-18
12. Seat........................................................2-3
13. Hood release lever ..............................3-39
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OPD017003N
1-4
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW (I)
1
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OPD017005L
1-5
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Instrument cluster ..............................3-45
2. Light control/Turn signals....................3-81
3. Wiper/Washer ....................................3-91
4. Steering wheel audio controls/ ............4-3
Bluetooth® wireless technology
hands-free controls ..............................4-4
5. Cruise control switch ................5-86, 5-91
6. Horn ....................................................3-18
7. Driver's front air bag ..........................2-47
8. Key ignition switch/ ..............................5-6
Engine start/stop button........................5-9
9. Audio system/
Navigation system ................................4-4
10. Hazard warning flasher button ..............6-2
11. Central door lock/unlock switch ........3-14
12. Manual climate control system/ ........3-95
Automatic climate control system ..3-104
13. Passenger's front air bag..................2-47
14. Glove box........................................3-121
15. Cup holder ......................................3-123
16. Console box....................................3-121
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW (II)
1. Power outlet ..................................3-125
2. Aux, USB and iPod® ........................4-2
3. Wireless cellular phone charging
system ..........................................3-126
4. Electronic parking brake (EPB)
switch ..............................................5-38
5. Auto Hold ........................................5-43
6. Manual parking brake ....................5-36
7. Seat warmer/Air ventilation seat ....2-18
8. Drive mode button ..........................5-54
9. Manual transmission shift lever ......5-16
10. Automatic transmission shift lever/..5-19
Dual clutch transmission
shift lever ......................................5-25
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-6
OPD017004N
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ Gamma 1.6 T-GDI
1
2. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-21
3. Brake/Clutch fluid reservoir...............7-27
4. Battery ..............................................7-35
5. Fuse box ...........................................7-55
■ Nu 2.0 GDI
6. Air cleaner.........................................7-29
7. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-23
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-28
9. Engine coolant reservoir cap ............7-25
10. Radiator cap ...................................7-25
The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OPD076002/OPD077098L
1-7
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-21
Safety system of your vehicle
This chapter provides you with important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers.
It explains how to properly use your seats and seat belts, and how your air bags work.
Additionally, this chapter explains how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.
2
Important Safety Precautions..............................2-2
Child Restraint System (CRS).............................2-34
Always Wear Your Seat Belt ..........................................2-2
Restrain All Children .........................................................2-2
Air Bag Hazards.................................................................2-2
Driver Distraction ..............................................................2-2
Control Your Speed...........................................................2-2
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition............................2-2
Children Always in the Rear.........................................2-34
Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) .................2-35
Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................2-37
Seats ........................................................................2-3
Safety Precautions ...........................................................2-4
Front Seats .........................................................................2-5
Rear Seats.........................................................................2-11
Head Restraints ...............................................................2-14
Seat Warmers and Air Ventilation Seats...................2-18
Seat Belts ..............................................................2-21
Seat Belt Safety Precautions.......................................2-21
Seat Belt Warning Light ................................................2-22
Seat Belt Restraint System...........................................2-23
Additional Seat Belt Safety Precautions...................2-30
Care of Seat Belts...........................................................2-33
Air Bag
- Advanced Supplemental Restraint System ...2-45
Where Are the Air Bags?..............................................2-47
How Does the Air Bag System Operate?..................2-50
What to Expect After an Air Bag Inflates................2-55
Occupant Classification System (OCS).......................2-56
Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off in a Collision? ........2-61
SRS Care............................................................................2-66
Additional Safety Precautions .....................................2-67
Air Bag Warning Labels.................................................2-67
Safety system of your vehicle
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
You will find many safety precautions
and recommendations throughout
this section, and throughout this manual. The safety precautions in this section are among the most important.
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of accidents. Air bags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with air bags,
ALWAYS make sure you and your
passengers wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
Restrain All Children
All children under age 13 should ride
in your vehicle properly restrained in
a rear seat, not the front seat. Infants
and small children should be
restrained in an appropriate child
restraint. Larger children should use
a booster seat with the lap/shoulder
belt until they can use the seat belt
properly without a booster seat.
2-2
Air Bag Hazards
While air bags can save lives, they can
also cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them, or
who are not properly restrained. Infants,
young children, and shorter adults are
at the greatest risk of being injured by
an inflating air bag. Follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.
Driver Distraction
Driver distraction presents a serious
and potentially deadly danger, especially for inexperienced drivers. Safety
should be the first concern when
behind the wheel and drivers need to
be aware of the wide array of potential
distractions, such as drowsiness,
reaching for objects, eating, personal
grooming, other passengers, and
using cellular phones.
Drivers can become distracted when
they take their eyes and attention off
the road or their hands off the wheel to
focus on activities other than driving.To
reduce your risk of distraction or getting into an accident:
• ALWAYS set up your mobile devices
(i.e., MP3 players, phones, navigation units, etc.) when your vehicle is
parked or safely stopped.
• ONLY use your mobile device when
allowed by laws and when conditions
permit safe use. NEVER text or
email while driving. Most states have
laws prohibiting drivers from texting.
Some states and cities also prohibit
drivers from using handheld phones.
• NEVER let the use of a mobile
device distract you from driving. You
have a responsibility to your passengers and others on the road to
always drive safely, with your hands
on the wheel as well as your eyes
and attention on the road.
Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also occur
at lower speeds. Never drive faster than
is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical
failure can be extremely hazardous. To
reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and
condition frequently, and perform all
regularly scheduled maintenance.
SEATS
■ Driver’s side
■ Passengerr’s side
■ Power adjustment
2
Safety system of your vehicle
■ Manual adjustment
Front seats
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height
(4) Lumbar support (Driver's seat)*
(5) Seat warmer*/Air ventilation seat*
(6) Headrest
Rear seats
(7) Armrest*
(8) Seatback folding
(9) Headrest
* : if equipped
OPD037001N
2-3
Safety system of your vehicle
Safety Precautions
Air bags
Adjusting the seats so that you are sitting in a safe, comfortable position
plays an important role in driver and
passenger safety together with the
seat belts and air bags in an accident.
You can take steps to reduce the risk
of being injured by an inflating air
bag. Sitting too close to an air bag
greatly increases the risk of injury in
the event the air bag inflates.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) recommends
that drivers allow at least 10 inches
(25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and their chest.
WARNING
Do not use a cushion that
reduces friction between the seat
and the passenger. The passenger's hips may slide under the
lap portion of the seat belt during
an accident or a sudden stop.
Serious or fatal internal injuries
could result because the seat
belt cannot operate properly.
2-4
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
air bag, take the following precautions:
• Adjust the driver's seat as far to
the rear as possible while maintaining the ability to maintain
full control of the vehicle.
• Adjust the front passenger seat
as far to the rear as possible.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Hold the steering wheel by the
rim with hands at the 9 o'clock
and 3 o'clock positions to minimize the risk of injuries to your
hands and arms.
• NEVER place anything or anyone between the steering wheel
and the air bag.
• Do not allow the front passenger to place feet or legs on the
dashboard to minimize the risk
of leg injuries.
Seat belts
Always fasten your seat belt before
starting any trip.
At all times, passengers should sit
upright and be properly restrained.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in appropriate child restraint
systems. Adults and children who
have outgrown a booster seat must be
restrained using the seat belts.
WARNING
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when adjusting your seat:
• NEVER attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat could respond
with unexpected movement
and may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
• Do not place anything under
the front seats. Loose objects
in the driver's foot area could
interfere with the operation of
the foot pedals, causing an
accident.
• Do not allow anything to interfere with the normal position
and proper locking of the seatback.
• Do not place a cigarette lighter
on the floor or seat. When you
operate the seat, gas may exit
out of the lighter causing a fire.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Use extreme caution when
picking up small objects
trapped under the seats or
between the seat and the center console. Your hands might
be cut or injured by the sharp
edges of the seat mechanism.
CAUTION
To prevent injury:
• Do not adjust your seat while
wearing your seat belt.
Moving the seat cushion forward may cause strong pressure on your abdomen.
• Do not allow your hands or
fingers to get caught in the
seat mechanisms while the
seat is moving.
2-5
2
Safety system of your vehicle
Take the following precautions
when adjusting your seat belt:
• NEVER use one seat belt for
more than one occupant.
• Always position the seatback
upright with the lap portion of
the seat belt snug and low
across the hips.
• NEVER allow children or small
infants to ride on a passenger's lap.
• Do not route the seat belt
across your neck, across sharp
edges, or reroute the shoulder
strap away from your body.
• Do not allow the seat belt to
become caught or jammed.
Front Seats
Safety system of your vehicle
Manual adjustment (if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the levers located on the outside of the seat cushion. Before driving, adjust the seat to the proper
position so that you can easily control the steering wheel, foot pedals
and controls on the instrument
panel.
2-6
OPD036002
OPD036003
Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rearward:
1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment
lever and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place. Move
forward and rearward without using
the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to
lock.)
WARNING
NEVER ride with a reclined
seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
Drivers and passengers should
ALWAYS sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the seatback is reclined, the
shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be snug against
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you. During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger's
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger's neck will strike the
shoulder belt.
2
OPD036004
Seat cushion height
To change the height of the seat
cushion:
• Push down on the lever several
times, to lower the seat cushion.
• Pull up on the lever several times,
to raise the seat cushion.
2-7
Safety system of your vehicle
Reclining seatback
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the
protection of your restraint system
(seat belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
Safety system of your vehicle
Power adjustment
(for driver's seat, if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the outside of the seat cushion. Before
driving, adjust the seat to the proper
position so that you can easily control
the steering wheel, foot pedals and
controls on the instrument panel.
WARNING
NEVER allow children in the
vehicle unattended. The power
seats are operable when the
vehicle is turned off.
2-8
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the seats:
• Always stop adjusting the seats
when the seat has moved as far
forward or rearward as possible.
• Do not adjust the seats for
longer than necessary when the
vehicle is turned off. This may
result in unnecessary battery
drain.
• Do not operate two or more
seats at the same time. This may
result in an electrical malfunction.
OPD036005
Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rearward:
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
WARNING
OPD036006
Seatback angle
To adjust the seatback:
1. Rotate the top of control switch
forward or rearward.
2. Release the switch once the seatback reaches the desired position.
NEVER ride with a reclined seatback when the vehicle is moving.
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a
collision or sudden stop.
Driver and passengers should
ALWAYS sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the seatback is reclined, the
shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be snug against
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you. During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger's neck will strike the
shoulder belt.
2-9
2
Safety system of your vehicle
Reclining seatback
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the
protection of your restraint system
(seat belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
Safety system of your vehicle
Seatback pocket (if equipped)
OPD036007
OPD036008
Seat cushion height
To change the height of the seat
cushion:
1. • Push the front portion of the control switch up to raise or down to
lower the front part of the seat
cushion.
• Push the rear portion of the control
switch up to raise or down to lower
the height of the seat cushion.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Lumbar support (if equipped)
To adjust the lumbar support:
1. Press the front portion of the
switch (1) to increase support or
the rear portion of the switch (2) to
decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reaches the desired position.
2-10
OAD035017
The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front passenger's
seatback.
WARNING
To prevent the Occupant
Classification System from malfunctioning:
Do not hang onto the front passenger's seatback.
CAUTION
The rear seatbacks can be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
To fold down the rear seatback:
1. Set the front seatback to the
upright position and if necessary,
slide the front seat forward.
WARNING
• Never allow passengers to sit
on top of the folded down
seatback while the vehicle is
moving. This is not a proper
seating position and no seat
belts are available for use.
This could result in serious
injury or death in case of an
accident or sudden stop.
• Objects carried on the folded
down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of
the front seatbacks. This
could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops.
OPD036018
2. Lower the rear head restraints to
the lowest position by pushing and
holding the release button (1) and
pushing down on the headrest (2).
2-11
2
Safety system of your vehicle
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pockets.
In an accident they could come
loose from the pocket and
injure occupants.
Rear Seats
Folding the rear seat
Safety system of your vehicle
OPD036019
OPD036020
3. Move the seatbelt toward the outboard position before folding down
the seatback to avoid the seatbelt
system interfering with the seatback.
5. To use the rear seat, lift and unfold
the seatback to the upright position. Push the seatback firmly until
it clicks into place. Make sure the
seatback is locked in place.
OPD036021
4. Pull up the seatback folding lever
(1), then fold the seat toward the
front of the vehicle.
2-12
OPD036062
WARNING
Do not place objects in the rear
seats, since they cannot be
properly secured and may hit
vehicle occupants in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
WARNING
Make sure the vehicle is off, the
shift lever is in P (Park), and the
parking brake is securely applied
whenever loading or unloading
cargo. Failure to take these steps
may allow the vehicle to move if
the shift lever is inadvertently
moved to another position.
CAUTION
• Be careful when loading
cargo through the rear passenger seats to prevent damage to the vehicle interior.
• When cargo is loaded through
the rear passenger seats,
ensure the cargo is properly
secured to prevent it from
moving while driving.
• Unsecured cargo in the passenger compartment can
cause damage to the vehicle
or injury to it's occupants.
2-13
2
Safety system of your vehicle
When returning the rear seatback from a folded to an upright
position, hold the seatback and
return it slowly. Ensure that the
seatback is completely locked
into its upright position by
pushing on the top of the seatback. In an accident or sudden
stop, the unlocked seatback
could allow cargo to move forward with great force and enter
the passenger compartment,
which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING
Safety system of your vehicle
Armrest
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front and rear seats
have adjustable head restraints. The
head restraints provide comfort for
passengers, but more importantly
they are designed to help protect
passengers from whiplash and other
neck and spinal injuries during an
accident, especially in a rear impact
collision.
(Continued)
•
OLF034072N
WARNING
OPD036022
The armrest is located in the center
of the rear seat. Use the strap in the
center of the armrest to pull it down.
2-14
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death in an accident,
take the following precautions
when adjusting your head
restraints:
• Always properly adjust the
head restraints for all passengers BEFORE starting the
vehicle.
• NEVER let anyone ride in a
seat with the head restraints
removed.
(Continued)
Adjust the head restraints so
the middle of the head
restraint is at the same height
as the height of the top of the
eyes.
• NEVER adjust the head
restraint position of the driver's seat when the vehicle is
in motion.
• Adjust the head restraint as
close to the passenger's head
as possible. Do not use a seat
cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback.
• Make sure the head restraint
locks into position after adjusting it.
Front seat head restraints
NOTICE
To prevent damage, NEVER hit or
pull on the head restraints.
2
When there is no occupant in
the rear seats, adjust the height
of the headrest to the lowest
position. The rear seat headrest
can reduce the visibility of the
rear area.
OPD036010
OPDE036068
The vehicle's front and passenger's
seats are equipped with adjustable
head restraints for the passengers
safety and comfort.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the head restraint:
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the head restraint:
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the head restraint support.
2. Lower the head restraint to the
desired position (3).
2-15
Safety system of your vehicle
CAUTION
Safety system of your vehicle
■ Type A
3. Press the head restraint release
button (3) while pulling the head
restraint up (4).
OPD036011
OLF034015
■ Type B
NOTICE
If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the head restraint
and seat cushion raised, the head
restraint may come in contact with
the sunvisor or other parts of the
vehicle.
OPD036013
Removal/Reinstallation
To remove the head restraint:
1. Recline the seatback (2) rearward
using the seatback angle lever/
switch (1).
2. Raise the head restraint as far as it
can go.
2-16
■ Type A
Rear seat head restraints
2
OPD036017
OPDE036069
The rear seats are equipped with
head restraints in all the seating
positions for the passenger's safety
and comfort.
OPD036014
To reinstall the head restraint:
1. Put the head restraint poles (2) into
the holes while pressing the
release button (1).
2. Adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
3. Adjust the seatback (4) forward
using the seatback angle lever/
switch (3).
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the head restraint:
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the head restraint:
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the head restraint support.
2. Lower the head restraint to the
desired position (3).
2-17
Safety system of your vehicle
OPD036012
■ Type B
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat Warmers and Air
Ventilation Seats
Front seat warmers (if equipped)
Seat warmers are provided to warm
the seats during cold weather.
WARNING
OPD037017N
Removal/Reinstallation
To remove the head restraint:
1. Raise the head restraint as far as
it can go.
2. Press the head restraint release
button (1) while pulling the head
restraint up (2).
To reinstall the head restraint:
1. Put the head restraint poles into
the holes (3) while pressing the
release button (1).
2. Adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
2-18
The seat warmers can cause a
SERIOUS BURN, even at low
temperatures and especially if
used for long periods of time.
Passengers must be able to feel
if the seat is becoming too warm
so they can turn it off, if needed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
People who cannot detect temperature change or pain to the
skin should use extreme caution, especially the following
types of passengers:
• Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients.
• People with sensitive skin or
who burn easily.
• Fatigued individuals.
• Intoxicated individuals.
• People taking medication that
can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness.
To prevent damage to the seat
warmers and seats:
• Never use a solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol
or gasoline to clean the seats.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers.
• Do not change the seat cover. It
may damage the seat warmer.
→
HIGH (
→
■ Type B
LOW (
OPDE036015
While the engine is running, push
either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or front passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
)
2
)
Safety system of your vehicle
NOTICE
OFF
→
NEVER place anything on the
seat that insulates against heat
when the seat warmer is in operation, such as a blanket or seat
cushion. This may cause the
seat warmer to overheat, causing a burn or damage to the seat.
• Each time you push the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
■ Type A
)
→
WARNING
MIDDLE (
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
warmer operating, the seat warmer
will turn OFF.
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position each time the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position.
i Information
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in the
seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
2-19
Safety system of your vehicle
Front air ventilation seat
(if equipped)
• Each time you push the switch, the
airflow changes as follows:
→
HIGH (
OPDE037016L
The air ventilation seats are provided
to cool the front seats by blowing air
through small vent holes on the surface of the seat cushions and seatbacks.
When the operation of the air ventilation seat is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
While the engine is running, push the
switch to cool the driver's seat or the
front passenger's seat.
2-20
)
→
LOW (
)
→
→
OFF
MIDDLE (
)
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the air ventilation seat operating, the operation
will turn OFF.
• The air ventilation seats defaults to
the OFF position each time the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the air ventilation seat:
• Use the air ventilation seat ONLY
when the climate control system
is on. Using the air ventilation
seat for prolonged periods of
time with the climate control system off could cause the air ventilation seat to malfunction.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never use a solvent such as paint
thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline to clean the seats.
• Avoid spilling liquids on the surface of the front seats and seatbacks; this may cause the air vent
holes to become blocked and not
work properly.
• Do not place materials such as
plastic bags or newspapers under
the seats. They may block the air
intake causing the air vents to not
work properly.
• Do not change the seat covers. It
may damage the air ventilation
seat.
• If the air vents do not operate,
restart the vehicle. If there is no
change, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
SEAT BELTS
This section describes how to use the
seat belts properly. It also describes
some of the things to avoid when
using seat belts.
Always fasten your seat belt and
make sure all passengers have fastened their seat belts before starting
any trip. Air bags are designed to
supplement the seat belt as an additional safety device, but they are not a
substitute. Most states require all
occupants of a vehicle to wear seat
belts.
WARNING
Seat belts must be used by ALL
passengers whenever the vehicle is moving. Take the following
precautions when adjusting and
wearing seat belts:
• ALWAYS properly restrain
children under age 13 in the
rear seats.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use a seat belt if the
webbing or hardware is damaged.
• Do not latch the seat belt into
the buckles of other seats.
• NEVER unfasten the seat belt
while driving. This may cause
loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
• Make sure there is nothing in
the buckle interfering with the
seat belt latch mechanism.
This may prevent the seat belt
from fastening securely.
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the
seat belt adjusting devices
from operating to remove
slack, or prevent the seat belt
assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
2-21
2
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat Belt Safety Precautions
(Continued)
• NEVER allow children to ride
in the front passenger seat. If
a child age 13 or older must be
seated in the front seat, move
the seat as far back as possible and properly restrain them
in the seat.
• NEVER allow an infant or child
to be carried on an occupant’s
lap.
• NEVER ride with the seatback
reclined when the vehicle is
moving.
• Do not allow children to share
a seat or seat belt.
• Do not wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back.
• Always wear both the shoulder portion and lap portion of
the lap/shoulder belt.
• Do not use the seat belt if it is
twisted. A twisted seat belt
will not protect you properly
in an accident.
(Continued)
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
Damaged seat belts and seat
belt assemblies will not operate
properly. Always replace:
• Frayed, contaminated, or damaged webbing
• Damaged hardware
• The entire seat belt assembly
after it has been worn in an
accident, even if damage to
webbing or assembly is not
apparent
Seat Belt Warning Light
Seat belt warning light
(for driver's seat)
OLMB033022
As a reminder to the driver, the seat
belt warning light will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time
you place the ignition switch to the
ON position regardless of belt fastening. However, if the seat belt is
unfasted, a warning chime will sound
for approximately 6 seconds.
2-22
If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 6 mph
(9 km/h), the warning light will stay
illuminated.
If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 12 mph
(20 km/h) the seat belt warning chime
will sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning
light will blink.
If you unfasten the seat belt while
driving under 12 mph (20 km/h), the
seat belt warning light will illuminate
until the seat belt is fastened.
If you unfasten the seat belt while
driving over 12 mph (20 km/h), the
seat belt warning chime will sound for
approximately 100 seconds and the
corresponding warning light will blink.
Seat belt warning light
(for front passenger's seat)
As a reminder to the front passenger,
the front passenger's seat belt warning lights will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds each time you
place the ignition switch to the ON
position regardless of belt fastening.
If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 6 mph
(9 km/h), the warning light will stay
illuminated.
WARNING
The front passenger's seat belt
warning light may not properly
operate if the front passenger
does not sit properly in the seat.
Seat Belt Restraint System
2
OLMB033025
WARNING
Improperly positioned seat belts
may increase the risk of serious
injury in an accident. Take the following precautions when adjusting the seat belt:
• Position the lap portion of the
seat belt as low as possible
across your hips, not on your
waist, so that it fits snugly.
(Continued)
2-23
Safety system of your vehicle
OPD037023N
If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 12 mph
(20 km/h) the seat belt warning chime
will sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning
light will blink.
If you unfasten the seat belt while
driving under 12 mph (20 km/h) the
seat belt warning light will illuminate
until the seat belt is fastened.
If you unfasten the seat belt while
driving over 12 mph (20 km/h), the
seat belt warning chime will sound for
approximately 100 seconds and the
corresponding warning light will blink.
Safety system of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Position one arm under the
shoulder belt and the other over
the belt, as shown in the illustration.
• Always position the shoulder
belt anchor into the locked
position at the appropriate
height.
• Never position the shoulder
belt across your neck or face.
Seat Belt-Driver's 3-point system with emergency locking
retractor
NOTICE
If you are not able to smoothly pull
enough of the seat belt out from
the retractor, firmly pull the seat
belt out and release it. After
release, you will be able to pull the
belt out smoothly.
OLMB033087
To fasten your seat belt:
Pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the metal tab (1) into the
buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean
forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt
will extend and move with you.
2-24
If there is a sudden stop or impact,
the belt will lock into position. It will
also lock if you try to lean forward too
quickly.
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the
shoulder belt anchor to one of the
three different positions for maximum
comfort and safety.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so it lies across your chest
and midway over your shoulder nearest the door, not over your neck.
2
ODH033057
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has
locked into position.
To release your seat belt:
Press the release button (1) in the
locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should
automatically draw back into the
retractor. If this does not happen,
check the belt to be sure it is not
twisted, then try again.
2-25
Safety system of your vehicle
OPD036025
Safety system of your vehicle
Rear Seat Belt – Passenger's 3point system with convertible
locking retractor
This type of seat belt combines the
features of both an emergency locking
retractor seat belt and an automatic
locking retractor seat belt. Convertible
retractor type seat belts are installed in
the rear seat positions to help accommodate the installation of child
restraint systems. Although a convertible retractor is also installed in the
front passenger seat position, NEVER
place any infant/child restraint system
in the front seat of the vehicle.
2-26
To fasten your seat belt:
Pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the metal tab into the buckle. There will be an audible "click"
when the tab locks into the buckle.
When not securing a child restraint,
the seat belt operates in the same way
as the driver's seat belt (Emergency
Locking Retractor Type). It automatically adjusts to the proper length only
after the lap belt portion of the seat
belt is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly across your hips.
When the seat belt is fully extended
from the retractor to allow the installation of a child restraint system, the
seat belt operation changes to allow
the belt to retract, but not to extend
(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).
Refer to the "Using a Child Restraint
System" section in this chapter.
NOTICE
Although the seat belt retractor
provides the same level of protection for seated passengers in
either emergency or automatic
locking modes, the emergency
locking mode allows seated passengers to move freely in their
seat while keeping some tension
on the belt. During a collision or
sudden stop, the retractor automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
To deactivate the automatic locking mode, unbuckle the seat belt
and allow the belt to fully retract.
Rear center seat belt
Pre-tensioner seat belt
(Driver and front passenger)
2
To release your seat belt:
Press the release button (1) in the
locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should
automatically draw back into the
retractor. If this does not happen,
check the belt to be sure it is not
twisted, then try again.
OPD037026L
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the "CENTER" mark
must be used.
OTL035053
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's Pre-tensioner
Seat Belts (Retractor Pretensioner
and Emergency Fastening Device
System). The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to make sure the seat belts
fit tightly against the occupant's body
in certain frontal or side collision(s).
The Emergency Fastening Device
System may be activated in certain
crashes where the frontal or side collision(s) is severe enough, together
with the air bags.
2-27
Safety system of your vehicle
ODH033057
Safety system of your vehicle
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor will
lock into position. In certain frontal or
side collision(s), the pre-tensioner
will activate and pull the seat belt into
tighter contact against the occupant's body.
(1) Retractor Pretensioner
The purpose of the retractor pretensioner is to make sure that the
shoulder belts fit in tightly against
the occupant's upper body in certain frontal or side collision(s).
(2) Emergency Fastening Device
System
The purpose of the Emergency
Fastening Device System is to
make sure that the pelvis belts fit
in tightly against the occupant's
lower body in certain frontal or
side collision(s).
If the system senses excessive tension on the driver or passenger's
seat belt when the pre-tensioner system activates, the load limiter inside
the retractor pre-tensioner will
release some of the pressure on the
affected seat belt.
2-28
WARNING
• Always wear your seat belt and
•
•
•
•
•
sit properly in your seat.
Do not use the seat belt if it is
loose or twisted. A loose or
twisted seat belt will not protect you properly in an accident.
Do not place anything near the
buckle. This may adversely
affect the buckle and cause it
to function improperly.
Always replace your pre-tensioners after activation or an
accident.
NEVER inspect, service, repair
or replace the pre-tensioners
yourself. This must be done by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not hit the seat belt assemblies.
WARNING
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been
activated. When the pre-tensioner seat belt mechanism
deploys during a collision, the
pre-tensioners become hot and
can burn you.
NOTICE
• Both the driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat
belts may be activated in certain
frontal or side collisions or
rollovers.
• When the pre-tensioner seat
belts are activated, a loud noise
may be heard and fine dust,
which may appear to be smoke,
may be visible in the passenger
compartment. These are normal
operating conditions and are not
hazardous.
• Although it is non-toxic, the fine
dust may cause skin irritation
and should not be inhaled for
prolonged periods. Wash all
exposed skin areas thoroughly
after an accident in which the
pre-tensioner seat belts were
activated.
2-29
2
Safety system of your vehicle
OLMB033040/Q
The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System
consists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in
the illustration above:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner
3. SRS control module
4. Emergency Fastening Device
System
The sensor that activates the SRS
air bag is connected with the
pre–tensioner seat belts. The SRS
air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is in the ON position, and then it should turn off.
If the pre-tensioner is not working
properly, the warning light will illuminate even if the SRS air bag is
not malfunctioning. If the warning
light does not illuminate, stays
illuminated or illuminates when
the vehicle is being driven, have
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
inspect the pre-tensioner seat
belts and SRS air bags as soon as
possible.
NOTICE
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
• Fasten your seat belt while
sitting properly in an upright
position to maximize the
effectiveness of the pre-tensioner seat belt system.
• A pre-tensioner seat belt system is designed to activate
only once. Replace the pretensioner seat belt system, if it
was activated in an accident.
2-30
Additional Seat Belt Safety
Precautions
Seat belt use during pregnancy
The seat belt should always be used
during pregnancy. The best way to
protect your unborn child is to protect
yourself by always wearing the seat
belt.
Pregnant women should always wear
a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place the
shoulder belt across your chest, routed between your breasts and away
from your neck. Place the lap belt line
so that it fits snugly and as low as possible across the hips, not across the
abdomen.
WARNING
• A pregnant woman or a
patient is more vulnerable to
any imapcts on the abdomen
during an abrupt stop or accident. If you are in an accident
while pregnant, we recommend you consult your doctor.
• To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death to an unborn
child during an accident,
pregnant women should
NEVER place the lap portion
of the seat belt above or over
the area of the abdomen
where the unborn child is
located.
Seat belt use and children
Infant and small children
ALWAYS properly restrain infants
and small children in a child
restraint appropriate for the
child's height and weight.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death to a child and
other passengers, NEVER hold a
child in your lap or arms when
the vehicle is moving.The violent
forces created during an accident will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the interior of the vehicle.
Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when properly restrained in the rear seat by a
child restraint system that meets the
requirements of the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards. Before
buying any child restraint system,
make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard FMVSS 213.
The restraint must be appropriate for
your child’s height and weight. Check
the label on the child restraint for this
information. Refer to the "Child
Restraint Systems" section in this
chapter.
2-31
2
Safety system of your vehicle
All 50 states have child restraint laws
which require children to travel in
approved child restraint devices,
including booster seats. The age at
which seat belts can be used instead
of child restraints differs among
states, so you should be aware of the
specific requirements in your state,
and where you are travelling. Infant
and child restraints must be properly
placed and installed in a rear seat.
For more information refer to the
"Child Restraint Systems" section in
this chapter.
WARNING
Safety system of your vehicle
Larger children
Children under age 13 and who are
too large for a booster seat must
always occupy the rear seat and use
the available lap/shoulder belts. A
seat belt should lie across the upper
thighs and be snug across the shoulder and chest to restrain the child
safely. Check belt fit periodically.
Children are afforded the most safety in the event of an accident when
they are restrained by a proper
restraint system and/or seat belts in
the rear seat. Always have the
LATCH system inspected by your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer after an
accident. An accident can damage
the LATCH system and may not
properly secure the child restraint.
If a larger child over age 13 must be
seated in the front seat, the child
must be securely restrained by the
available lap/shoulder belt and the
seat should be placed in the rearmost position.
2-32
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child's neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center
of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need
to be returned to an appropriate
booster seat in the rear seat.
WARNING
• Always make sure children
are wearing their seat belts
and that they are properly
adjusted before driving.
• NEVER allow the shoulder
belt to contact the child’s
neck or face.
• Do not allow more than one
child to use a single seat belt.
Transporting an injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
Consult a physician for specific recommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
Sitting in a reclined position when the
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even when buckled up, the protections of your restraint system (seat
belts and air bags) is greatly reduced
by reclining your seatback.
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve
the maximum effectiveness of the
restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front and
rear seats should be in an upright
position when the car is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper
protection if the person is lying down
in the rear seat or if the front or rear
seats are in a reclined position.
When to replace seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
The entire seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an accident. This should be done even if no
damage is visible. Additional questions concerning seat belt operation
should be directed to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• NEVER ride with a reclined
seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
• Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
• Drivers and passengers should
always sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.
2-33
2
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
Care of Seat Belts
Safety system of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (CRS)
Children Always in the Rear
WARNING
Always properly restrain children in the rear seats of the
vehicle.
Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
A child riding in the front passenger seat can be forcefully
struck by an inflating air bag
resulting in SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH.
2-34
Children under age 13 must always
ride in the rear seats and must
always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident,
sudden stop or sudden maneuver.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in
the front seat. Even with air bags,
children can be seriously injured
or killed. Children too large for a
child restraint must use the seat belts
provided.
All 50 states have child restraint laws
which require children to travel in
approved child restraint devices. The
laws governing the age or height/
weight restrictions at which seat
belts can be used instead of child
restraints differs among states, so
you should be aware of the specific
requirements in your state, and
where you are travelling.
Child restraint systems must be properly placed and installed in the rear
seat. You must use a commercially
available child restraint system that
meets the requirements of the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS 213).
Child restraint systems are generally
designed to be secured in a vehicle
seat by lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH system in the rear seats of the vehicle.
Child restraint system (CRS)
WARNING
An improperly secured child
restraint can increase the risk
of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH
in an accident. Always take the
following precautions when
using a child restraint system:
• NEVER install a child or infant
restraint in the front passenger's seat.
• Always properly secure the
child restraint to a rear seat of
the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always follow the child
restraint system manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.
• Always properly restrain your
child in the child restraint.
• If the vehicle head restraint
prevents proper installation of
a child seat (as described in
the child restraint system
manual), the head restraint of
the respective seating position shall be readjusted or
entirely removed.
• Do not use an infant carrier or
a child safety seat that
"hooks" over a seatback, it
may not provide adequate
protection in an accident.
• After an accident, have a
HYUNDAI dealer check the
child restraint system, seat
belts, tether anchors and
lower anchors.
Selecting a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
When selecting a CRS for your child,
always:
• Make sure the CRS has a label
certifying that it meets applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS 213).
• Select a child restraint based on
your child's height and weight. The
required label or the instructions
for use typically provide this information.
• Select a child restraint that fits the
vehicle seating position where it
will be used.
• Read and comply with the warnings and instructions for installation
and use provided with the child
restraint system.
2-35
2
Safety system of your vehicle
Infants and younger children must be
restrained in an appropriate rear-facing or forward-facing CRS that has
first been properly secured to the
rear seat of the vehicle. Read and
comply with the instructions for
installation and use provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint.
Safety system of your vehicle
Child restraint system types
Continue to use a rear-facing child
seat for as long as your child will fit
within the height and weight limits
allowed by the child seat manufacturer. It's the best way to keep them
safe. Once your child has outgrown
the rear-facing child restraint, your
child is ready for a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness.
There are three main types of child
restraint systems: rear-facing seats,
forward-facing seats, and booster
seats. They are classified according
to the child's age, height and weight.
Rear-facing child seats
WARNING
NEVER install a child or infant
restraint in the front passenger's seat.
Placing a rear-facing child
restraint in the front seat can
result in SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH if the child restraint is
struck by an inflating air bag.
2-36
OPD036027
A rear-facing child seat provides
restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the child. The harness system holds the child in place,
and in an accident, acts to keep the
child positioned in the seat and
reduce the stress to the neck and
spinal cord.
All children under age one must
always ride in a rear-facing infant child
restraint.
Convertible and 3-in-1 child seats typically have higher height and weight
limits for the rear-facing position,
allowing you to keep your child rearfacing for a longer period of time.
Forward-facing child restraints
A forward-facing child seat provides
restraint for the child's body with a
harness. Keep children in a forwardfacing child seat with a harness until
they reach the top height or weight
limit allowed by your child restraint’s
manufacturer.
Once your child outgrows the forwardfacing child restraint, your child is
ready for a booster seat.
Installing a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
WARNING
2
Before installing your child
restraint system always:
• Read and follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.
• Read and follow the instructions regarding child restraint
systems in this manual.
Failure to follow all warnings
and instructions could increase
the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH if an accident occurs.
WARNING
If the vehicle headrest prevents
proper installation of a child
seat (as described in the child
seat system manual, the headrest of the respective seating
position shall be readjusted or
entirely removed.
2-37
Safety system of your vehicle
OPD036028
Booster seats
A booster seat is a restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle's seat
belt system. A booster seat positions
the seat belt so that it fits properly
over the lap of your child.
Keep your child in a booster seat until
they are big enough to sit in the seat
without a booster and still have the
seat belt fit properly. For a seat belt to
fit properly, the lap belt must lie snugly across the upper thighs, not the
stomach. The shoulder belt should lie
snug across the shoulder and chest
and not across the neck or face.
Children under age 13 must always
ride in the rear seats and must always
be properly restrained to minimize the
risk of injury.
Safety system of your vehicle
After selecting a proper child seat for
your child, check to make sure it fits
properly in your vehicle. Follow the
instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child
seat. Note these general steps when
installing the seat to your vehicle:
• Properly secure the child
restraint to the vehicle. All child
restraints must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a
lap/shoulder belt or with the
LATCH system. If using the
lap/shoulder belt for your child
restraint, the convertible locking
retractor should be pulled all the
way out to engage the "automatic
locking" mode. (See page 2-42.)
• Make sure the child restraint is
firmly secured. After installing a
child restraint to the vehicle, push
and pull the seat forward-and-back
and side-to-side to verify that it is
securely attached to the seat. A
child restraint secured with a seat
belt should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, some side-toside movement can be expected.
2-38
• Secure the child in the child
restraint. Make sure the child is
properly strapped in the child
restraint according to the manufacturer instructions.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed
vehicle can become very hot. To
prevent burns, check the seating surface and buckles before
placing your child in the child
restraint.
Lower Anchors and Tether for
Children (LATCH System)
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving and in an accident. This system is designed to
make installation of the child restraint
easier and reduce the possibility of
improperly installing your child
restraint. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint. The
LATCH system eliminates the need
to use seat belts to secure the child
restraint to the rear seats.
Lower anchors are metal bars built
into the vehicle. There are two lower
anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attachments.
To use the LATCH system in your
vehicle, you must have a child
restraint with LATCH attachments.
The child seat manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to
use the child seat with its attachments
for the LATCH lower anchors.
WARNING
LATCH anchors have been provided
in the left and right outboard rear
seating positions. Their locations are
shown in the illustration. There are no
LATCH anchors provided for the center rear seating position.
2
Lower Anchor
OPD036031
The lower anchor position indicator
symbols are located on the left and
right rear seat backs to identify the
position of the lower anchors in your
vehicle (see arrows in illustration).
The LATCH anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the rear seat left and right
outboard seating positions.
2-39
Safety system of your vehicle
OAE036063
Do not attempt to install a child
restraint system using LATCH
anchors in the rear center seating position.There are no LATCH
anchors provided for this seat.
Using the outboard seat anchors
can damage the anchors which
may break or fail in a collision
resulting in serious injury or
death.
Lower Anchor
Position Indicator
Safety system of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint with
the LATCH anchors system
To install a LATCH-compatible child
restraint in either of the rear outboard
seating positions:
1. Move the seat belt buckle away from
the lower anchors.
2. Move any other objects away from
the anchors that could prevent a
secure connection between the child
restraint and the lower anchors.
3. Place the child restraint on the vehicle seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
instructions provided by the child
restraint manufacturer.
4. Follow the child restraint instructions
for properly adjusting and tightening
the lower attachments on the child
restraint to the lower anchors.
2-40
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when using the LATCH system:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your child restraint system.
• To prevent the child from
reaching and taking hold of
unretracted seat belts, buckle
all unused rear seat belts and
retract the seat belt webbing
behind the child. Children can
be strangled if a shoulder belt
becomes wrapped around
their neck and the seat belt
tightens.
• NEVER attach more than one
child restraint to a single
anchor. This could cause the
anchor or attachment to come
loose or break.
• Always have the LATCH system inspected by your authorized HYUNDAI dealer after an
accident. An accident can
damage the LATCH system
and may not properly secure
the child restraint.
NOTICE
The recommended weight for the
LATCH system is under 65 lb (30
kg).
How to determine an appropriate
child restraint weight:
Child weight + Child restraint
weight < 65 lb (30kg)
Securing a child restraint seat
with "Tether Anchor" system
Take the following precautions
when installing the tether strap:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your child restraint system.
• NEVER attach more than one
child restraint to a single tether anchor. This could cause
the anchor or attachment to
come loose or break.
• Do not attach the tether strap
to anything other than the correct tether anchor. It may not
work properly if attached to
something else.
• Do not use the tether anchors
for adult seat belts or harnesses, or for attaching other items
or equipment to the vehicle.
2
OPD036030
To install the tether anchor:
1. Route the child restraint tether strap
over the child restraint seatback.
Route the tether strap under the
head restraint and between the
head restraint posts, or route the
tether strap over the top of the vehicle seatback. Make sure the strap is
not twisted.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the tether strap according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions to firmly
secure the child restraint to the seat.
3. Check that the child restraint is
securely attached to the seat by
pushing and pulling the seat forward-and-back and side-to-side.
2-41
Safety system of your vehicle
OPD036029
First secure the child restraint with
the LATCH lower anchors or the seat
belt. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether
strap be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether strap to the top tether
strap anchor.
Child restraint hook holders are
located on the rear of the seatbacks.
WARNING
Safety system of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint with
lap/shoulder belt
To install a child restraint system on
the rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the child restraint system on
a rear seat and route the lap/
shoulder belt around or through
the child restraint, following the
restraint manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the seat belt webbing is
not twisted.
When not using the LATCH system,
all child restraints must be secured to
a vehicle rear seat with the lap part
of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING
ALWAYS place a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat of
the vehicle.
Placing a rear-facing child
restraint in the front seat can
result in serious injury or death
if the child restraint is struck by
an inflating air bag.
2-42
OLMB033044
Automatic locking mode
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and
only lock under extreme or emergency conditions (emergency locking
mode), you must manually pull the
seat belt all the way out to shift the
retractor to the "Automatic Locking"
mode to secure a child restraint.
The "Automatic Locking" mode will
help prevent the normal movement
of the child in the vehicle from causing the seat belt to loosen and compromise the child restraint system. To
secure a child restraint system, use
the following procedure.
NOTICE
When using the rear center seat
belt, you should also refer to the
"Rear Seat Belt – Passenger's 3point system" section in this
chapter.
2
OLMB033097
OLMB033098
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the distinct "click" sound.
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat
belt all the way out. When the shoulder portion of the seat belt is fully
extended, it will shift the retractor to
the "Automatic Locking" (child
restraint) mode.
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of
the seat belt to retract and listen for
an audible "clicking" or "ratcheting"
sound. This indicates that the
retractor is in the "Automatic
Locking" mode. If no distinct sound
is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
i Information
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
2-43
Safety system of your vehicle
OLMB033045
Safety system of your vehicle
5. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat
belt is holding it firmly in place. If it
is not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is
in the "Automatic Locking" mode
by attempting to pull more of the
seat belt out of the retractor. If you
cannot, the retractor is in the
"Automatic Locking" mode.
If your CRS manufacturer instructs or
recommends you to use a tether
anchor with the lap/shoulder belt,
refer to the previous pages for more
information.
2-44
NOTICE
When the seat belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position,
the retractor will automatically
switch from the "Automatic
Locking" mode to the emergency
lock mode for normal adult usage.
WARNING
If the retractor is not in the
"Automatic Locking" mode, the
child restraint can move when
your vehicle turns or stops suddenly. A child can be seriously
injured or killed if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
in the car, including manually
pulling the seat belt all the way
out to shift the rectractor to the
"Automatic Locking" mode.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt
to retract fully.
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
2
Safety system of your vehicle
1. Driver's front air bag
2. Passenger's front air bag
3. Side air bag
4. Curtain air bag
5. Driver's knee air bag
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OPD036032
2-45
Safety system of your vehicle
This vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Air Bag
System for the driver's seat and front
passenger's seats.
The front air bags are designed to
supplement the three-point seat
belts. For these air bags to provide
protection, the seat belts must be
worn at all times when driving.
You can be severely injured or killed
in an accident if you are not wearing
a seat belt. Air bags are designed to
supplement seat belts, but do not
replace them. Also, air bags are not
designed to deploy in every collision.
In some accidents, the seat belts are
the only restraint protecting you.
2-46
WARNING
AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ALWAYS use seat belts and child restraints - every trip, every time,
everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or killed in
a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your seat belt
when the air bag inflates.
NEVER place a child in any child restraint or booster seat in the front
passenger seat. An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant
or child causing serious or fatal injuries.
ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the
safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older
must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted
and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.
All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked
and is turned off. If an occupant is out of position during an accident,
the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the occupant
causing serious or fatal injuries.
You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags or lean against the door or center console.
Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. The U.S. National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends that drivers allow at
least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and
the chest.
Where Are the Air Bags?
Driver's and passenger's front
air bags
OPD036033
■ Driver's knee air bag
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and front passengers with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt system
alone. The advanced SRS offers the
ability to control the air bag inflation
within two levels. A first stage level is
provided for moderate-severity
impacts. A second stage level is provided for more severe impacts.
According to the impact severity, the
SRS Control Module (SRSCM) controls the air bag inflation. Failure to
properly wear seat belts can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an accident.
OPD036034
■ Passenger's front air bag
OPD036041
2-47
2
Safety system of your vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Advanced Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) and lap/shoulder belts
at both the driver and passenger
seating positions.
The SRS consists of air bags which
are located in the center of the steering wheel, in the driver's side lower
crash pad below the steering wheel
column and the passenger's side
front panel pad above the glove box.
The air bags are labeled with the letters "AIR BAG" embossed on the
pad covers.
■ Driver's front air bag
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
front air bags, take the following
precautions:
• Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants
positioned properly.
• Move your seat as far back as
possible from front air bags,
while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
• Never lean against the door or
center console.
• Do not allow the front passenger to place their feet or legs
on the dashboard.
• No objects (such as crash pad
cover, cellular phone holder,
cup holder, perfume or stickers)
should be placed over or near
the air bag modules on the
steering wheel, instrument
panel, windshield glass, and the
front passenger's panel above
the glove box. Such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle
is in a crash severe enough to
cause the air bags to deploy.
2-48
Side air bags
The side air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity.
The side and curtain air bags on
both sides of the vehicle may deploy
if a rollover or possible rollover is
detected.
The side air bags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact or rollover
situations.
OPD036042
WARNING
OPD036043
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
air bag in each front seat. The purpose of the air bag is to provide the
vehicle's driver and the front passenger with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt alone.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
side air bag, take the following
precautions:
• Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants
positioned properly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not place any objects
between the door and the
seat. They may become dangerous projectiles if the side
air bag inflates.
• Do not install any accessories
on the side or near the side air
bags.
• Do not put any objects
between the side airbag label
and seat cushion. It could
cause harm if the vehicle is in
a crash severe enough to
cause the air bags to deploy.
• Do not cause impact to the
doors when the ignition
switch button is in the ON
position as this may cause the
side air bags to inflate.
• If the seat or seat cover is
damaged, have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Curtain air bags
2
OPD036044
OPD036045
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
2-49
Safety system of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Do not allow passengers to
lean their heads or bodies
onto doors, put their arms on
the doors, stretch their arms
out of the window, or place
objects between the doors
and seats.
• Hold the steering wheel at the
9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions, to minimize the risk of
injuries to your hands and
arms.
• Do not use any accessory
seat covers. This could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness
of the system.
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air
bag and yourself. Also, do not
attach any objects around the
area the air bag inflates such
as the door, side door glass,
front and rear pillar.
(Continued)
Safety system of your vehicle
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants
and the rear outboard seat occupants
in certain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side
impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity.
The side and curtain air bags on
both sides of the vehicle may deploy
if a rollover or possible rollover is
detected.
The curtain air bags are not designed
to deploy in all side impact or rollover
situations.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
curtain air bag, take the following precautions:
• All seat occupants must wear
seat belts at all times to help
keep occupants positioned
properly.
(Continued)
2-50
(Continued)
• Properly
secure
child
restraints as far away from the
door as possible.
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag. Also, do not attach
any objects around the area
the air bag inflates such as the
door, side door glass, front
and rear pillar, roof side rail.
• Do not hang other objects
except clothes, especially
hard or breakable objects. In
an accident, it may cause
vehicle damage or personal
injury.
• Do not allow passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and seats.
• Do not open or repair the side
curtain air bags.
How Does the Air Bag System
Operate?
OAEE036075N
The SRS consists of the following
components:
1. Driver's front air bag module/
Driver's knee airbag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side air bag modules/
Side impact sensors
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side pressure sensors
10. Emergency Fastening Device
System
11. Occupant classification system
The SRS (Supplement Restraint
System) air bag warning light on the
instrument panel displays the air bag
symbol depicted in the illustration.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions. The
light indicates that there is a potential
malfunction with your air bag system,
which could include your side and
curtain air bags used for rollover protection.
WARNING
If your SRS malfunctions, the air
bag may not inflate properly during an accident increasing the
risk of serious injury or death.
If any of the following conditions occur, your SRS is malfunctioning:
• The light does not turn on for
approximately six seconds
when the Engine Start/Stop
button is in the ON position.
• The light stays on after illuminating for approximately six
seconds.
• The light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the
engine is running.
Have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer inspect the SRS as soon
as possible if any of these conditions occur.
2-51
2
Safety system of your vehicle
The SRSCM (Supplemental Restraint
System Control Module) continually
monitors all SRS components while
the ignition switch is in the ON position
to determine if a crash impact is
severe enough to require air bag
deployment or pre-tensioner seat belt
deployment.
SRS warning light
Safety system of your vehicle
During a frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle's deceleration. If
the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will inflate
the front air bags.
The front air bags help protect the
driver and front passenger by
responding to frontal impacts in
which seat belts alone cannot provide adequate restraint. When needed, the side air bags help provide
protection in the event of a side
impact or rollover.
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
Engine Start/Stop button is in the
ON position.
• Air bags inflate in the event of certain frontal or side collisions to help
protect the occupants from serious
physical injury.
• Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a
collision, its direction, etc. These
two factors determine whether the
sensors produce an electronic
deployment/inflation signal.
2-52
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the
density and stiffness of the vehicles
or objects which your vehicle
impacts during a collision. The
determining factors are not limited
to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant. It is
virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an accident. It is much more likely that you
will simply see the deflated air bags
hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision.
• In addition to inflating in certain
side collisions, vehicles equipped
with a rollover sensor, side and
curtain air bags will inflate if the
sensing system detects a rollover.
When a rollover is detected, side
and curtain air bags will remain
inflated longer to help provide protection from ejection, especially
when used in conjunction with the
seat belts.
• To help provide protection, the air
bags must inflate rapidly. The speed
of air bag inflation is a consequence
of extremely short time in which to
inflate the air bag between the
occupant and the vehicle structures
before the occupant impacts those
structures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or lifethreatening injuries and is thus a
necessary part of air bag design.
However, the rapid air bag inflation
can also cause injuries which can
include facial abrasions, bruises
and broken bones because the
inflation speed also causes the air
bags to expand with a great deal of
force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the air
bag can cause fatal injuries, especially if the occupant is positioned
excessively close to the air bag.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
air bag, take the following precautions:
• NEVER place a child restraint
in the front passenger seat.
Always properly restrain children under age 13 in the rear
seats of the vehicle.
• Adjust the front passenger’s
and driver's seats as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle.
• Hold the steering wheel with
hands at the 9 o'clock and 3
o'clock positions.
• Never place anything or anyone between the air bag and
the seat occupant.
• Do not allow the front passenger to place their feet or legs
on the dashboard.
■ Driver's front air bag (1)
2
OHM039102N
When the SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically
deploy the front air bags.
2-53
Safety system of your vehicle
You can take steps to help reduce
the risk of being injured by an inflating air bag. The greatest risk is sitting
too close to the air bag. An air bag
needs about 10 inches (25 cm) of
space to inflate. NHTSA recommends that drivers allow at least 10
inches (25 cm) between the center of
the steering wheel and the chest.
Safety system of your vehicle
■ Driver's front air bag (2)
■ Driver's front air bag (3)
WARNING
OHM039104N
OHM039103N
Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers allows full
inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver or the front passenger forward motion, reducing the risk
of head and chest injury.
2-54
■ Passenger's front air bag
OLMB033057
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling
the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
To prevent objects from becoming dangerous projectiles when
the passenger's air bag inflates:
• Do not install or place any
objects (drink holder, CD
holder, stickers, etc.) on the
front passenger's panel above
the glove box where the passenger's air bag is located.
• Do not install a container of
liquid air freshener near the
instrument cluster or on the
instrument panel surface.
What to Expect After an Air
Bag Inflates
WARNING
After an air bag inflates, take
the following precautions:
• Open your windows and doors
as soon as possible after
impact to reduce prolonged
exposure to the smoke and
powder released by the inflating air bag.
• Do not touch the air bag storage area's internal components immediately after an air
bag has inflated. The parts
that come into contact with an
inflating air bag may be very
hot.
(Continued)
Noise and smoke from inflating
air bag
When the air bags inflate, they make
a loud noise and may produce
smoke and powder in the air inside of
the vehicle. This is normal and is a
result of the ignition of the air bag
inflator. After the air bag inflates, you
may feel substantial discomfort in
breathing because of the contact of
your chest with both the seat belt and
the air bag, as well as from breathing
the smoke and powder. The powder
may aggravate asthma for some
people. If you experience breathing
problems after an air bag deployment, seek medical attention immediately.
Though the smoke and powder are
nontoxic, they may cause irritation to
the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc. If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and seek
medical attention if the symptoms
persist.
2-55
2
Safety system of your vehicle
After a frontal or side air bag inflates,
it will deflate very quickly. Air bag
inflation will not prevent the driver
from seeing out of the windshield or
being able to steer. Curtain air bags
may remain partially inflated for
some time after they deploy.
(Continued)
• Always wash exposed skin
areas thoroughly with cold
and mild soap.
• Always have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer replace the
air bag immediately after
deployment. Air bags are
designed to be used only
once.
Safety system of your vehicle
Occupant Classification
System (OCS)
OPD037078N
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) in the front passenger's seat.
Main components of the
Occupant Classification System
• A detection device located within
the front passenger seat cushion.
• Electronic system to determine
whether the passenger air bag
systems should be activated or
deactivated.
• An indicator light located on the
instrument panel which illuminates
the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicating the front passenger air bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag indicator light is interconnected with
the OCS.
The OCS is designed to help detect
the presence of a properly-seated
front passenger and determine if the
passenger's front air bag should be
enabled (may inflate) or not.
The purpose is to help reduce the
risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger
seat occupants, such as children, by
requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF.
2-56
For example, if a child restraint of the
type specified in the regulations is on
the seat, the occupant classification
sensor can detect it and cause the
air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and
wearing the seat belt properly,
should not cause the passenger air
bag to be automatically turned OFF.
For small adults it may be turned
OFF, however, if the occupant does
not sit in the seat properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting
on the edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could
cause the sensor to turn the air bag
OFF.
You will find the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator on the center
fascia panel. This system detects the
conditions 1-4 in the following table
and activates or deactivates the front
passenger air bag based on these
conditions.
Condition and operation in the front passenger Occupant Classification System
Indicator/Warning light
Condition detected by the
occupant classification system
Devices
"PASSENGER
Front passenger
SRS
AIR BAG OFF"
warning light
air bag
indicator light
1. Adult *1
Off
Off
Activated
2. Infant * or child restraint
system with 12 months old *3 *4
On
Off
Deactivated
3. Unoccupied
On
Off
Deactivated
4. Malfunction in the system
Off
On
Activated
2
*1 The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front
passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique
and posture.
*2 Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize
him/her as an adult depending upon his/her physique or sitting position.
*3 Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
*4 The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above 12 months
to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front passenger seat. This is
a normal condition.
2-57
2
Safety system of your vehicle
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated properly
and wearing the seat belt properly for
the most effective protection by the
air bag and the seat belt.
The OCS may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which
can affect the classification system.
These include:
• Failing to sit in an upright position.
• Leaning against the door or center
console.
• Sitting towards the sides of the
front of the seat.
• Putting their legs on the dashboard
or resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger
weight on the front seat.
• Wearing the seat belt improperly.
• Reclining the seatback.
• Wearing a thick cloth like ski wear
or hip protection wear.
• Putting an additional thick cushion
on the seat.
• Putting electrical devices (e.g.
notebook, satellite radio) on the
seat with inverter charging.
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
Riding in an improper position or placing weight on the front passenger’s seat when it is unoccupied by a
passenger adversely affects the OCS. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death:
• NEVER put a heavy load in
• NEVER ride with the seat-
the front seat or seatback
pocket, or hang any items
on the front passenger
seat.
back reclined when the
vehicle is moving.
OLMB033103
OVQ036013NB
• NEVER place your feet or
• NEVER place your feet on
legs on the dashboard.
the front passenger seatback.
OLMB033100
OLMB033101
2-58
OLMB033102
• NEVER sit with your hips
• NEVER lean on the door or
shifted towards the front
of the seat.
center console or sit on
one side of the front passenger seat.
OLMB033104
(continued)
(continued)
• Do not place electronic
ger seat wearing heavily
padded clothes such as
ski wear and hip protector.
devices such as laptops,
DVD player, or conductive
materials such as water
bottles on the passenger
seat.
• Do not use electronic
devices such as laptops
and satellite radios which
use inverter chargers.
ODH035900K
ODH035902K
• If large quantity of liquid
• Do not use car seat
accessories such as thick
blankets and cushions
which cover up the car
seat surface.
ODH035901K
ODH035903K
has been spilled on the
passenger seat, the air
bag warning light may
illuminate or malfunction.
Therefore, make sure the
seat has been completely
dried before driving the
vehicle.
• Do not place sharp objects on the front passenger seat. These may damage the occupant detection system, if they puncture the seat cushion.
• Do not place any items under the front passenger seat.
• When changing or replacing the seat or seat cover, use original items only. The OCS has been developed based on using original HYUNDAI car seats only. Altering or changing the authentic parts may
result in system malfunction and increase risk of injury when in collision. Any of the above could interfere with the proper operation of the OCS sensor thereby increasing the risk of an injury in an accident.
2-59
2
Safety system of your vehicle
• Do not sit on the passen-
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
B990A01O
Proper seated position for OCS
If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator is on when an adult is seated in the front passenger seat, place
the Engine Start/Stop button in the
OFF position and ask the passenger
to sit properly (sitting upright with the
seat back in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their
seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and their feet on the floor).
Restart the engine and have the person remain in that position. This will
allow the system to detect the person
and to enable the passenger air bag.
If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator is still on, ask the passenger to move to the rear seat.
2-60
Never allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front passenger
seat when the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator is illuminated. During a collision, the air bag
will not inflate if the indicator is
illuminated. Have your passenger reposition himself in the
seat. If the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator remains illuminated after the passenger
repositions himself properly and
the vehicle is restarted, have the
passenger move to the rear seat
because the air bag will not
inflate.
NOTICE
The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator illuminates for approximately 4 seconds after the Engine
Start/Stop button is in the ON
position or after the engine is
started. If the front passenger seat
is occupied, the OCS will then
classify the front passenger after
several more seconds.
Do Not Install a Child Restraint
in the Front Passenger's Seat
1JBH3051
Even though your vehicle is equipped
with the OCS, never install a child
restraint in the front passenger's seat.
An inflating air bag can forcefully
strike a child or child restraint resulting in serious or fatal injury.
WARNING
• NEVER place a rear-facing or
Air bags are not designed to inflate in
every collision. There are certain
types of accidents in which the air bag
would not be expected to provide
additional protection. These include
rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple impact accidents, as
well as low speed impacts. Damage
to the vehicle indicates a collision
energy absorption, and is not an indicator of whether or not an air bag
should have inflated.
Air bag collision sensors
WARNING
To reduce the risk of an air bag
deploying unexpectedly and
causing serious injury or death:
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where air
bags or sensors are installed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not perform maintenance
on or around the air bag sensors. If the location or angle of
the sensors is altered, the air
bags may deploy when they
should not or may not deploy
when they should.
• Do not install bumper guards
or replace the bumper with a
non-genuine HYUNDAI parts.
This may adversely affect the
collision and air bag deployment performance.
• Place the ignition switch in
the LOCK/OFF or ACC position when the vehicle is being
towed to prevent inadvertent
air bag deployment.
• Have all air bag repairs conducted by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
2-61
2
Safety system of your vehicle
front-facing child restraint in
the front passenger's seat of
the vehicle.
• An inflating frontal air bag
could forcefully strike a child
resulting in serious injury or
death.
• Always properly restrain children in an appropriate child
restraint in the rear seat of the
vehicle.
Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off
in a Collision?
Safety system of your vehicle
1. SRS control module/Rollover sensor
2. Front impact sensor
3. Side pressure sensor
4. Side impact sensor
OPDE037046N/OPDE036047/OPDE037048N/OPD036049/OPD036050
2-62
Air bag inflation conditions
OPD036051
Front air bags
Front air bags and the driver's knee
air bag are designed to inflate in a
frontal collision depending on the the
severity of impact of the front collision.
OPD036053
Side and curtain air bags
Side and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the severity of impact
resulting from a side impact collision.
2-63
2
Safety system of your vehicle
OPD036052
Although the driver's and front passenger's air bags are designed to
inflate only in frontal collisions, they
also may inflate in other types of collisions if the front impact sensors
detect a sufficient impact. Side and
curtain air bags are designed to
inflate only in side impact collisions
or rollover situations, but they may
inflate in other collisions if the side
impact sensors detect a sufficient
impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on
surfaces not designed for vehicle
traffic to prevent unintended air bag
deployment.
Safety system of your vehicle
Air bag non-inflation conditions
OPD036054
In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags
are designed not to deploy in such
cases because they may not provide
benefits beyond the protection of the
seat belts.
2-64
OPD036055
OPD036056
Front air bags are not designed to
inflate in rear collisions, because
occupants are moved backward by
the force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not provide
any additional benefit.
Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move in the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, front air bag
deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.
However, side and curtain air bags
may inflate depending on the severity of impact.
2
OPD036057
OTL035068
In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would
not be able to provide any additional
benefit, and thus the sensors may
not deploy any air bags.
Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehicle
causing it to "ride" under a vehicle
with a higher ground clearance. Air
bags may not inflate in this "underride" situation because deceleration
forces that are detected by sensors
may be significantly reduced by such
"underride" collisions.
Front air bags may not inflate in
rollover accidents because air bag
deployment could not provide protection to the occupants.
However, side and curtain air bags
may inflate when the vehicle is rolled
over by a side impact collision.
2-65
Safety system of your vehicle
OTL035069
Safety system of your vehicle
SRS Care
OPD036058
Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated and the collision energy is absorbed by the vehicle structure.
2-66
The SRS is virtually maintenancefree and there are no parts you can
safely service by yourself. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is in the
ON position, or continuously remains
on, have your vehicle immediately
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such
as removing, installing, repairing, or
any work on the steering wheel, the
front passenger's panel, front seats
and roof rails must be performed by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Improper handling of the SRS system
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death, take the following precautions:
• Do not attempt to modify or
disconnect the SRS components or wiring, including the
addition of any kind of badges
to the pad covers or modifications to the body structure.
• Do not place objects over or
near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, or the front passenger’s panel above the glove
box.
• Clean the air bag pad covers
with a soft cloth moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely
affect the air bag covers and
proper deployment of the system.
• Always have inflated air bags
replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
Additional Safety Precautions
Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash or
emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or be ejected
from the vehicle.
Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
seat belt can reduce the protection
provided by the seat belt and increase
the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing
components or side air bags.
Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring
harnesses.
Do not cause impact to the doors.
Impact to the doors when the Engine
Start/Stop button is in the ON position
may cause the air bags to inflate.
Modifications to accommodate
disabilities. If you require modification to your vehicle to accommodate
a disability, contact the HYUNDAI
Customer Connect Center at 1-877378-8727.
Air Bag Warning Labels
2
OAD035053N
Air bag warning labels, required by
the U.S. National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), are
attached to alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air
bag system. Be sure to read all of the
information about the air bags that
are installed on your vehicle in this
Owners Manual.
Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
2-67
Safety system of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If components of the air bag
system must be discarded, or if
the vehicle must be scrapped,
certain safety precautions
must be observed. Consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
the necessary information.
Failure to follow these precautions could increase the risk of
personal injury.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Accessing Your Vehicle .........................................3-3
Panoramic Sunroof ..............................................3-34
Remote Key.........................................................................3-3
Smart Key............................................................................3-6
Immobilizer System.........................................................3-11
Sunshade...........................................................................3-35
Sliding the Sunroof.........................................................3-35
Tilting the Sunroof .........................................................3-36
Closing the Sunroof........................................................3-36
Resetting the Sunroof ...................................................3-37
Sunroof Open Warning..................................................3-38
Door Locks............................................................3-12
Operating Door Locks from Outside the Vehicle....3-12
Operating Door Locks from Inside the Vehicle .......3-13
Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features...............................3-15
Child-Protector Rear Door Locks ...............................3-16
Theft-alarm System ............................................3-16
Steering Wheel .....................................................3-17
Electric Power Steering (EPS) .....................................3-17
Tilt Steering/Telescope Steering.................................3-18
Horn....................................................................................3-18
Heated Steering Wheel..................................................3-19
Mirrors...................................................................3-19
Exterior Features.................................................3-39
Hood ...................................................................................3-39
Liftgate ..............................................................................3-40
Fuel Filler Door................................................................3-42
Instrument Cluster ...............................................3-45
Instrument Cluster Control............................................3-46
Gauges and Meters ........................................................3-47
Transmission Shift Indicator.........................................3-50
Warning and Indicator Lights.......................................3-52
LCD Display Messages ...................................................3-63
Inside Rearview Mirror ..................................................3-19
Side View Mirrors ...........................................................3-27
LCD Display ...........................................................3-69
Windows ................................................................3-30
LCD Display Control........................................................3-69
LCD Display Modes.........................................................3-70
Power Windows ...............................................................3-31
Trip Computer .......................................................3-77
3
3
Lighting..................................................................3-81
Climate Control Additional Features ...............3-120
Exterior Lights .................................................................3-81
Interior Lights...................................................................3-87
Welcome System .............................................................3-90
Cluster ionizer................................................................3-120
Automatic Ventilation...................................................3-120
Sunroof Inside Air Recirculation ...............................3-120
Wipers and Washers............................................3-91
Storage Compartment .......................................3-121
Windshield Wipers...........................................................3-91
Windshield Washers .......................................................3-92
Rear Window Wiper and Washer................................3-93
Driver Assist System ...........................................3-94
Center Console Storage ..............................................3-121
Glove Box........................................................................3-121
Sunglass Holder.............................................................3-122
Multi Box (with a cover) .............................................3-122
Rear View Camera ..........................................................3-94
Interior Features ................................................3-123
Manual Climate Control System.........................3-95
Cup Holder ......................................................................3-123
Sliding Armrest ..............................................................3-124
Sunvisor...........................................................................3-124
Power Outlet ..................................................................3-125
Wireless Cellular Phone Charging System..............3-126
Clock.................................................................................3-128
Clothes Hanger ..............................................................3-128
Floor Mat Anchor(s).....................................................3-129
Luggage Net Holder .....................................................3-130
Cargo Area Cover..........................................................3-130
Heating and Air Conditioning .......................................3-96
System Operation .........................................................3-100
System Maintenance....................................................3-102
Automatic Climate Control System..................3-104
Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning.................3-105
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning......................3-106
System Operation .........................................................3-112
System Maintenance....................................................3-114
Windshield Defrosting and Defogging............3-115
Auto Defogging System ..............................................3-118
Rear Window Defroster ..............................................3-119
ACCESSING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Key (if equipped)
Your HYUNDAI uses a remote key,
which you can use to lock or unlock
a door (and liftgate) and even start
the engine.
1. Door Lock
2. Door Unlock
3. Liftgate Unlock
4. Panic
To lock :
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
liftgate.
2. Press the Door Lock button (1) on
the remote key.
3. The hazard warning lights will
blink and the chime will sound
once if the lock button is pressed
again within four seconds.
4. When the doors are locked, the indicator light on the central door lock/
unlock switch will be illuminated.
WARNING
Do not leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised children. Unattended children
could place the key in the ignition switch and may operate
power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in
serious injury or death.
i Information
After locking the doors, if you press
the Door Lock button again within
four seconds, the hazard warning
lights will blink and the horn will
sound one time to confirm that the
doors are locked.
3-3
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
OPD046001
Locking
Convenient features of your vehicle
Unlocking
To unlock:
1. Press the Door Unlock button (2)
on the remote key.
2. The driver's door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
Two press unlock setting:
If you press the Door Unlock button on the remote key again within four seconds, then all the doors
will unlock.
Two press unlock setting can be
changed according to owner's preference in the cluster User Settings
mode or with the remote key.
• User settings mode method:
Select or deselect the 'Two Press
Unlock' feature in the User
Settings mode on the cluster LCD
display (User Settings ➞ Door ➞
Two Press Unlock).
• Remote key method:
Press and hold both Door Lock (1)
and Door Unlock (2) buttons at the
same time until the hazard warning lights blink.
3-4
Now all doors will unlock when the
Door Unlock button is pressed one
time. To change the setting back,
repeat this procedure.
i Information
After unlocking the doors, the doors
will lock automatically after 30 seconds unless a door is opened.
Liftgate unlocking
To unlock:
1. Press and hold the Liftgate Unlock
button (3) on the remote key for
more than one second.
2. The hazard warning lights will
blink two times and the liftgate will
be unlocked.
Once the liftgate is opened and then
closed, the liftgate will lock automatically.
i Information
The word "HOLD" is written on the
button to inform you that you must
press and hold the button for more
than one second.
Panic button (if equipped)
Press and hold the Panic button (4)
for more than one second. The horn
sounds and hazard warning lights
flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel the panic mode, press any
button on the remote key.
Start-up
For information, refer to the "Key
Ignition Switch" section in chapter 5.
NOTICE
To prevent damaging the remote
key:
• Keep the remote key away from
water or any liquid and fire.
Internal circuits may malfunction if the inside of the remote
key gets damp (from liquids or
moisture) or if it is heated. This
can exclude the remote key from
warranty coverage.
• Avoid dropping or throwing the
remote key.
• Protect the remote key from
extreme temperatures.
Mechanical key
Remote key precautions
Avoid placing the remote key and
your mobile phone in the same location and always try to maintain an
adequate distance between the two
devices.
i Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate
the device.
NOTICE
Keep the remote key away from
electromagnetic materials that
block electromagnetic waves to
the key surface.
3-5
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
OPD046003
If the remote key does not operate
normally, you can lock or unlock the
driver's door by using the mechanical
key.
To unfold the mechanical key, press
the release button on the remote.
To return the key to its stored position, press the release button and
fold the key back into the remote.
The remote key will not work if any of
the following occur:
• The key is in the ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 90 feet [30 m]).
• The remote key battery is weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The remote key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the remote key.
If the remote key does not work correctly, open and close the door with
the mechanical key. If you have a
problem with the remote key contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the remote key is in close proximity to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile
phone’s normal operational signals.
This is specifically relevant when the
phone is active such as making and
receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Battery replacement
If the remote key is not working properly, try replacing the battery with a
new one.
4. Reinstall the battery cover and key
cover in the reverse order of
removal.
If you suspect your remote key might
have sustained some damage, or
you feel your remote key is not working correctly contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Smart Key (if equipped)
i Information
OPD046002
Battery Type: CR2032
To replace the battery:
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
gently pry open the cover.
2. Using a screw driver, remove the
battery cover.
3. Remove the old battery and insert
the new battery. Make sure the
battery position is correct.
3-6
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human health.
Dispose of the battery according
to your local law(s) or regulations.
OPD046044
Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key,
which you can use to lock or unlock
a door (and liftgate) and start the
engine.
1. Door Lock
2. Door Unlock
3. Liftgate Unlock
4. Panic
Locking
i Information
Unlocking
The door handle button will only
operate when the smart key is within
28~40 inches (0.7~1 m) from the outside door handle.
WARNING
3
OPD046005
To unlock:
1. Carry the Smart Key.
2. Either press the driver's outside
door handle button or press the
Door Unlock button (2) on the
smart key.
Do not leave the Smart Key in
your vehicle with unsupervised
children. Unattended children
could press the Engine Start/
Stop button and may operate
power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in
serious injury or death.
3-7
Convenient features of your vehicle
OPD046005
To lock :
1. Close all doors, hood and liftgate.
2. Either press the door handle button or press the Door Lock button
(1) on the smart key.
3. The hazard warning lights will
blink and the chime will sound
once.
4. When the doors are locked, the
indicator light on the central door
lock/unlock switch will be illuminated.
Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will not
lock and the chime will sound for
three seconds if any of the following
occur:
• The Smart Key is in the vehicle.
• The Engine Start/Stop button is in
ACC or ON position.
• Any door except the liftgate is
open.
Convenient features of your vehicle
3. The driver's door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
Two press unlock setting:
If you press the driver's outside
door handle button or Door Unlock
button on the smart key again
within four seconds, then all the
doors will unlock.
Two press unlock setting can be
changed according to owner's
preference in the cluster User
Settings mode or with the smart
key.
• User settings mode method:
Select or deselect the 'Two Press
Unlock' feature in the User
Settings mode on the cluster LCD
display (User Settings ➞ Door ➞
Two Press Unlock).
• Smart key method:
Press and hold both Door Lock (1)
and Door Unlock (2) buttons at the
same time until the hazard warning lights blink. Now all doors will
unlock when the Door Unlock button is pressed one time.
To change the setting back, repeat
this procedure.
3-8
i Information
• The door handle button will only
operate when the smart key is within 28~40 inches (0.7~1 m) from the
outside door handle and other people can also open the doors.
• If you press the front passenger's
outside door handle, while carrying
the Smart Key, all doors will unlock.
• After unlocking the doors, the doors
will lock automatically after 30 seconds unless a door is opened.
• Either the driver or front passenger
door can be opened with the door
handle button when the smart key is
within this range.
Liftgate unlocking
To unlock:
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Either press the liftgate handle
button or press and hold the
Liftgate Unlock button (3) on the
smart key for more than one second.
3. The hazard warning lights will
blink two times.
i Information
• The liftgate handle button will only
operate when the smart key is within 28 inches (0.7 m) from the liftgate
handle.
• The Liftgate Unlock button (3) will
only unlock the liftgate. It will not
release the latch and open the liftgate automatically. If the Liftgate
Unlock button is used, someone
must still press the liftgate handle
button to open the liftgate.
Panic button
Mechanical key
Loss of a smart key
Press and hold the Panic button (4)
for more than one second. The horn
sounds and hazard warning lights
blink for about 30 seconds. To cancel
the panic mode, press any button on
the Smart Key.
If the Smart Key does not operate
normally, you can lock or unlock the
driver's door by using the mechanical
key.
A maximum of two Smart Keys can
be registered to a single vehicle. If
you happen to lose your smart key,
you should immediately take the
vehicle and remaining keys to your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or tow
the vehicle, if necessary.
Start-up
Smart key precautions
For information, refer to the
"Engine Start/Stop Button" section in chapter 5.
NOTICE
To prevent damaging the smart key:
• Keep the smart key away from
any liquid or fire. Internal circuits
may malfunction if the inside of
the smart key gets damp (from
liquids or moisture) or if it is heated. This can exclude the smart
key from warranty coverage.
• Avoid dropping or throwing the
smart key.
• Protect the smart key from
extreme temperatures.
OPD046045
Move the release lever in the direction of the arrow (1) and then remove
the mechanical key (2). Insert the
mechanical key into the key hole on
the door.
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
The smart key may not work if any of
the following occur:
• The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the transmitter.
• The smart key is near a mobile two
way radio system or a cellular
phone.
• Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
If the smart key does not work correctly, open and close the door with
the mechanical key. If you have a
problem with the smart key, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
3-9
Convenient features of your vehicle
You can start the vehicle without
inserting the key.
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
If the smart key is in close proximity
to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile
phone's normal operational signals.
This is specifically relevant when the
phone is active such as making and
receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
Avoid placing the smart key and your
mobile phone in the same location
and always try to maintain an adequate distance between the two
devices.
NOTICE
Keep the smart key away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves to
the key surface.
NOTICE
Always have the smart key with
you when leaving the vehicle. If
the smart key is left near the vehicle, the vehicle battery may be discharged.
3-10
i Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate
the device.
Battery replacement
OPD046046
If the Smart Key is not working properly,
try replacing the battery with a new one.
Battery Type: CR2032
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the mechanical key.
2. Use a slim tool to pry open the rear
cover of the smart key.
3. Remove the old battery and insert
the new battery. Make sure the battery position is correct.
4. Reinstall the rear cover of the smart
key.
If you suspect your smart key might
have sustained some damage, or you
feel your smart key is not working correctly, contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
i Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human health.
Dispose of the battery according
to your local law(s) or regulations.
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle from theft. If an improperly
coded key (or other device) is used,
the engine's fuel system is disabled.
When the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position, the immobilizer system indicator should come on briefly,
then go off. If the indicator starts to
blink, the system does not recognize
the coding of the key.
Place the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, then place the
ignition switch to the ON position again.
The system may not recognize your
key's coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e., key
chain) is near the key.
WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
immobilizer password is a customer unique password and
should be kept confidential.
NOTICE
The transponder in your key is an
important part of the immobilizer
system. It is designed to give
years of trouble-free service, however you should avoid exposure to
moisture, static electricity and
rough handling. Immobilizer system malfunction could occur.
i Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the device.
3-11
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Immobilizer System
(if equipped)
The engine may not start because
the metal may interrupt the transponder signal from transmitting normally.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of the key, it is
recommended that you contact your
HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle inoperable.
Convenient features of your vehicle
DOOR LOCKS
Operating Door Locks from
Outside the Vehicle
Mechanical key
■ Remote key
Remote key
Smart key
■ Smart key
U n l o ck
U n l o ck
L o ck / U n l o ck
L o ck
L o ck
OPD046005
OPD047001N
OPD046006
If you lock the driver's door with a
mechanical key, all vehicle doors will
lock. If you unlock the driver's door
with a mechanical key, the driver's
door will unlock and the passenger
doors will unlock according to the
current two press unlock setting.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
3-12
To lock the doors, press the Door
Lock button (1) on the remote key.
Press the Door Unlock button (2) on
the remote key, the driver's door will
unlock. If you press the Door Unlock
button on the remote key again within four seconds, then all the doors
will unlock.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
Door Door
Lock Unlock
OPD046004
Press the button on the driver's outside door handle while carrying the
Smart Key with you or press the Door
Unlock button on the Smart Key, the
driver's door will unlock. If you press
the button on the front passenger's
outside door, all doors will unlock.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
i Information
If the electrical power to door lock
switch is not operating (ex. dead car
battery) and the liftgate is closed you
will not be able to open the liftgate
until power is restored.
i Information
OPDE046414
In case of an emergency
If the electrical power to door lock
switch is not operating (ex. dead car
battery) the only way to lock the
door(s) is with the mechanical key
from the outside key hole.
Doors without an outside key hole
can be locked as follows:
1. Open the door.
2. Insert the key into the emergency
door lock hole and turn the key
horizontally to lock.
3. Close the door securely.
Convenient features of your vehicle
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect
the circuit and prevent damage to
system components.
• Two press unlock setting can be
changed in the User Settings mode
on the cluster.
3
Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door handle
OPD047456N
Front door
If the inner door handle is pulled
when the door is locked, the door will
unlock and open.
3-13
Convenient features of your vehicle
Rear door
If the inner door handle is pulled
once when the door is locked, the
door will unlock.
If the inner door handle is pulled
once more, the door will open.
With the central door lock/
unlock switch
WARNING
i Information
If a power door lock ever fails to function while you are in the vehicle try
one or more of the following techniques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door handles,
front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
mechanical key to unlock the door
from outside.
3-14
i Information
The indicator light on the switch
blinks for approximately one minute
when a door is unlocked or the liftgate
is opened.
• The doors should always be
OPD046008
• With a door unlocked
- If you press the central door lock
switch, all vehicle doors will lock
and the indicator light on the switch
will illuminate.
- If any door is opened when the
switch is pressed, none of the
doors will lock.
• With all doors locked
- If you press the central door unlock
switch, all vehicle doors will unlock.
- If any door is unlocked, the central
door lock indicator light will turn off.
fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion. If the
doors are unlocked, the risk of
being thrown from the vehicle
in a crash is increased.
• Do not pull the inner door
handle of the driver's or passenger's door while the vehicle is moving.
WARNING
WARNING
Always secure your vehicle.
Leaving your vehicle unlocked
can allow theft or entry into the
vehicle.
To secure your vehicle, while
depressing the brake, move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position, engage the parking brake,
and place the Engine Start/Stop
button in the OFF position, close
all windows, lock all doors, and
always take the key with you.
Opening a door when something
is approaching may cause damage or injury. Be careful when
opening doors and watch for
vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles
or pedestrians approaching the
vehicle in the path of the door.
WARNING
If you stay in the vehicle for a
long time while the weather is
very hot or cold, there are risks
of injuries or danger to life. Do
not lock the vehicle from the
outside when someone is in the
vehicle.
Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features
Impact sensing door unlock
All doors will be automatically
unlocked when an impact causes the
air bags to deploy.
Speed sensing door lock
All doors will be automatically locked
(when set on cluster) when vehicle
speed exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h).
All of the doors will be automatically
unlocked after the vehicle is turned off.
You can activate or deactivate the
Auto Door Lock/Unlock features from
the User Settings mode on the LCD
display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.
3-15
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle. An
enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
serious injury to unattended
children or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle. Children
might operate features of the
vehicle that could injure them,
or they could encounter other
harm, possibly from someone
gaining entry to the vehicle.
CAUTION
Convenient features of your vehicle
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
Child-Protector Rear Door Locks
To allow a rear door to be opened
from inside the vehicle, unlock the
child safety lock.
WARNING
OPDE046009
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children seated in the
rear from accidentally opening the
rear doors. The rear door safety locks
should be used whenever children
are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock is located on
the edge of each rear door. When the
child safety lock is in the lock position, the rear door will not open if the
inner door handle is pulled.
To lock the child safety lock, insert a
key (or screw driver) (1) into the hole
and turn it to the lock position.
3-16
If children accidently open the
rear doors while the vehicle is
in motion, they could fall out of
the vehicle. The rear door safety
locks should always be used
whenever children are in the
vehicle.
This system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables. The horn will sound
and the hazard warning lights will blink
continuously if any of the following
occur:
- A door is opened without using the
remote key or smart key.
- The liftgate is opened without using
the remote key or smart key.
- The engine hood is opened.
The alarm continues for 30 seconds,
then the system resets. To turn off the
alarm, unlock the doors with the
remote key or smart key.
The Theft Alarm System automatically
sets 30 seconds after you lock the
doors and the liftgate. For the system
to activate, you must lock the doors
and the liftgate from outside the vehicle with the remote key or smart key or
by pressing the button on the outside
of the door handle with the smart key
in your possession.
The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once to indicate the system is armed.
Once the security system is set, opening any door, the liftgate, or the hood
without using the remote key or smart
key will cause the alarm to activate.
STEERING WHEEL
The Theft Alarm System will not set if
the hood, the liftgate, or any door is
not fully closed. If the system will not
set, check the hood, the liftgate, or the
doors are fully closed.
Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it.
• Do not lock the doors until all passengers have left the vehicle. If the
remaining passenger leaves the
vehicle when the system is armed,
the alarm will be activated.
• If the vehicle is not disarmed with
the remote key or smart key, open
the doors by using the mechanical
key and place the ignition switch in
the ON position (for remote key) or
start the engine (for smart key) by
directly pressing the ignition switch
with the smart key.
• If the system is disarmed by unlocking the vehicle, but neither a door or
the liftgate is opened within 30 seconds, the doors will relock and the
system will rearm automatically.
The system assists you with steering
the vehicle. If the vehicle is turned off
or if the power steering system
becomes inoperative, you may still
steer the vehicle, but it will require
increased steering effort.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
CAUTION
If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate normally, the warning light ( ) will
illuminate on the instrument
cluster. You may steer the vehicle, but it will require increased
steering efforts. Take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the system
checked as soon as possible.
i Information
The following symptoms may occur during normal vehicle operation:
• The steering effort may be high immediately after placing the ignition switch
in the ON position.
This happens as the system performs
the EPS system diagnostics. When the
diagnostics are completed, the steering
wheel will return to its normal condition.
• A click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the ignition switch is in
the ON or LOCK/OFF position.
• Motor noise may be heard when the
vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving
speed.
• When you operate the steering wheel
in low temperatures, abnormal noise
may occur. If the temperature rises,
the noise will disappear. This is a normal condition.
• When an error is detected from the
EPS, the steering effort assist function
will not be activated in order to prevent fatal accidents. Instrument cluster warning lights may be on or the
steering effort may be high. When the
following symptoms occur, immediately drive the vehicle to a safe area and
check it.
3-17
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
i Information
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
Convenient features of your vehicle
Tilt Steering / Telescope Steering
Horn
Adjust the steering wheel so it points
toward your chest, not toward your
face. Make sure you can see the
instrument cluster warning lights and
gauges. After adjusting, push the
steering wheel both up and down to
be certain it is locked in position.
Always adjust the position of the
steering wheel before driving.
WARNING
NEVER adjust the steering
wheel while driving. This may
cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
OPD046012
To change the steering wheel angle
and height:
1. Pull down the lock-release lever (1).
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (2) and distance forward/back (3).
3. Pull up the lock-release lever to
lock the steering wheel in place.
i Information
After adjustment, sometimes the lock
release lever may not lock the steering
wheel. It is not a malfunction. This
occurs when two gears are not
engaged correctly. In this case, adjust
the steering wheel again and then lock
the steering wheel.
3-18
OPD046014
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on your
steering wheel (see illustration). The
horn will operate only when this area
is pressed.
NOTICE
Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist.
Do not press on the horn with a
sharp-pointed object.
MIRRORS
Heated Steering Wheel
(for Canada, if equipped)
Do not install any cover or accessory on the steering wheel. The
cover or accessory could cause
damage to the heated steering
wheel system.
Inside Rearview Mirror
Before you start driving, adjust the
rearview mirror to the center on the
view through the rear window.
WARNING
Make sure your line of sight is
not obstructed. Do not place
objects in the rear seat, cargo
area, or behind the rear headrests which could interfere with
your vision through the rear
window.
WARNING
To prevent serious injury during
an accident or deployment of
the air bag, do not modify the
rearview mirror and do not
install a wide mirror.
3-19
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
OPD046013
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position or when the engine is running,
press the heated steering wheel button
to warm the steering wheel. The indicator on the button will illuminate.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button again. The indicator
on the button will turn off.
The heated steering wheel will automatically turn off after approximately
30 minutes.
NOTICE
Convenient features of your vehicle
WARNING
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Blue Link® center (if equipped)
NEVER adjust the mirror while
driving. This may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident.
Night
NOTICE
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as that may cause the
liquid cleaner to enter the mirror
housing.
3-20
OAD045011N
Day
OAE046010
Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever towards you
to reduce glare from the headlights
of the vehicles behind you during
night driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
For details, refer to the Blue Link®
Owner's Guide, Navigation Manual
or Audio Manual.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
with HomeLink® system,
compass and Blue Link®
(if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror
with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass
Display and an Integrated HomeLink®
Wireless Control System.
During nighttime driving, this feature
will automatically detect and reduce
rearview mirror glare while the compass indicates the direction the vehicle is pointed. The HomeLink®
Universal Transceiver allows you to
activate your garage door(s), electric
gate, home lighting, etc.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Blue Link Center button
Blue Link POI button
Blue Link SOS button
Compass control button &
Dimming ON/OFF button
(5) Status indicator LED
(6) Channel 1 button
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision
Safety™ (NVS®) Mirror
(if equipped)
The NVS® Mirror automatically
reduces glare by monitoring light levels in the front and the rear of the
vehicle. Any object that obstructs
either light sensor will degrade the
automatic dimming control feature.
For more information regarding
NVS® mirrors and other applications, please refer to the Gentex
website:
www.gentex.com
Your mirror will automatically dim
upon detecting glare from the vehicles traveling behind you. The autodimming function can be controlled
by pressing the Dimming ON/OFF
button (4):
1. Pressing and holding the
button
for 3 seconds turns the auto-dimming function OFF which is indicated by the green Status
Indicator LED turning off.
2. Pressing and holding the
button
for 3 seconds again turns the autodimming function ON which is indicated by the green Status Indicator
LED turning on.
The mirror defaults to the ON position each time the vehicle is started.
Z-Nav™ Compass Display
The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is
also equipped with a Z-Nav™
Compass that shows the vehicle
Compass heading in the Display
Window using the 8 basic cardinal
headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).
3-21
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
OAD045045N
(7) Channel 2 button
(8) Channel 3 button
(9) Compass display
(10) Rear light sensor
Convenient features of your vehicle
Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when the ignition is cycled. To turn
the display feature ON/OFF:
1. Press and release the
button
within 1 second to turn the display
feature OFF.
2. Press and release the
button
again within 1 second to turn the
display back ON.
Additional options can be set with
press and hold sequences of the
button and are detailed below.
There is a difference between magnetic north and true north. To compensate for this difference you will
need to adjust the Zone setting based
on where you live.
B520C05NF
3-22
There are some conditions that can
cause changes to the vehicle magnets, such as installing a ski rack or
a CB antenna. Body repair work on
the vehicle can also cause changes
to the vehicle’s magnetic field. In
these situations, the compass will
need to be re-calibrated to quickly
correct these changes.
If you need to recalibrate the compass:
1. Press and hold the
button for
more than 9 seconds. When the
compass memory is cleared a "C"
will appear in the display.
2. Drive the vehicle in 2 complete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
Control System
The HomeLink® Wireless Control
System can replace up to three
hand-held radio-frequency (RF)
transmitters with a single built-in
device. This innovative feature will
learn the radio frequency codes of
most current transmitters to operate
devices such as gate operators,
garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems, even home
lighting. Both standard and rolling
code-equipped transmitters can be
programmed by following the outlined procedures.
Additional HomeLink® information
can be found at: www.homelink.com
or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Retain the original transmitter of the
RF device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as for
future HomeLink® programming. It is
also suggested that upon the sale of
the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink® buttons be erased for
security purposes.
3-23
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
To adjust the Zone setting:
1. Determine the desired Zone
Number based upon your current
location on the Zone Map.
2. Press and hold the
button for 6
seconds, the current Zone
Number will appear on the display.
3. Pressing and holding the
button
again will cause the numbers to
increment (Note: they will repeat
…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing
the button when the desired Zone
Number appears on the display
will set the new Zone.
4. Within about 5 seconds the compass will start displaying a compass heading again.
Convenient features of your vehicle
WARNING
Before programming HomeLink®
to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure people and
objects are out of the way of the
device to prevent potential harm
or damage. Do not use the
HomeLink® with any garage door
opener that lacks the safety stop
and reverse features required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this
includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April
1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling
the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. Using a
garage door opener without
these features increases the risk
of serious injury or death.
3-24
Programming HomeLink®
Please note the following:
• When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park the
vehicle outside of the garage.
• It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink® for quicker
training and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal.
• Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be placed in the ACC
(or "Accessories") position for programming and/or operation of
HomeLink®.
• In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions
after following the programming
steps listed below, contact
HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com
or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Programming
Flashing
ODH044413N
To train most devices, follow these
instructions:
1. For first-time programming, press
and hold the two outside buttons
( , ), HomeLink® Channel 1
and Channel 3, until the indicator
light begins to flash (after 10 seconds). Release both buttons. Do
not hold the buttons for longer
than 20 seconds.
i Information
Flashing
ODH044414N
2. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping
the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLink® and handheld transmitter buttons until the
HomeLink® indicator light changes
from a slow to a rapid blinking
light. Now you may release both
the HomeLink® and hand-held
transmitter buttons.
3-25
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Some devices may require you to
replace this Programming step 3 with
procedures noted in the "Gate
Operator/Canadian Programming"
chapter. If the HomeLink® indicator
light does not change to a rapidly
blinking light after performing these
steps, contact HomeLink® at
www.homelink.com.
4. Press and hold for 5 seconds then
release the programmed HomeLink®
button up to two separate times to
activate the door. If the door does not
activate, press and hold the justtrained HomeLink® button and
observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate
when the HomeLink® button is
pressed and released.
• If the indicator light blinks rapidly
for 2 seconds and then turns to a
constant light, continue with
"Programming" steps 5-7 to complete the programming of a rolling
code equipped device (most commonly a garage door opener).
5. At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the "learn" or "smart" button.
This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
Convenient features of your vehicle
6. Firmly press and release the
"learn" or "smart" button. (The
name and color of the button vary
by manufacturer). There are 30
seconds to initiate step 7.
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly
press, hold for 2 seconds and
release
the
programmed
HomeLink® button. Repeat the
"press/hold/release" sequence a
second time, and, depending on
the brand of the garage door
opener (or other rolling code
equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete
the programming process.
HomeLink® should now activate your
rolling code equipped device.
3-26
Gate operator & Canadian programming
During programming, your handheld
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press the
Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
Control System button (note steps 2
through 3 in the Programming portion
of this document) while you press
and re-press ("cycle") your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until
the frequency signal has been
learned. The indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly after several
seconds upon successful training.
Operating HomeLink®
To operate, simply press and release
the programmed HomeLink® button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button
To program a device to HomeLink®
using a HomeLink® button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired
HomeLink® button. DO NOT
release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing
the HomeLink® button, proceed
with "Programming" step 2.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink® at www.homelink.com or
1-800-355-3515.
NVS® is a registered trademark and
Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex
Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.
HomeLink® is a registered trademark
owned by Johnson Controls,
Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.
FCC ID: NZLTLMHL4
IC: 4112A-TLMHL4
i Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
3. The transceiver has been tested and
complies with FCC and Industry
Canada rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority
to operate the device.
Side View Mirrors
3
OPD046016
Be sure to adjust mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand side view
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the remote switch. The
mirror heads can be folded to help
prevent damage during an automatic
car wash or when passing through a
narrow street.
The right side view mirror is convex.
Objects seen in the mirror are closer
than they appear.
3-27
Convenient features of your vehicle
Erasing HomeLink® buttons
Individual buttons cannot be erased.
However, to erase all three programmed buttons:
1. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink® buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 10
seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold
for longer than 20 seconds.
The Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
Control System is now in the training
(learn) mode and can be programmed at any time following the
appropriate
steps
in
the
Programming chapters above.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Use your interior side view mirror or
direct observation to determine the
actual distance of following vehicles
when changing lanes.
Blind spot mirror (for U.S.A)
WARNING
• Always check the road condi-
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the side
view mirrors while driving. This
may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
OLF044477N
tion while driving for unexpected situations even though
the vehicle is equipped with a
blind spot mirror.
• The blind spot mirror is a
device made for convenience.
Do not solely rely on the mirror but always pay attention to
traffic around you.
NOTICE
• Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface of the glass.
• If the mirror is jammed with ice,
do not adjust the mirror by
force. Use an approved spray
de-icer (not radiator antifreeze)
spray, or a sponge or soft cloth
with very warm water, or move
the vehicle to a warm place and
allow the ice to melt.
3-28
NOTICE
Do not clean the mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum
based cleaning products.
OLF044478N
The Blind Spot Mirror (BSM) is a supplemental mirror that helps reduce
the driver's blind spot by showing the
rear side area of the vehicle. The
blind spot mirror is equipped on the
left-hand side view mirror.
Side view mirror control
NOTICE
Folding the side view mirrors
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate while the switch
is pressed. Do not press the
switch longer than necessary,
because this can damage the
motor.
• Do not attempt to adjust the side
view mirrors by hand, because
this can damage the motor.
3
OPD046018
To fold the side view mirrors, grasp
the housing of the mirror and then
fold it toward the rear of the vehicle.
3-29
Convenient features of your vehicle
OPD047457N
Adjusting the side mirrors:
1. Press either the L (driver's side) or
R (passenger's side) button (1) to
select the side view mirror you
would like to adjust.
2. Use the mirror adjustment control
switch to position the selected mirror up, down, left or right.
3. After adjustment, put the button
into neutral (center) position to
prevent inadvertent adjustment.
Convenient features of your vehicle
WINDOWS
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window
(7) Power window lock switch
OPD047459N
3-30
Power Windows
WARNING
To avoid serious injury or death,
do not extend your head, arms
or body outside the windows
while driving.
• In cold and wet climates, power windows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
• While driving with the rear windows down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) opened (or partially
opened), your vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffeting or pulsation
noise. This noise is normal and can
be reduced or eliminated by taking
the following actions. If the noise
occurs with one or both of the rear
windows down, partially lower both
front windows approximately one
inch. If you experience the noise
with the sunroof open, slightly close
the sunroof.
Window opening and closing
3
OAE046020
To open:
Press the window switch down to the
first detent position (5). Release the
switch when you want the window to
stop.
To close:
Pull the window switch up to the first
detent position (5). Release the window switch when you want the window to stop.
3-31
Convenient features of your vehicle
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to be able to raise or lower
the windows. Each door has a Power
Window switch to control that door’s
window. The driver has a Power
Window Lock switch which can block
the operation of passenger windows.
The power windows will operate for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition switch is placed in the ACC
or LOCK/OFF position. However, if
the front doors are opened, the
Power Windows will not operate even
within the 30 second period.
i Information
Convenient features of your vehicle
Auto down window (if equipped)
To reset the power windows
Pressing the power window switch
down momentarily to the second
detent position (6) completely lowers
the window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is
in operation, pull up or press down
and release the switch.
If the power windows do not operate
normally, the automatic power window system must be reset as follows:
1. Place the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the window and continue
pulling up on the power window
switch for at least one second.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have the
system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Auto up/down window
(if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely
lowers or lifts the window even when
the switch is released. To stop the
window at the desired position while
the window is in operation, pull up or
press down and release the switch.
3-32
WARNING
The automatic reverse feature
doesn't activate while resetting
the power window system. Make
sure body parts or other objects
are safely out of the way before
closing the windows to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage.
Automatic reverse (if equipped)
OLF044032
If a window senses any obstacle while
it is closing automatically, it will stop
and lower approximately 12 inches (30
cm) to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is
pulled up continuously, the window
will stop upward movement then
lower approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm).
If the power window switch is pulled
up continuously again within 5 seconds after the window is lowered by
the automatic window reverse feature, the automatic window reverse
will not operate.
i Information
Power window lock switch
The automatic reverse feature is only
active when the "Auto Up" feature is
used by fully pulling up the switch to
the second detent.
NOTICE
Do not install any accessories on
the windows. The automatic reverse
feature may not operate.
NOTICE
OPD047458N
The driver can disable the power
window switches on the rear passenger's doors by pressing the power
window lock switch.
When the power window lock switch
is pressed:
• The driver's master control can
operate all the power windows.
• The front passenger's control can
operate the front passenger's power
window.
• The rear passenger's control cannot operate the rear passenger's
power window.
• To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and
the individual door window
switch in opposite directions at
the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
3-33
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver's door power window
lock switch in the LOCK position. Serious injury or death can
result from unintentional window operation by a child.
WARNING
Make sure body parts or other
objects are safely out of the way
before closing the windows to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
Objects less than 0.16 inch (4 mm)
in diameter caught between the
window glass and the upper window channel may not be detected
by the automatic reverse window
and the window will not stop and
reverse direction.
WARNING
Convenient features of your vehicle
PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
i Information
• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
• After the vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.
WARNING
OPD046024
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position before you can open or
close the sunroof.
The sunroof can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition key is removed or turned to
the ACC or LOCK position. However,
if the front doors are adjusted, the
sunroof cannot be opened even within the 30 seconds period.
3-34
• Never adjust the sunroof or
sunshade while driving. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
• Make sure heads, other body
parts or objects are out of the
way before using the sunroof.
• Do not leave the engine running and the key in your vehicle with unsupervised children.
Unattended children could
operate the sunroof, which
could result in serious injury.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The panorama sunroof is made
of glass, subject to break in
case of accident. Passengers
without the appropriate protection (e.g. seat belt, CRS, etc.)
on may project out through the
broken glasses and get seriously injured or even result in
death.
• Do not sit on the top of the
vehicle. It may cause injuries or
vehicle damage.
NOTICE
• To prevent damage to the sunroof and the motor, do not continue to press the sunroof control lever after the sunroof is in
the fully open, closed or tilt position(s).
• Make sure the sunroof is closed
fully when leaving your vehicle.
If the sunroof is left open, rain or
snow may wet the interior of the
vehicle. Also, leaving the sunroof
open when the vehicle is unattended may invite theft.
Sunshade
Sliding the Sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
When the sunshade is opened
If you pull the sunroof control lever
backward, the sunroof glass will slide
all the way open. To stop the sunroof
movement at any point, pull or push
the sunroof control lever momentarily.
3
i Information
OPD046053
• To open the sunshade, pull the
sunroof control lever backward to
the first detent position.
• To close the sunshade when the
sunroof glass is closed, push the
sunroof control lever forward.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
either forward or backward momentarily.
OPD046025
If you push the sunroof control lever
backward past the first detent, the
sunshade will slide all the way open
and then the sunroof glass will slide
all the way open.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
either forward or backward momentarily.
i Information
Activating the control lever to the first
detent requires only a very light touch.
3-35
Convenient features of your vehicle
Only the front glass of the panoramic
sunroof opens and closes.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Tilting the Sunroof
Automatic reverse (if equipped)
Closing the Sunroof
■ Sunroof glass
■ Sunroof glass with sunshade
OPD046054
OPD046055
When the sunshade is closed
To close sunroof glass
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward towards the roof of the vehicle,
the sunshade will slide open then the
sunroof glass will tilt open.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
either forward or backward momentarily.
Push the sunroof control lever forward to the first detent position.
When the sunshade is opened
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt open.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
either forward or backward momentarily.
3-36
To close sunroof glass with
sunshade
Push the sunroof control lever forward to the second detent position.
The sunroof glass will close, then the
sunshade will close automatically.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
either forward or backward momentarily.
ODH043039
If the sunroof senses any obstacle
while it is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction then stop to allow
the object to be cleared.
Small objects that can get caught
between the sunroof glass and the
front glass channel may not be
detected by the automatic reverse
system. In this case, the sunroof
glass will not detect the object and
will not reverse direction.
NOTICE
3. Push and hold the sunroof control
lever forward (to close the sunshade) for about 10 seconds until
the sunroof moves slightly, then
release the control lever.
4. Push and hold the sunroof control
lever forward until the sunroof
operates as follows:
Resetting the Sunroof
Sunshade Open → Glass Tilt Open
→ Glass Slide Open → Glass Slide
Close → Sunshade Close
OPD046056
The sunroof may need to be reset if
the following conditions occur:
- The battery is discharged or disconnected or the sunroof fuse has
been replaced or disconnected
- The sunroof control lever is not
operating correctly
To reset the sunroof, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the engine on and close the
sunroof glass and sunshade completely.
2. Release the control lever.
Then, release the control lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system is reset.
For more information, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i Information
If you do not reset the sunroof, it may
not work properly.
3-37
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the sunroof
guide rail or between the sunroof and roof panel.
• Do not try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
motor could be damaged.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Sunroof Open Warning
(if equipped)
OPD046116
• If the driver turns off the engine when
the sunroof is not fully closed, the
warning chime will sound for approximately 3 seconds and the sunroof
open warning will appear on the LCD
display.
• If the driver turns off the engine and
opens the door when the sunroof is
not fully closed, the open sunroof
warning will appear on the LCD display until the door is closed or the
sunroof is fully closed.
Close the sunroof securely when leaving your vehicle.
3-38
EXTERIOR FEATURES
Hood
Opening the hood
3
1. Park the vehicle and set the parking brake.
2. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.
OPD046030
3. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, push up the secondary latch (1) inside of the hood
center and lift the hood (2).
4. Pull out the support rod and hold
the hood open with the support
rod (1).
WARNING
• Grasp the support rod in the
area wrapped in rubber. The
rubber will help prevent you
from being burned by hot metal
when the engine is hot.
• The support rod must be inserted completely into the hole provided whenever you inspect the
engine compartment. This will
prevent the hood from falling
and possibly injuring you.
3-39
Convenient features of your vehicle
OPD046027
OPDE046028
Convenient features of your vehicle
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in engine compartment must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be
removed from the engine compartment.
2. Lower the hood halfway (lifted
approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
from the closed position) and push
down to securely lock in place.
Then double check to be sure the
hood is secure. If the hood can be
raised slightly, it is not securely
locked. Open it again and close it
with more force.
3-40
WARNING
• Before closing the hood,
ensure all obstructions are
removed from around the
hood opening.
• Always double check to be
sure that the hood is firmly
latched before driving away.
Check there is no hood open
warning light or message displayed on the instrument cluster. Driving with the hood
opened may cause a total loss
of visibility, which might
result in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with
the hood in the raised position, as vision is obstructed,
which might result in an accident, and the hood could fall
or be damaged.
Liftgate
Opening the liftgate
Make sure the vehicle is in P (Park).
OPD047029L
Then do one of the following:
1. Unlock all doors with the Door
Unlock button on your remote key
or smart key. Press the liftgate
handle button and open the liftgate.
2. Press and hold the Liftgate Unlock
button on the remote key or smart
key. Press the liftgate handle button and open the liftgate.
3. With the Smart Key in your possession, press the liftgate handle
button and open the liftgate.
Closing the liftgate
i Information
In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
Emergency liftgate safety
release
WARNING
3
OPD047031L
Lower the liftgate lid and press down
until it locks.
To be sure the liftgate lid is securely
fastened, always check by trying to
pull it up again without pressing the
liftgate handle button.
NOTICE
Make certain that you close the
liftgate before driving your vehicle. Possible damage may occur
to the liftgate lift cylinders and
attached hardware if the liftgate is
not closed prior to driving.
OPD046032
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Emergency Liftgate Safety Release
lever located inside the liftgate. When
someone is inadvertently locked in
the luggage compartment, the liftgate can be opened manually from
inside the luggage compartment by
performing the following steps :
1. Input the mechanical key into the
hole.
2. Push the mechanical key to the
right.
3. Push up the liftgate.
3-41
Convenient features of your vehicle
The liftgate swings upward.
Make sure no objects or people
are near the rear of the vehicle
when opening the liftgate.
Convenient features of your vehicle
WARNING
Fuel Filler Door
Opening the fuel filler door
• For emergencies, be fully
aware of the location of the
emergency liftgate safety
release lever in this vehicle
and how to open the liftgate if
you are accidentally locked in
the luggage compartment.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the luggage compartment of the vehicle at any time.
The luggage compartment is a
very dangerous location in the
event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for emergencies only. Use extreme caution, especially while the vehicle is in motion.
Open
Close
OPD046033
OPD047034N
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Ensure the driver's door is
unlocked.
3. Push the fuel filler door near the 3
o'clock position.
4. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to
fully open.
5. To remove the fuel tank cap (2),
turn it counterclockwise. You may
hear a hissing noise as the pressure inside the tank equalizes.
6. Place the cap on the fuel filler door.
i Information
If the fuel filler door does not open
because ice has formed around it, tap
lightly or push on the door to break
the ice and release the door. Do not
pry on the door. If necessary, spray
around the door with an approved deicer fluid (do not use radiator antifreeze) or move the vehicle to a warm
place and allow the ice to melt.
3-42
Closing the fuel filler door
1. To install the fuel tank cap, turn it
clockwise until it "clicks" one time.
2. Close the fuel filler door until it is
latched securely.
i Information
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. Failure to follow
these guidelines may result in
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station.
• Before refueling, note the
location of the Emergency
Gasoline Shut-Off, if available,
at the gas station.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle, you should eliminate the
potential build-up of static
electricity by touching a metal
part of the vehicle, a safe distance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas
source, with your bare hand.
• Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric current and/or electronic interference from cellular phones can
potentially ignite fuel vapors
and cause a fire.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling. You can generate a buildup of static electricity by
touching, rubbing or sliding
against any item or fabric
capable of producing static
electricity. Static electricity
discharge can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire. If you
must re-enter the vehicle, you
should once again eliminate
potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touching a metal part of the vehicle,
away from the fuel filler neck,
nozzle or other gasoline
source, with your bare hand.
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be
sure to place the container on
the ground prior to refueling.
Static electricity discharge
from the container can ignite
fuel vapors causing a fire.
(Continued)
3-43
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
The fuel filler door will not close if the
driver's door is locked. If you lock the
driver's door while fueling, unlock it
before closing the fuel filler door.
WARNING
Convenient features of your vehicle
(Continued)
Once refueling has begun,
contact between your bare
hand and the vehicle should
be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Use only approved portable
plastic fuel containers designed
to carry and store gasoline.
• When refueling, always move
the shift lever to the P (Park)
position (for automatic transmission/ dual clutch transmission)
or first gear or R (Reverse, for
manual transmission), set the
parking brake, and place the
ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF
position. Sparks produced by
electrical components related to
the engine can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire.
• Do not use matches or a
lighter and do not smoke or
leave a lit cigarette in your
vehicle while at a gas station,
especially during refueling.
(Continued)
3-44
(Continued)
• Do not over-fill or top-off your
vehicle tank, which can cause
gasoline spillage.
• If a fire breaks out during refueling, leave the vicinity of the
vehicle, and immediately contact the manager of the gas
station and then contact the
local fire department. Follow
any safety instructions they
provide.
• If pressurized fuel sprays out,
it can cover your clothes or
skin and thus subject you to
the risk of fire and burns.
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before completely removing the cap.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.
i Information
Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel Requirements"
suggested in the Introduction chapter.
NOTICE
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted surfaces may damage the paint.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a genuine
HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent
specified for your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction
of the fuel system or emission
control system.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
■ Type A
3
1. Tachometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
■ Type B
6. LCD display (including Trip computer)
The actual cluster in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the
"Gauges and Meters" in this chapter.
OPD047100N/OPD047101N
3-45
Convenient features of your vehicle
2. Speedometer
Convenient features of your vehicle
Instrument Cluster Control
Adjusting instrument cluster
illumination
WARNING
Never adjust the instrument
cluster while driving. This could
result in loss of control and lead
to an accident that may cause
death, serious injury, or vehicle
damage.
OPDE046110
OPD046049
When the vehicle's position lights or
headlights are on, press the illumination control button to adjust the
brightness of the instrument panel
illumination.
When pressing the illumination control button, the interior switch illumination intensity is also adjusted.
3-46
• The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination is displayed.
• If the brightness reaches the maximum or minimum level, a chime
will sound.
For information regarding the illumination setting on your audio display, refer to the "Setup" section of
your Audio or Navigation manual.
Tachometer
Gauges and Meters
Speedometer
Engine coolant temperature
gauge
3
The speedometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
in miles per hour (MPH) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h).
The tachometer indicates the approximate number of engine revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and/or over-revving the engine.
NOTICE
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This
may cause severe engine damage.
OPD046106
This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
NOTICE
If the gauge pointer moves
beyond the normal range area
toward the "H" position, it indicates overheating that may damage the engine.
Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. If your vehicle
overheats, refer to "If the Engine
Overheats" in chapter 6.
3-47
Convenient features of your vehicle
OPD046104
OPD047461N
Convenient features of your vehicle
WARNING
Fuel gauge
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap or
reservoir cap when the engine is
hot. The engine coolant is under
pressure and could severely
burn. Wait until the engine is cool
before adding coolant to the
reservoir.
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain additional fuel as soon as possible
after the warning light comes
on or when the gauge indicator
comes close to the "E (Empty)"
level.
OPD047462N
This gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
i Information
• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a
low fuel warning light, which will
illuminate when the fuel tank is
nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel
warning light may come on earlier
than usual due to the movement of
fuel in the tank.
3-48
NOTICE
Avoid driving with an extremely
low fuel level. Running out of fuel
could cause the engine to misfire
damaging the catalytic converter.
Outside temperature gauge
This gauge indicates the current outside air temperatures by 1°F (1°C).
- Temperature range : -40°F ~ 140°F
(-40°C ~ 60°C)
The outside temperature on the display may not change immediately
like a general thermometer (to avoid
distracting the driver).
Both the temperature unit on the
cluster LCD display and climate control screen will change.
Odometer
3
OPDE046141R
The odometer indicates the total distance that the vehicle has been driven and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
3-49
Convenient features of your vehicle
OPD047463N
You can change the temperature unit
from °F to °C or °C to °F in the User
Settings mode in the cluster:
- Go to User Settings Mode ➝ Other
➝ Temperature Unit.
For vehicles equipped with Automatic
Climate Control, you can also:
- Press and hold the AUTO and OFF
buttons on the climate control unit
for 3 seconds
Convenient features of your vehicle
Range
i Information
OPDE046138R
• The range is the estimated distance the vehicle can be driven
with the remaining fuel.
• If the estimated distance is below
1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will
display "----" as range.
3-50
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been interrupted, the range function may not
operate correctly.
• The range may differ from the actual driving distance as it is an estimate of the available driving distance.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 1.5 gallon
(6 liters) of fuel are added to the
vehicle.
• The range may vary significantly
based on driving conditions, driving
habits, and condition of the vehicle.
Transmission shift indicator
Manual transmission shift indicator (if equipped)
OPDE046142
This indicator informs which gear is
recommended while driving to save
fuel.
• Shifting up : ▲2, ▲3, ▲4, ▲5, ▲6
• Shifting down : ▼1, ▼2, ▼3, ▼4, ▼5
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the
3rd gear is recommended (currently the shift lever is in the 2nd
or 1st gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to
the 3rd gear is recommended
(currently the shift lever is in the
4th, 5th, or 6th gear).
Automatic transmission/
Dual clutch transmission shift
indicator (if equipped)
3
OTL045134
OTL045132
This indicator displays which shift
lever position is selected.
•
•
•
•
•
Shift indicator pop-up (if equipped)
The pop-up indicates the current
gear position displayed in the cluster
for about 2 seconds when shifting
into other positions (P/R/N/D).
Park : P
Reverse : R
Neutral : N
Drive : D
Sports Mode
- Auto Transmission : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
- Dual Clutch Transmission : 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6, 7
3-51
Convenient features of your vehicle
When the system is not working properly, the indicator is not displayed.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Warning and Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Warning Light
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
This warning light illuminates:
• When you place the ignition switch
to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds.
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
the reservoir is low.
i Information
Make sure that all warning lights are
OFF after starting the engine. If any
light is still ON, this indicates a situation that needs attention.
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When you place the ignition switch
to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
3-52
For more details, refer to "Seat
Belts" in chapter 2.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dualdiagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure is
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
WARNING
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light
Driving the vehicle with a warning light ON is dangerous. If the
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light illuminates with
the parking brake released, it
indicates that the brake fluid
level is low.
In this case, have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When you place the ignition switch
to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking system will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
3-53
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
If the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and
add fluid as required (For more
details, refer to "Brake Fluid" in
chapter 7). After adding brake
fluid, check all brake components
for fluid leaks. If a brake fluid leak is
found, or if the warning light
remains on, or if the brakes do not
operate properly, do not drive the
vehicle. Have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD)
System Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate
at the same time while driving:
• When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD) System
Warning Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking.
(Continued)
3-54
(Continued)
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
Have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.
i Information - Electronic
Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) System Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on or
both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Lights are on, the
speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter
may not work. Also, the EPS Warning
Light may illuminate and the steering
effort may increase or decrease.
In this case, have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
Electric Power Steering
(EPS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When you place the ignition switch
to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) illuminates, potential catalytic converter damage is possible
which could result in loss of
engine power.
In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.
Charging System
Warning Light
When this warning light illuminates
while running the engine, the battery
is not being charged. Immediately
turn OFF all electrical accessories.
Try not to use electrically operated
controls, such as the power windows.
Keep running the engine.
Have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible.
NOTICE
Driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) on may cause damage to
the emission control system which
could affect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
3-55
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
This warning light illuminates:
• When you place the ignition switch
to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
Convenient features of your vehicle
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When the engine oil pressure is low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to "Engine Oil" in chapter 7).
If the level is low, add oil as required.
If the warning light remains on
after adding oil or if oil is not available, have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.
3-56
NOTICE
• If the engine does not stop
immediately after the Engine Oil
Pressure Warning Light is illuminated, severe damage could
result.
• If the warning light stays on
while the engine is running, it
indicates that there may be serious engine damage or malfunction. In this case:
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so.
2. Turn off the engine and check
the oil level. If the oil level is
low, fill the engine oil to the
proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the
warning light stays on after the
engine is started, turn the
engine off immediately. In this
case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Low Fuel Level
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
Add fuel as soon as possible.
NOTICE
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below "E" can cause the
engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter (if equipped).
Master Warning Light
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• When the washer fluid level in the
reservoir is nearly empty.
In this case, you should refill the
washer fluid.
This indicator light illuminates:
• When there is a malfunction in operation in any of the following systems:
- Low washer fluid (if equipped)
- Exterior lamp malfunction
(if equipped)
- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) malfunction (if equipped)
- Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) malfunction (if equipped)
- Smart cruise control malfunction
(if equipped)
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
- Service reminder
To identify the details of the warning,
look at the LCD display.
This warning light illuminates:
• When you place the ignition switch
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated.
For more details, refer to
"Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.
3-57
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Washer Fluid Warning
Light (if equipped)
Convenient features of your vehicle
This warning light remains ON
after blinking for approximately 60
seconds, or repeatedly blinks ON
and OFF in 3 second intervals:
• When there is a malfunction with
the TPMS.
In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
For more details, refer to
"Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.
WARNING
Safe Stopping
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle instability, immediately take your
foot off the accelerator pedal,
apply the brakes gradually with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
3-58
Electronic Parking
Brake (EPB) Warning
Light
EPB
This warning light illuminates:
• When you place the ignition switch
to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPB.
In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i Information
The Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)
Warning Light may illuminate when
the Electronic Stability control (ESC)
Indicator Light comes on to indicate
that the ESC is not working properly
(This does not indicate malfunction of
the EPB).
AUTO HOLD Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• [White] When you activate the auto
hold system by pressing the AUTO
HOLD switch.
• [Green] When you stop the vehicle
completely by depressing the
brake pedal with the auto hold system activated.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunction with the auto hold system.
In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more information, refer to
"Auto Hold" in chapter 5.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (without smart key)
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When you place the ignition switch
to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light illuminates:
• When you place the ignition switch
to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately
3 seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC system by pressing the ESC OFF button.
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the vehicle detects the
immobilizer in the key with the ignition switch in the ON position.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks:
• While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to
"Electronic Stability Control (ESC)"
in chapter 5.
For more details, refer to
"Electronic Stability Control (ESC)"
in chapter 5.
This indicator light blinks:
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
3-59
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light
Convenient features of your vehicle
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (with smart key
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates for
up to 30 seconds:
• When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle with the
Engine Start/Stop button in the
ACC or ON position.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
• When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you cannot start the
engine.
3-60
This indicator light illuminates for
2 seconds and goes off:
• If the smart key is in the vehicle
and the Engine Start/Stop button is
ON, but the vehicle cannot detect
the smart key.
In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery voltage of the
smart key is low.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start
the engine if you press the
Engine Start/Stop button with the
smart key. (For more details,
refer to "Starting the Engine"
in chapter 5).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
This indicator light blinks:
• When you operate the turn signal
indicator light.
If any of the following occur, there may
be a malfunction with the turn signal
system.
- The turn signal indicator light illuminates but does not blink
- The turn signal indicator light blinks
rapidly
- The turn signal indicator light does
not illuminate at all
If any of these conditions occur, have
your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
LED Headlight Warning
Light (if equipped)
Smart High Beam indicator (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
This warning light illuminates:
• When you place the ignition switch
or the Engine Start/Stop button to
the ON position.
• When there is a malfunction with
the LED headlight.
In this case, have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
This warning light illuminates :
• When the high-Beam is on with the
light switch in the AUTO light position.
• If your vehicle detects oncoming or
preceding vehicles, the Smart High
Beam system will switch the high
beam to low beam automatically.
Light ON Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the tail lights or headlights
are on.
This warning light blinks:
When there is a malfunction with a
LED headlight related part.
In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more information, refer to
"Smart High Beam" in this chapter.
NOTICE
Continuous driving with the LED
Headlight Warning Light on or
blinking can reduce LED headlight
life.
3-61
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
High Beam Indicator
Light
Convenient features of your vehicle
Icy Road Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light is to warn the driver
the road may be icy.
When the temperature on the outside temperature gauge is approximately below 40°F (4°C), the Icy
Road Warning Light and Outside
Temperature Gauge blinks and then
illuminates. Also, the warning chime
sounds 1 time.
i Information
If the icy road warning light appears
while driving, you should drive more
attentively and safely refraining from
over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden braking or sharp turning, etc.
3-62
Cruise Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.
For more details, refer to "Cruise
Control System" in chapter 5.
Cruise SET Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control speed is
set.
For more details, refer to "Cruise
Control System" in chapter 5.
SPORT Mode Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
When you select "SPORT" mode as
drive mode.
For more information, refer to
"Drive Mode Integrated Control
System" in chapter 5.
Lane Keeping Assist
System (LKAS)
Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the AEB system is turned
off.
• When the radar sensor or cover is
blocked with dirt or snow. Check
the sensor and cover and clean
them by using a soft cloth.
• When there is a malfunction with
AEB. In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized dealer of
HYUNDAI.
• [Green] When you activate the lane
departure warning system by
pressing the LKAS button and all
of the system operating conditions
are satisfied.
• [White] When system operating
conditions are not satisfied or
when the sensor does not detect
the lane line.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunction with the lane keeping assist
system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
For more information, refer to
"Automatic (Autonomous) Emergency
Braking (AEB)" in chapter 5.
LCD Display Messages
Shift to to P or N to start engine
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
you try to start the engine with the
shift lever not in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position.
i Information
You can start the engine with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position. But,
for your safety, we recommend that
you start the engine with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position.
For more information, refer to "Lane
Keeping Assist System (LKAS)" in
chapter 5.
3-63
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Automatic
Emergency Braking
(AEB) Warning light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates :
Convenient features of your vehicle
Shift to P
(for smart key system)
This message is displayed if you try
to turn off the engine without the shift
lever in P (Park) position.
At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop button once more, it will turn to the ON
position).
Low key battery
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the battery of the smart key is discharged while changing the Engine
Start/Stop button to the OFF position.
3-64
Press brake pedal to start engine
(for smart key system and automatic transmission/dual clutch
transmission)
This warning message is displayed if
the Engine Start/Stop button changes
to the ACC position twice by pressing
the button repeatedly without depressing the brake pedal.
You can start the vehicle by depressing
the brake pedal.
Press clutch pedal to start
engine (for smart key system
and manual transmission)
This warning message is displayed if
the Engine Start/Stop button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the clutch pedal.
You can start the engine by depressing the clutch pedal to.
Key not in vehicle
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the smart key is not in the vehicle
when you press the Engine Start/Stop
button.
When attempting to start the vehicle,
always have the smart key with you.
Key not detected
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the smart key is not detected when you
press the Engine Start/Stop button.
Press START button again
(for smart key system)
This message is displayed if you were
unable to start the vehicle when the
Engine Start/Stop button was
pressed.
If this occurs, attempt to start the
engine by pressing the Engine Start/
Stop button again.
If the warning message appears each
time you press the Engine Start/Stop
button, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Press START button with key
(for smart key system)
Door, Hood, Liftgate Open
Sunroof Open (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
you press the Engine Start/Stop button while the warning message "Key
not detected" is displayed.
At this time, the immobilizer indicator
light blinks.
3
This warning message is displayed if
the brake switch fuse is disconnected.
You need to replace the fuse with a
new one before starting the engine.
If that is not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop button for 10 seconds in the
ACC position.
OPD046115
OPD046116
This warning is displayed indicating
which door, or hood, or liftgate is
open.
This warning is displayed if you turn
off the engine when the sunroof is
open.
Close the sunroof securely when
leaving your vehicle.
CAUTION
Before driving the vehicle, you
should confirm that the door/
hood/liftgate is fully closed.
Also, check there is no door
/hood/liftgate open warning light
or message displayed on the
instrument cluster.
3-65
Convenient features of your vehicle
Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse
(for smart key system)
Convenient features of your vehicle
Low Pressure
Turn on FUSE SWITCH
Lights Mode
OPD067005L
OPDE046119
OPD047120L
This warning message is displayed if
the tire pressure is low. The corresponding tire on the vehicle will be
illuminated.
This warning message is displayed if
the fuse switch located on the fuse
box under the steering wheel is OFF.
You should turn the fuse switch on.
This indicator displays which exterior
light is selected using the lighting
control.
For more details, refer to "Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.
For more details, refer to "Fuses"
in chapter 7.
3-66
Wiper
■ Front
■ Rear
Heated Steering Wheel turned
off (if equipped)
This message is displayed if you turn
off the heated steering wheel.
For more details, refer to "Heated
Steering Wheel" in this chapter.
OPD047125L/OPD047126L
This indicator displays which wiper
speed is selected using the wiper
control.
This warning message is displayed
if the washer fluid level in the reservoir is nearly empty.
Have the washer fluid reservoir refilled.
Low fuel
This warning message is displayed if
the fuel tank is almost out of fuel.
When this message is displayed, the
low fuel level warning light in the
cluster will come on.
It is recommended to look for the
nearest fueling station and refuel as
soon as possible.
This warning message is displayed
when the engine coolant temperature is above 248°F (120°C). This
means that the engine is overheated
and may be damaged.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer
to "Overheating" in chapter 6.
Check headlight (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
the headlights are not operating
properly. A headlight bulb may need
to be replaced.
i Information
Make sure to replace the burned out
bulb with a new one of the same wattage
rating.
Add fuel as soon as possible.
3-67
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Low washer fluid (if equipped)
Engine has overheated
Convenient features of your vehicle
Check headlamp LED
(if equipped)
Check AEB system (if equipped)
Check BSD System (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
there is a problem with the LED headlamp. Have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This warning message is displayed if
there is a malfunction with the
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
system. Have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This warning message is displayed if
there is a problem with the Blind Spot
Detection (BSD) system. Have the
vehicle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Check headlamp FAN
(if equipped)
For more details, refer to "Automatic
(Autonomous) Emergency Braking
(AEB) system" in chapter 5.
For more information, refer to "Blind
Spot Detection (BSD) System" in
chapter 5.
Check Driver Attention Alert
system (if equipped)
Check LKAS (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
there is a problem with headlamp
fan. Have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Check Smart High Beam
System (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
there is a problem with the Smart
High Beam System. Have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
For more information, refer to
"Smart High Beam System" in
chapter 3.
3-68
This warning message is displayed if
there is a problem with the Driver
Attention Alert System. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
For more information, refer to
"Driver Attention Alert (DAA)" in
chapter 5.
This warning message is displayed if
there is a problem with the Lane
Keeping Assist System (LKAS). Have
the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more information, refer to
"Lane Keeping Assist System
(LKAS)" in chapter 5.
LCD DISPLAY
LCD Display Control
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons.
(1)
■ Ty p e A
■ Ty p e B
OPD047404N
3-69
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
: MODE button for changing
modes
(2)
,
: MOVE
switch
for
changing items
(3) OK : SELECT/RESET button for
setting or resetting the selected item
Convenient features of your vehicle
LCD Display Modes
Modes
Trip Computer
Turn By Turn (TBT)
(if equipped)
Assist
User Settings
Warning
Symbol
Explanation
This mode displays driving information such as the tripmeter, fuel economy, etc.
For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
This mode displays the state of the navigation.
This mode displays the state of :
- Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
- Advanced Smart Cruise Control
- Driver Attention Alert (DAA)
- Tire Pressure
For more information, refer to "Advanced Smart Cruise Control (ASCC)", "Lane
Keeping Assist System (LKAS)", "Driver Attention Alert (DAA)" in chapter 5 and
"Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.
In this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.
This mode displays warning messages related to the Blind Spot Detection system, etc.
The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.
3-70
Settings available after engaging parking brake / Settings
available after shifting to P
■ Manual transmission
■ Automatic transmission/
dual clutch transmission
Quick guide help
Trip computer mode
This mode provides quick guides for
the systems in the User Settings
mode.
Select an item, press and hold the OK
button.
For more information about each
system, refer to this Owner's
Manual.
■ Type A
■ Type B
3
OPD047150L/OPD047151L
This warning message appears if
you try to adjust the User Settings
while driving.
- Manual transmission
For your safety, change the User
Settings after parking the vehicle,
applying the parking brake and
moving the shift lever to neutral.
- Automatic transmission /
dual clutch transmission
For your safety, change the User
Settings after parking the vehicle,
applying the parking brake and
moving the shift lever to P (Park).
3-71
Convenient features of your vehicle
OPD047464N/OPD047465N
The trip computer mode displays
information related to vehicle driving
parameters including fuel economy,
tripmeter information and vehicle
speed.
For more information, refer to
"Trip Computer" in this chapter.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Turn By Turn (TBT) mode
Assist mode
OPD047148L
OPDE046147R
OPDE046128R
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
SCC/LKAS/DAA
This mode displays the state of the
Smart Cruise Control (SCC), Lane
Keeping Assist System (LKAS) and
Driver Attention Alert (DAA).
For more information, refer to
each system in chapter 5.
3-72
Tire Pressure
This mode displays information related to Tire Pressure.
For more information, refer to
"Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.
User settings mode
If one of followings occurs, warning
messages will be displayed on the
LCD display for several seconds.
- Lower washer fluid (if equipped)
- Exterior lamp malfunction
(if equipped)
- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) malfunction (if equipped)
- Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) malfunction
- Smart cruise control malfunction
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) malfunction
In this mode, you can change the
settings of the instrument cluster,
doors, lamps, etc.
1. Driving Assist
2. Door
3. Lights
4. Sound
5. Convenience
6. Service Interval
7. Other
8. Reset
The information provided may differ
depending on which functions are
applicable to your vehicle.
1. Driving Assist
• Lane Keeping Assist System
To adjust the sensitivity of the Lane
Keeping Assist System.
- Lane Departure Warning/
Standard LKA/Active LKA
For more information, refer to the
"Lane Keeping Assist System" in
chapter 5.
• Driver Attention Alert
To adjust the sensitivity of the Driver
Attention Alert (DAA).
- Off/Normal/Early
For more information, refer to the
"Driver Attention Alert (DAA)" in
chapter 5.
• Smart Cruise Control Response
To adjust the sensitivity of the Smart
Cruise Control system.
- Slow/Normal/Fast
For more information, refer to the
"Advanced Smart Cruise Control"
in chapter 5.
3-73
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Warning mode
Convenient features of your vehicle
• Autonomous Emergency Braking
To activate or deactivate the Automatic
Emergency Braking (AEB).
For more information, refer to
"Automatic (Autonomous) Emergency
Braking (AEB)" in chapter 5.
• Forward Collision Warning
- Late/Normal/Early
To adjust the initial warning alert
time for Automatic Emergency
Braking system.
For more information, refer to
"Automatic (Autonomous) Emergency
Braking (AEB)" in chapter 5.
• Rear Cross Traffic Alert
To activate or deactivate the Rear
Cross Traffic Alert system.
For more information, refer to
"Blind Spot Detection" in chapter 5.
3-74
2. Door
• Auto Lock
- Disable: The auto door lock operation will be canceled.
- Enable on Speed: All doors will be
automatically locked when the vehicle
speed exceeds 9.3 mph (15 km/h).
- Enable on Shift: All doors will be
automatically locked if the automatic transmission shift lever is shifted
from the P (Park) position to the R
(Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive)
position.
• Auto Unlock
- Disable: The auto door unlock operation will be canceled.
- On Key Out: All doors will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is removed from the key
ignition switch (if equipped with
remote key).
- Vehicle Off: All doors will be automatically unlocked when the
Engine Start/Stop button is set to
the OFF position (if equipped with
smart key).
- On Shift to P: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic
transmission/dual clutch transmission shift lever is shifted to the P
(Park) position.
• Two Press Unlock
- Off: The two press unlock function
will be deactivated. Therefore, all
doors will unlock if the door unlock
button is pressed.
- On: Only the driver's door will
unlock if the door unlock button is
pressed. When the door unlock
button is pressed again within 4
seconds, the remaining doors will
unlock.
• Horn Feedback
To activate or deactivate the horn
feedback.
If the horn feedback is activated,
after locking the door by pressing the
lock button on the remote key, and
pressing it again within 4 seconds,
the horn feedback sound will operate
once to indicate that all doors are
locked (if equipped with remote key).
• Head Lamp Delay
To activate or deactivate the headlight delay function.
For more information, refer to
"Light" in this chapter
4. Sound
• Blind Spot Detection Sound
To activate or deactivate the Blind
Spot Detection sound.
For more information, refer to
"Blind Spot Detection" in chapter 5.
• Welcome Sound
To activate or deactivate the welcome sound function.
5. Convenience
• Wireless Charging System
To activate or deactivate the wireless
charging system in the front seat.
For more information, refer to
"Wireless Charging System" in
this chapter.
• Wiper/Lights Display
To activate or deactivate the Wiper/
Light mode.
When activated, the LCD display
shows the selected Wiper/Light
mode whenever you change the
mode.
• Auto Rear Wiper (reverse)
To activate or deactivate the rear
wiper while the vehicle is in reverse
with the front wiper ON.
• Gear Position Pop-up
To activate or deactivate the gear
position pop-up.
When activated, the gear position
will be displayed on the LCD display.
(if equipped with automatic transmission/dual clutch transmission)
6. Service
• Service Interval
To activate or deactivate the service
interval function.
• Adjust Interval
If the service interval menu is activated, you may adjust the time and
distance.
i Information
To use the service interval menu, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the service interval is activated and
the time and distance is adjusted,
messages are displayed in the following situations each time the vehicle is turned on.
- Service in
: Displayed to inform the driver the
remaining mileage and days to
service.
- Service required
: Displayed when the mileage and
days to service has been reached
or passed.
3-75
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
3. Lights
• One Touch Turn Signal
- Off: The one touch turn signal function will be deactivated.
- 3, 5, 7 Flashes: The turn signal indicator will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when
the turn signal lever is moved slightly.
For more information, refer to
"Light" in this chapter.
Convenient features of your vehicle
i Information
If any of the following conditions
occur, the mileage and number of days
to service may be incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
7. Other
• Fuel Economy Auto Reset
- Off: The average fuel economy will
not reset automatically whenever
refueling.
- After Ignition: When the engine has
been OFF for 4 hours or longer the
average fuel economy will reset
automatically.
- After Refueling: The average fuel
economy will reset automatically
after adding 1.6 gallons (6 liters) of
fuel or more and after driving speed
exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h).
For more information, refer to
"Trip Computer" in this chapter.
• Fuel Economy Unit
To select the fuel economy unit.
(US gallon, UK gallon)
• Temperature Unit
To select the temperature unit.
(°C,°F)
• Tire Pressure Unit
To select the tire pressure unit.
(psi, kPa, bar)
3-76
• Language
To select language.
8. Reset
You can reset the menus in the User
Settings Mode. All menus in the User
Settings Mode are reset to factory
settings, except language and service interval.
TRIP COMPUTER
The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related
to driving.
i Information
Fuel Economy
■ Ty p e A
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
■ Ty p e B
3
Drive Info
• Tripmeter
• Fuel Economy
• Timer
OPD047404N
To change the trip mode, toggle the
"
,
" switch on the steering
wheel.
Accumulated Info
• Tripmeter
• Fuel Economy
• Timer
Digital Speedometer
3-77
Convenient features of your vehicle
Some driving information stored in the
trip computer (for example Average
Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is
disconnected.
Trip modes
Convenient features of your vehicle
Average fuel economy/
Instant fuel economy
■ Type A
■ Type B
Manual reset
To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the OK button on the
steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average fuel economy
is displayed.
Automatic reset
OPD047464N/OPD047465N
Average Fuel Economy (1)
• The average fuel economy is calculated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automatically.
To automatically reset the average
fuel economy, select between "After
Ignition" or "After Refueling" in the
User Settings mode on the LCD display.
- After Ignition: When the engine has
been OFF for 4 hours or longer the
average fuel economy will reset
automatically.
- After Refueling: The average fuel
economy will reset automatically
after adding 1.6 gallons (6 liters) of
fuel or more and after driving speed
exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h).
i Information
The vehicle must be driven for a minimum of 0.19 miles (300 meters) since
the last ignition key cycle before the
average fuel economy will be recalculated.
3-78
Instant Fuel Economy (2)
• This mode displays the instantaneous fuel economy while driving.
Accumulated Info display
■ Type A
■ Type B
The accumulated driving information
will continue to be counted while the
engine is still running (for example,
when the vehicle is in traffic or
stopped at a stop light).
Drive Info display
■ Type A
■ Type B
i Information
3
OPD047466N/OPD047467N
OPD047468N/OPD047469N
This display shows the accumulated
trip distance (1), the average fuel
economy (2), and the total driving
time (3).
The information is accumulated starting from the last reset.
To manually reset the information,
press and hold the OK button when
viewing the Accumulated driving info.
The trip distance, the average fuel
economy, and total driving time will
reset simultaneously.
This display shows the trip distance
(1), the average fuel economy (2),
and the total driving time (3).
The information is combined for each
ignition cycle. However, when the
engine has been OFF for 4 hours or
longer the Drive Info screen will reset.
To manually reset the information,
press and hold the OK button when
viewing the Drive Info. The trip distance, the average fuel economy, and
total driving time will reset simultaneously.
3-79
Convenient features of your vehicle
The vehicle must be driven for a minimum of 0.19 miles (300 meters) since
the last ignition key cycle before the
average fuel economy will be recalculated.
Convenient features of your vehicle
The driving information will continue to
be counted while the engine is still running (for example, when the vehicle is
in traffic or stopped at a stop light).
Digital speedometer
■ Type A
■ Type B
i Information
The vehicle must be driven for a minimum of 0.19 miles (300 meters) since the
last ignition key cycle before the average
fuel economy will be recalculated.
OPDE046145R/OPDE046146R
This message shows the speed of
the vehicle.
3-80
LIGHTING
Exterior Lights
Lighting control
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
Daytime running light (DRL)
(if equipped)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
can make it easier for others to see
the front of your vehicle during the
day, especially after dawn and before
sunset.
OPD047036N
AUTO light position (if equipped)
The parking lamp and headlamp will
be turned ON or OFF automatically
depending on the amount of light
outside the vehicle.
OLF044084N
1. DRL (Daytime Running Lights)
OFF position
2. AUTO light position
3. Parking lamp position
4. Headlamp position
Even with the AUTO light feature in
operation, it is recommended to
manually turn ON the lamps when
driving at night or in a fog, driving in
the rain, or when you enter dark
areas, such as tunnels and parking
facilities.
3-81
Convenient features of your vehicle
The DRL system will turn the dedicated lamp OFF when :
• The light switch is in the DRL OFF
position.
• The headlamps are ON.
• The parking lamps are ON.
• The vehicle is turned off.
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
NOTICE
• Do not cover or spill anything on
the sensor (1) located in front of
the instrument panel.
• Do not clean the sensor using a
window cleaner, the cleanser may
leave a light film which could
interfere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint
or other types of metallic coating on the front windshield, the
AUTO light system may not work
properly.
OLF044086N
OLF044087N
Parking lamp position (
)
The parking lamp, license plate lamp
and instrument panel lamp are turned
ON.
Headlamp position ( )
The headlamp, parking lamp, license
plate lamp and instrument panel lamp
are turned ON.
i Information
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlamp.
3-82
High beam operation
Smart high beam
3
OLF044089N
To turn on the high beam headlamp,
push the lever away from you. The
lever will return to its original position.
The high beam indicator will light
when the headlamp high beams are
switched on.
To turn off the high beam headlamp,
pull the lever towards you. The low
beams will turn on.
WARNING
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles approaching
you. Using high beam could
obstruct the other driver's vision.
To flash the high beam headlamp,
pull the lever towards you, then
release the lever. The high beams
will remain ON as long as you hold
the lever towards you.
OLF044090N
The Smart High Beam is a system
that automatically adjusts the headlamp range (switches between high
beam and low beam) according to
the brightness of other vehicles and
road conditions.
Operating condition
1. Place the light switch in the AUTO
position.
2. Turn on the high beam by pushing
the lever away from you.
The smart high beam ( ) indicator will illuminate.
3-83
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLF044088N
Convenient features of your vehicle
3. The Smart High Beam will turn on
when vehicle speed is above
25 mph (40 km/h).
• If the light switch is pushed away
when the Smart High Beam is
operating, the Smart High Beam
will turn off and the high beam will
be on continuously.
• If the light switch is pulled towards
you when the high beam is off, the
high beam will turn on without the
Smart High Beam canceled.
When you let go of the light switch,
the lever will move to the middle
and the high beam will turn off.
• If the light switch is pulled towards
you when the high beam is on by
the Smart High Beam, the low
beam will be on and the Smart
High Beam will turn off.
• If the light switch is placed to the
headlamp position, the Smart
High Beam will turn off and the
low beam will be on continuously.
3-84
When the Smart High Beam is operating, the high beam switches to low
beam in the below conditions.
- When the headlamp of an on-coming vehicle is detected.
- When the tail lamp of a vehicle in
front is detected.
- When headlamp/tail lamp of bicycle/motorcycle is detected.
- When the surrounding is bright
enough high beams are not needed.
- When streetlights or other lights
are detected.
- When the light switch is not in the
AUTO position.
- When the Smart High Beam is off.
- When vehicle speed is below 15 mph
(24 km/h).
ODM046655L
Warning light and message
When the Smart High Beam is not
working properly, the warning message will come on for a few second.
After the message disappears, the
master warning light (
) will illuminate. Take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the
system checked.
WARNING
The system may not operate normally in the below conditions.
• When the light from the oncoming or in front vehicle is
not detected because of lamp
damage, hidden from sight, etc.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When there is a traffic light,
reflecting sign, flashing sign or
mirror.
• When the road conditions are
bad such as being wet or covered with snow.
• When the front vehicle's headlamps are off but the fog lamps
on.
• When a vehicle suddenly
appears from a curve.
• When the vehicle is tilted from
a flat tire or being towed.
• When the LKAS (Lane Keeping
Assist System) warning light
illuminates.
i Information
When you replace or reinstall the windshield glass/LKAS camera (if equipped),
take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the system
checked.
WARNING
• Do not place any accessories,
•
•
•
•
•
stickers or tint on the windshield.
Have the windshield glass
replaced from an authorized
dealer.
Be careful that water doesn't
get into the Smart High Beam
unit.
Do not remove or impact related parts of the Smart High
Beam system.
Do not place objects on the
dashboard that reflects light
such as mirrors, white paper,
etc. The system may malfunction if sunlight is reflected.
At times, the Smart High
Beam system may not work
properly, always check the
road conditions for your safety. When the system does not
operate normally, manually
change between the high
beam and low beam.
3-85
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• When the lamp of the on-coming or front vehicle is covered
with dust, snow or water.
• When the light from the oncoming or front vehicle is not
detected because of exhaust
fume, smoke, fog, snow, etc.
• When the front window is covered with foreign matters such
as ice, dust, fog, or is damaged.
• When there is a similar shape
lamp with the front vehicle’s
lamps.
• When it is hard to see because
of fog, heavy rain or snow.
• When the headlamp is not
repaired or replaced at an
authorized dealer.
• When headlamp aiming is not
properly adjusted.
• When driving on a narrow
curved road or rough road.
• When driving downhill or uphill.
• When only part of the vehicle in
front is visible on a crossroad
or curved road.
(Continued)
Convenient features of your vehicle
Turn signals and lane change
signals
OLF044091N
To signal a turn, push down on the
lever for a left turn or up for a right
turn in position (A).
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out and will require replacement.
3-86
Onetouch turn signal function
To activate the One Touch Turn
Signal function, push the turn signal
lever up or down to position (B) and
then release it.
The lane change signals will blink 3,
5 or 7 times.
You can activate or deactivate the
One Touch Turn Signal function or
choose the number of blinks (3, 5, or
7) from the User Settings mode
(Light) on the LCD display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.
Battery saver function
The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lamp when the
driver turns the vehicle off and opens
the driver-side door.
With this feature, the parking lamps
will turn off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lamps on
when the vehicle is turned off, perform
the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lamps OFF and
ON again using the light switch on
the steering column.
Headlamp delay function
(if equipped)
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except driver's door), the battery saver function does not operate and the
headlamp delay function does not
turn off automatically. Therefore, It
causes the battery to be discharged. In this case, make sure
to turn off the lamp before getting
out of the vehicle.
Interior Lights
WARNING
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark.The interior lights may obscure your view
and cause an accident.
NOTICE
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the vehicle is turned off or the battery will
discharge.
Interior lamp AUTO cut
The interior lamps will automatically
go off approximately 20 minutes after
the engine is turned off and the
doors are closed. If a door is opened,
the lamp will go off 40 minutes after
the engine is turned off. If the doors
are locked by the remote key or
smart key and the vehicle enters the
armed stage of the theft alarm system, the lamps will go off five seconds later.
3-87
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
If the key is removed from the ignition
switch or placed in the ACC position
or the LOCK/OFF position with the
headlamps ON, the headlamps
(and/or parking lamps) remain on for
about 5 minutes. However, if the driver’s door is opened and closed, the
headlights are turned off after 15
seconds. Also, with the engine off if
the driver's door is opened and
closed, the headlamps (and/or parking lamps) are turned off after 15
seconds.
The headlamps (and/or parking
lamps) can be turned off by pressing
the lock button on the remote key or
smart key twice or turning the light
switch to the OFF or AUTO position.
You can activate or deactivate the
Headlamp Delay function from the
User Settings Mode (Light) on the
LCD display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.
NOTICE
Convenient features of your vehicle
Front lamps
Front room lamp (2)
•
:
Press the button to turn ON the
room lamp for the front/rear seats.
•
OPDE046041
(1) Front Map Lamp
(2) Front Room Lamp
(3) Front Door Lamp
Front Map Lamp (1) :
Press either lenses to turn the map
lamp on or off. This light produces a
spot beam for convenient use as a
map lamp at night or as a personal
lamp for the driver and the front passenger.
3-88
:
Press the button to turn OFF the
room lamp for the front/rear seats
regardless of front or rear door open
position.
Front Door Lamp (3) (
):
The front or rear room lamps come on
when the front or rear doors are
opened if the engine is running or not.
When doors are unlocked by the
remote key or smart key, the front and
rear lamps come on for approximately 30 seconds as long as any door is
not opened. The front and rear room
lamps go out gradually after approximately 30 seconds when the door is
closed. However, if the ignition switch
is in the ON position or all doors are
locked, the front and rear lamps will
turn off. If a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ACC position or
the OFF position, the front and rear
lamps stay on for about 20 minutes.
Rear lamp
Luggage compartment lamp
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
■ Type A
3
OPD046042
OAD045410
The luggage compartment lamp
comes on when the liftgate is
opened.
Push the switch to turn the light on or
off.
•
: The lamp will turn on if this
button is pressed.
•
: The lamp will turn off if this
button is pressed.
NOTICE
OPD046406
Rear Room Lamp (
):
Press this switch to turn the rear
room lamp on and off.
The luggage compartment lamp
comes on as long as the liftgate is
open. To prevent unnecessary battery system drain, close the liftgate securely after using the luggage compartment.
NOTICE
Always have the switch in the off
position when the vanity mirror
lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor
is closed without the lamp off, it
may discharge the battery or damage the sunvisor.
3-89
Convenient features of your vehicle
OAD045407
■ Type B
Convenient features of your vehicle
Welcome System (if equipped)
Welcome light (if equipped)
Headlamp and parking lamp
When the headlamp (with the lamp
switch in the headlamp or AUTO
position) is on and all doors (and
trunk) are locked and closed, the
parking lamp and headlamp will
come on for 15 seconds when the
door unlock button is pressed on the
remote key or smart key.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button on the remote key or
smart key the parking lamp and
headlamp will turn off immediately.
You can activate or deactivate the
Welcome Light from the User Settings
Mode (Light) on the LCD display.
For more details, refer to "LCD
Display" in this chapter.
3-90
Interior lamp
When the interior lamp switch is in
the DOOR position and all doors (and
trunk) are closed and locked, the
room lamp will come on for 30 seconds if any of the below is performed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on the remote key or
smart key.
• When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button on the remote key or
smart key the room lamp will turn off
immediately.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
A : Wiper speed control
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF – Off
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· LO – Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed
■ Front windshield wiper/washer
OPD047454L
■ Rear windshield wiper/washer
C : Wash with brief wipes
(pull lever towards you)
D : Rear wiper/washer control
· HI – High wiper speed
· LO – Low wiper speed
· OFF – Off
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)
(push lever away from you)
Windshield Wipers
OTLA045318
Operates as follows when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
push the lever upward and
release. The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is
held in this position.
i Information
If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windshield, defrost the
windshield for about 10 minutes, or
until the snow and/or ice is removed
before using the windshield wipers to
ensure proper operation.
If you do not remove the snow and/or
ice before using the wiper and washer,
it may damage the wiper and washer
system.
3-91
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
OFF : Wiper is not in operation.
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. To
vary the speed setting, move
the speed control lever. The top
most setting will run the wipers
most frequently (for more rain).
The bottom setting will run the
wipers the least frequently (for
less rain).
LO : The wiper runs at a lower speed.
HI : The wiper runs at a higher speed.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Windshield Washers
WARNING
Front windshield wiper service
position
When the outside temperature
is below freezing, ALWAYS
warm the windshield using the
defroster to help prevent the
washer fluid from freezing on
the windshield and obscuring
your vision which could result
in an accident and serious
injury or death.
OTLE045164
In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles. The spray and
wiper operation will continue until you
release the lever. If the washer does
not work, you may need to add washer fluid to the washer fluid reservoir.
3-92
NOTICE
OPD076027
• To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not operate
the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers or windshield, do not
operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers and washer system,
use anti-freezing washer fluids in
the winter season or cold weather.
This vehicle has a "hidden" wiper
design which means that the wipers
cannot be lifted when they are in their
bottom resting position.
1. Within 20 seconds of turning off the
engine, lift and hold the wiper lever
up to the MIST position for about 2
seconds until the wipers move to the
top wipe position.
2. At this time you can lift the wipers off
the windshield.
3. Gently put the wipers back down
onto the windshield.
4. Turn the wipers to any ON position
to return the wipers to the bottom
resting position.
Auto rear wiper (if equipped)
Rear Window Wiper and Washer
The rear wiper will operate while the
vehicle is in reverse with the front
wiper ON by selecting the function on
the LCD display.
Go to 'User Settings → Convenience
→ Auto Rear Wiper (reverse)'.
Convenient features of your vehicle
OTLE045166
OTLE045165
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the
wiper and washer switch lever. Turn
the switch to the desired position to
operate the rear wiper and washer.
HI – High wiper speed
LO – Low wiper speed
OFF – Off
3
Push the lever away from you to
spray rear washer fluid and to run the
rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray
and wiper operation will continue
until you release the lever.
3-93
Convenient features of your vehicle
DRIVER ASSIST SYSTEM
This is a supplemental system that
helps provide a view of the area
behind the vehicle through the audio
display while the vehicle is in the R
(Reverse) position.
Rear View Camera
WARNING
OPDE046424
The Rear View Camera is not a
safety device. It only serves to
assist the driver in identifying
objects directly behind the middle of the vehicle. The camera
does NOT cover the complete
area behind the vehicle.
WARNING
• Never rely solely on the Rear
View Camera when backingup.
• ALWAYS look around your
vehicle to make sure there are
no objects or obstacles before
moving the vehicle in any
direction to prevent a collision.
• Always pay close attention
when the vehicle is driven
close to objects, particularly
pedestrians, and especially
children.
NOTICE
OPD047402L
The Rear View Camera will activate
when the engine is running and the
shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
3-94
Always keep the camera lens
clean. The camera may not work
normally if the lens is covered
with dirt, water or snow.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
■ Type A
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Temperature control knob
3. Mode selection buttons
4. Front windshield defroster button
■ Type B
5. Rear window defroster button
6. A/C (Air conditioning) button*
7. Air intake control button
* : if equipped
OPD047300N/OPD047301N
3-95
Convenient features of your vehicle
Heating and Air Conditioning
Mode selection
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
To improve the effectiveness of
heating and cooling, select:
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air or recirculated
air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
(if equipped)
(if equipped)
OPDE046307/OPD046306
The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the
ventilation system. Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or
windshield. Five symbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, Floor, FloorDefrost and Defrost air position.
3-96
Face-Level (B, D, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters, and side vents.
3
Defrost-Level (A, D)
OPD046308
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E, F)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield, side
window defrosters, and side vents.
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side vents.
MAX A/C-Level (B, D, F)
(if equipped)
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool
the inside of the vehicle faster. Air
flow is directed toward the upper
body and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning and
the recirculated air position cannot be
selected. Turn the fan speed mode to
adjust.
After the interior has cooled sufficiently, whenever possible, move the
temperature knob away from Max AC
and press the A/C button.
3-97
Convenient features of your vehicle
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
Floor & Defrost
(A, C, D, E, F)
Convenient features of your vehicle
Instrument panel vents
Temperature control
■ Front
■ Type A
Air intake control
■ Type B
■ Type A
OPD046309
OPD046312
■ Rear (if equpipped)
OPD046351
The temperature will
turning the knob to the
The temperature will
turning the knob to the
■ Type B
increase by
right.
decrease by
left.
OPD046310
OPD046313
The outlet vents can be opened ( )
or closed ( ) separately using the
thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivered from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
This button is used to select the outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.
3-98
Recirculated air position
Outside (fresh) air position
■ Type A
■ Type B
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
i Information
Using the system in the fresh air position is recommended.
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without
air conditioning selected) can cause
fogging of the windshield and side
windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become
stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.
WARNING
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in
the recirculated air position
can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, that may cause
loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. Set the air
intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in
the recirculated air position
(without the air conditioning
selected) may allow humidity
to increase inside the vehicle
which may fog the glass and
obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause serious injury or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
3-99
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heating system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
Air conditioning (if equipped)
System Operation
Ventilation
1. Select the Face Level
mode.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
OPD047311N
OPD046314
Turn the knob to the right to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Turn the
knob to the left to decrease fan
speed and airflow.
Setting the fan speed control knob to
the "0" position turns off the fan.
Push the A/C button to turn the system on (indicator light will illuminate)
and off.
NOTICE
Operating the fan speed when the
ignition switch is in the ON position could cause the battery to
discharge. Operate the fan speed
when the engine is running.
3-100
1. Select the Floor Level
mode.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system on.
If the windshield fogs up, select the
Floor & Defrost
mode or press
the Front Defrost
mode.
Air conditioning
All HYUNDAI Air Conditioning
Systems are filled with environmentally friendly R-1234yf refrigerant.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the air conditioning button.
3. Set the mode to the Face Level
mode.
4. Set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. However,
prolonged operation of the recirculated air position will excessively
dry the air. In this case, change the
air position.
5. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control to the
extreme left position then set the fan
speed control to the highest speed.
NOTICE
When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the engine temperature gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic when
outside temperatures are high. Air
conditioning system operation can
cause engine overheating.
Continue to use the fan, but turn
the air conditioning system off if
the engine temperature gauge
indicates engine overheating.
3-101
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Return the
control to the fresh air position
when the irritation has passed.
This will help keep the driver alert
and comfortable.
• To help prevent the inside of the
windshield from fogging, set the air
intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired
position, turn on the air conditioning
system, and adjust the temperature
control to the desired temperature.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• After sufficient cooling has been
achieved, switch back from the
recirculated air to the fresh outside
air position.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system with the windows
and sunroof closed.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system performance.
• If you operate air conditioner excessively, the difference between the
temperature of the outside air and
that of the windshield could cause
the outer surface of the windshield
to fog up, causing loss of visibility.
In this case, set the mode selection
knob or button to the
position
and fan speed control to the lower
speed.
3-102
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
System Maintenance
Climate control air filter
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
reduces the performance of the air
conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Blower
Climate control
air filter
Evaporator
core
Heater core
1LDA5047
This filter is installed behind the glove
box. It filters the dust or other pollutants that enter the vehicle through the
heating and air conditioning system.
Have the climate control air filter be
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer according to the maintenance
schedule. If the vehicle is being driven
in severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent air conditioner filter inspections and changes
are required.
If the air flow rate suddenly decreases, the system should be checked at
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, damage
to the compressor and abnormal
system operation may occur.
WARNING
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
■ Example
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Because the refrigerant
is mildly inflammable at
very high pressure, the
air conditioning system
should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. It is
important that the correct type and amount of oil and
refrigerant is used. Otherwise, it
may cause damage to the vehicle and personal injury.
Air Conditioning refrigerant label
ODH043366
The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant label in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Each symbols and specification on air
conditioning refrigerant label means
as below :
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubricant
Refer to chapter 8 for more detail
location of the air conditioning refrigerant label.
3-103
Convenient features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
1. Driver's temperature control knob
2. Passenger's temperature control knob
3. AUTO (automatic control) button
4. OFF button
5. Fan speed control button
6. Mode selection button
7. SYNC button
8. Front windshield defroster button
9. Rear window defroster button
10. Air conditioning button
11. Air intake control button
12. Climate control information screen
OPD046302
3-104
Automatic Heating and Air
Conditioning
OPD046350
The Automatic Climate Control
System is controlled by setting the
desired temperature.
1. Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake
and air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically by the temperature setting you select.
2. Turn the temperature control knob
to the desired temperature. If the
temperature is set to the lowest
setting (Lo), the air conditioning
system will operate continuously.
After the interior has cooled sufficiently, adjust the knob to a higher
temperature set point whenever
possible.
3-105
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
OPD046315
To turn the automatic operation off,
select any button of the following:
- Mode selection button
- Front windshield defroster button
(Press the button one more time
to deselect the front windshield
defroster function. The 'AUTO'
sign will illuminate on the information display once again.)
- Fan speed control button
The selected function will be controlled manually while other functions
operate automatically.
For your convenience and to improve
the effectiveness of the climate control, use the AUTO button and set the
temperature to 73°F (23°C).
To change the temperature unit from
°F to °C or °C to °F:
Press and hold the AUTO and OFF
buttons on the climate control unit for
3 seconds.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Manual Heating and Air
Conditioning
OPD046316
NOTICE
Never place anything near the
sensor to ensure better control of
the heating and cooling system.
3-106
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pushing
buttons other than the AUTO button.
In this case, the system works
sequentially according to the order of
buttons selected.
When pressing any button except the
AUTO button while using automatic
operation, the functions not selected
will be controlled automatically.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
To improve the effectiveness of
heating and cooling, select:
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
7. Press the AUTO button to convert
to full automatic control of the system.
Mode selection
The air flow outlet direction is cycled
as follows:
3
Face-Level (B, D, F)
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
(if equipped)
(if equipped)
OPDE046307/OPD046317
The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the
ventilation system.
3-107
Convenient features of your vehicle
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Instrument panel vents
Floor & Defrost
(A, C, D, E, F)
■ Front
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E, F)
OPD046352
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
OPD046309
■ Rear (if equpipped)
OPD046310
The outlet vents can be opened ( )
or closed ( ) separately using the
thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivered from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
3-108
Temperature control
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature individually
Press the "SYNC" button again to
operate the driver and passenger
side temperature individually. The
button indicator will turn off.
OPD046315
Turn the knob to the right to increase
the temperature. Turn the knob to the
left to decrease temperature.
The temperature will increase or
decrease by 1°F/0.5°C for each incremental location. When set to the lowest temperature setting, the air conditioning will operate continuously.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature equally
• Press the "SYNC" button to operate the driver and passenger side
temperature equally.
The passenger side temperature
will be set to the same temperature
as the driver side temperature.
• Turn the left temperature control
knob. The driver and passenger
side temperature will be adjusted
equally.
The temperature unit on both the
cluster LCD display and climate control screen will change.
3-109
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
OPD046320
Temperature conversion
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Fahrenheit.
To change the temperature unit from
°F to °C or °C to °F:
- On the instrument cluster, go to
User Settings Mode ➝ Other ➝
Temperature Unit.
- Press and hold the AUTO and OFF
buttons on the climate control unit
for 3 seconds.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Air intake control
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
i Information
OPD046321
This button is used to select the outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heating system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
3-110
Using the system in the fresh air position
is recommended.
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) can cause fogging
of the windshield and side windows and
the air within the passenger compartment will become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.
WARNING
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in
the recirculated air position
can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, that may cause
loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. Set the air
intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in
the recirculated air position
(without the air conditioning
selected) may allow humidity
to increase inside the vehicle
which may fog the glass and
obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause serious injury or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
Fan speed control
i Information
Air conditioning
For better sound quality, fan speed
may automatically slow down for a
couple of minutes when you activate
voice recognition or hands free.
NOTICE
3
OPD046322
Push the A/C button to manually turn
the system on (indicator light will illuminate) and off.
3-111
Convenient features of your vehicle
OPD046323
The fan speed can be set as desired
by pushing the fan speed control button.
More air is delivered with higher fan
speeds.
Pressing the OFF button turns off the
fan.
Operating the fan when the ignition switch is in the ON position
could cause the battery to discharge. Operate the fan when the
engine is running.
Convenient features of your vehicle
OFF mode
System Operation
Ventilation
1. Select the Face Level
mode.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
OPD046324
Push the OFF button to turn the climate control system off. You can still
operate the mode and air intake buttons as long as the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
3-112
1. Select the Floor Level
mode.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system on.
If the windshield fogs up, select the
Floor & Defrost
mode or press
the Front Defrost
mode.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the car through the
ventilation system, temporarily set
the air intake control to the recirculated air position. Return the control to the fresh air position when
the irritation has passed. This will
help keep the driver alert and comfortable.
• To help prevent the inside of the
windshield from fogging, set the air
intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired
position, turn on the air conditioning
system, and adjust the temperature
control to the desired temperature.
Air conditioning
NOTICE
When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the engine temperature gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic
when outside temperatures are
high. Air conditioning system
operation can cause engine overheating. Continue to use the fan,
but turn the air conditioning system off if the engine temperature
gauge indicates engine overheating.
Air conditioning system operation
tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• After sufficient cooling has been
achieved, switch back from the
recirculated air to the fresh outside
air position.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system with the windows and sunroof closed.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system performance.
• If you operate air conditioner
excessively, the difference between
the temperature of the outside air
and that of the windshield could
cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up, causing loss
of visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button to
the
position and fan speed
control to the lower speed.
3-113
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
All HYUNDAI Air Conditioning
Systems are filled with environmentally friendly R-1234yf refrigerant.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the air conditioning button.
3. Set the mode to the Face Level
mode.
4. Set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. However,
prolonged operation of the recirculated air position will excessively
dry the air. In this case, change the
air position.
5. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control to the
extreme left position then set the fan
speed control to the highest speed.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
System Maintenance
Climate control air filter
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
reduces the performance of the air
conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Blower
Climate control
air filter
Evaporator
core
Heater core
1LDA5047
This filter is installed behind the glove
box. It filters the dust or other pollutants that enter the vehicle through the
heating and air conditioning system.
Have the climate control air filter be
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer according to the maintenance
schedule. If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions such as
dusty or rough roads, more frequent
air conditioner filter inspections and
changes are required.
If the air flow rate suddenly decreases, the system should be checked at
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
3-114
NOTICE
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, damage
to the compressor and abnormal
system operation may occur.
WARNING
Because the refrigerant
is mildly inflammable at
very high pressure, the
air conditioning system
should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. It is
important that the correct type and amount of oil and
refrigerant is used. Otherwise, it
may cause damage to the vehicle and personal injury.
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
Air Conditioning refrigerant label
■ Example
WARNING
Windshield heating
NOTICE
If the engine temperature is still
cold after starting, then a brief
engine warm up period may be
required for the vented air flow to
become warm or hot.
Refer to chapter 8 for more detail
location of the air conditioning refrigerant label.
3-115
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
ODH043366
The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant label in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Each symbols and specification on
air conditioning refrigerant label
means as below :
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubricant
Do not use the
or
position during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temperature of the outside air and that
of the windshield could cause
the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility could cause an accident resulting in serious injury
or death. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button
to the
position and fan
speed control knob or button to
a lower speed.
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set the
mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear window, side view mirrors, and all side
windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster efficiency and to reduce the probability
of fogging up the inside of the windshield.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Manual Climate Control System
Automatic Climate Control
System
■ Type A
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type B
OPD047326N
OPD047325N
To defog inside windshield
1. Select any fan speed except "0"
position.
2. Select the desired temperature.
3. Select the
or
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected automatically. Additionally, the air
conditioning will automatically operate if the mode is selected to the
position.
If the air conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, press the corresponding button manually.
3-116
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme
hot position.
3. Select the
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning will be selected automatically.
OPD046327
To defog inside windshield
1. Select the desired fan speed.
2. Select the desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button (
).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically.
If the outside (fresh) air position is
not selected automatically, adjust the
corresponding button manually.
If the
position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.
Defogging logic (if equipped)
To reduce the probability of fogging
up the inside of the windshield, the
air intake or air conditioning are controlled automatically according to
certain conditions such as
or
positions. To cancel or return the
defogging logic, do the following.
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme
hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button (
).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically.
If the
position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.
Manual climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Press the defroster button (
).
3. Press the air intake control button
at least 5 times within 10 seconds.
The indicator on the air 3 seconds
immediately blinks 3 times with 0.5
seconds of interval. It indicates that
the defogging logic is canceled or
returned to the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
3-117
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
OPD046328
Automatic climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Press the defroster button (
).
3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button at least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The climate control information
screen will blink 3 times with 0.5 seconds of interval. It indicates that the
defogging logic is canceled or
returned to the programmed status.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Auto Defogging System
(Only for Automatic Climate
Control System, if equipped)
OPD047316N
Auto defogging reduces the possibility of fogging up the inside of the windshield by automatically sensing the
moisture on inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the heater or air conditioning is
on.
i Information
The auto defogging system may not
operate normally, when the outside
temperature is below 50 °F (-10 °C).
3-118
When the Auto Defogging
System operates, the indicator will illuminate.
If high levels of moisture are sensed in
the vehicle, the Auto Defogging System
will operate in the following order:
Step 1: Outside air position
Step 2: Operating the air conditioning
Step 3: Blowing air toward the windshield
Step 4: Increasing air flow toward the
windshield
If the air conditioning is off or recirculated air position is manually selected
while Auto Defogging System is ON,
the Auto Defogging System Indicator
will blink 3 times to signal that the
manual operation has been canceled.
To cancel or reset the
Auto Defogging System
Press the front windshield defroster
button for 3 seconds when the ignition
switch is in the ON position. When the
Auto Defogging System is canceled,
the ADS OFF symbol will blink 3 times
and ADS OFF will be displayed on the
climate control information screen.
When the Auto Defogging System is
reset, the ADS OFF symbol will blink
6 times without a signal.
i Information
• When the air conditioning is turned
on by Auto defogging system, if you
try to turn off the air conditioning, the
indicator will blink 3 times and the air
conditioning will not be turned off.
• For efficiency, do not select recirculated air position while the Auto
defogging system is operating.
• When Auto defogging mode is
selected, fan speed, temperature and
intake mode which is adjusted manually are canceled for better defogging result.
NOTICE
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
windshield glass.
Damage to system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
Rear Window Defroster
■ Manual climate control system
• To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the center
facia switch panel. The indicator on
the rear window defroster button illuminates when the defroster is ON.
• To turn off the defroster, press the
rear window defroster button again.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside surface
of the rear window, never use
sharp instruments or window
cleaners containing abrasives to
clean the window.
OPD046318
■ Automatic climate control system
i Information
• If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
• The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately
20 minutes or when the ignition
switch is in the LOCK/OFF position.
Side view mirror defroster
OPD046319
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the interior and exterior of the rear
window, while the engine is running.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
side view mirror defrosters, they will
operate at the same time you turn on
the rear window defroster.
3-119
Convenient features of your vehicle
If you want to defrost and defog
the front windshield, refer to the
"Windshield
Defrosting
and
Defogging" section in this chapter.
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
CLIMATE CONTROL ADDITIONAL FEATURES (IF EQUIPPED)
Cluster ionizer (if equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the clean air function turns
on automatically.
Also, the clean air function turns off
automatically, when the ignition
switch is in the OFF position.
Automatic Ventilation
(if equipped)
Sunroof Inside Air
Recirculation (if equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position or when the engine is running and temperature is below 59°F
(15°C) with the recirculated air position selected more than five minutes,
the air intake position will automatically change to the outside (fresh) air
position.
When the heater or air conditioning
system is on with the sunroof
opened, the outside (fresh) air position will be automatically selected. At
this time, if you press the recirculated
air position button, the recirculated
air position will be selected but will
change back to the outside (fresh) air
position after 3 minutes.
When the sunroof is closed, the air
intake position will return to the original position that was selected.
To cancel or reset the Automatic
Ventilation
When the air conditioning system is
on, select Face Level
mode and
while pressing the A/C button, press
the recirculated air position button
five times within three seconds.
When the automatic ventilation is set,
the air intake control button (recirculated air position) indicator will blink 6
times. When canceled, the air intake
control button (recirculated air position) indicator will blink 3 times.
3-120
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Center Console Storage
Glove Box
Never store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other
flammable/explosive materials
in the vehicle. These items may
catch fire and/or explode if the
vehicle is exposed to hot temperatures for extended periods.
3
ALWAYS keep the storage compartment covers closed securely while driving. Items inside
your vehicle are moving as fast
as the vehicle. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there
is a crash, the items may fly out
of the compartment and may
cause an injury if they strike the
driver or a passenger.
NOTICE
OPD046331
To open :
Grab and hold the latch (1) on the
arm rest then lift the lid.
OPD046333
To open:
Pull the lever (1).
WARNING
ALWAYS close the glove box
door after use.
An open glove box door can
cause serious injury to the passenger in an accident, even if the
passenger is wearing a seat belt.
To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartments.
3-121
Convenient features of your vehicle
WARNING
Convenient features of your vehicle
Sunglass Holder
WARNING
Multi Box
(if equipped with a cover)
• Do not keep objects except
OPD046334
To open:
Push and release the cover and the
holder will slowly open. Place your
sunglasses in the compartment door
with the lenses facing out.
To close:
Push back into position.
Make sure the sunglass holder is
closed while driving.
3-122
sunglasses inside the sunglass holder. Such objects can
be thrown from the holder in
the event of a sudden stop or
an accident, possibly injuring
the passengers in the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror
of the vehicle can be blocked
by an open sunglass holder.
• Do not put the glasses forcibly
into a sunglass holder. It may
cause personal injury if you
try to open it forcibly when the
glasses are jammed in holder.
OPD047450L
To open the cover, push the lip of the
cover forward then release. The
cover will open slowly. To close the
cover, push the lip down to the
closed position.
WARNING
Do not keep objects that can be
thrown from the multi box and
severely injure passengers in
the vehicle in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.
INTERIOR FEATURES
Rear
Cup Holder
OPDE046420
■ Type B
OPD046336
Pull the armrest down to use the cup
holders.
WARNING
• Avoid abrupt starting and
OPD046335
Cups or small beverages cups may
be placed in the cup holders.
Type B
To use the cup holder, use the lip to
slide open the cover towards the rear
of the vehicle. To close, use the lip to
slide the cover closed.
WARNING
Keep cans or bottles out of
direct sun light and do not put
them in a hot vehicle. It may
explode.
braking when the cup holder
is in use to prevent spilling
your drink. If hot liquid spills,
you could be burned. Such a
burn to the driver could cause
loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
(Continued)
3-123
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Do not place uncovered or
unsecured cups, bottles,
cans, etc., in the cup holder
containing hot liquid while the
vehicle is in motion. Injuries
may result in the event of a
sudden stop or collision.
• Only use soft cups in the cup
holders. Hard objects can
injure you in an accident.
■ Type A
Convenient features of your vehicle
NOTICE
Sliding Armrest (if equipped)
Sunvisor
• Keep your drinks sealed while
driving to prevent spilling your
drink. If liquid spills, it may get
into the vehicle's electrical/electronic system and damage electrical/electronic parts.
• When cleaning spilled liquids,
do not dry the cup holder at high
temperature. This may damage
the cup holder.
OPD046332
OAD045418L
To move the armrest forward:
Pull up the latch (1) then pull the
armrest forward.
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
sunvisor and slide the mirror cover (3).
Adjust the sunvisor forward or backward (4) as needed (if equipped). Use
the ticket holder (5) to hold tickets (if
equipped).
To move the armrest rearward:
Pull up the latch (1) then push the
armrest rearward.
3-124
Power Outlet (if equipped)
NOTICE
Close the vanity mirror cover
securely and return the sunvisor
to its original position after use.
■ Front
• Type A
■ Center
WARNING
3
OPD046340
OPDE046430
NOTICE
■ Rear
• Type B
Do not put several tickets in the
ticket holder at one time. This
could cause damage to the ticket
holder.
OPD047451L
OPD046341
The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or other
devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices
should draw less than 180 W (Watts) with the engine running.
3-125
Convenient features of your vehicle
For your safety, do not block
your view when using the sunvisor.
Convenient features of your vehicle
WARNING
Avoid electrical shocks. Do not
place your fingers or foreign
objects (pin, etc.) into a power
outlet or touch the power outlet
with a wet hand.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the Power
Outlets :
• Use the power outlet only when
the engine is running and
remove the accessory plug after
use. Using the accessory plug
for prolonged periods of time
with the engine off could cause
the battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories which are less than 180 W
(Watts) in electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
(Continued)
3-126
(Continued)
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices may
cause excessive audio static
and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used
in your vehicle.
• Push the plug in as far as it will
go. If good contact is not made,
the plug may overheat and the
fuse may open.
• Plug in battery equipped electrical/electronic devices with
reverse current protection. The
current from the battery may
flow into the vehicle’s electrical/electronic system and cause
system malfunction.
Wireless Cellular Phone
Charging System (if equipped)
OPD047452L
There is a wireless cellular phone
charger inside the front console.
The system is available when all
doors are closed, and when the ignition switch is in the ACC/ON position.
To charge a cellular phone
1. Remove other items, including the
smart key, from the wireless charging unit. If not, the wireless charging process may be interrupted.
2. The indicator light is orange when
the phone is charging. The indicator light turns green when phone
charging is complete.
3. You can turn ON or OFF the wireless charging function in the user
settings mode on the instrument
cluster. For further information,
refer to the "LCD Display Modes"
in this chapter.
If your phone is not charging:
- Slightly change the position of the
cellular phone on the charging pad.
- Make sure the indicator light is
orange.
Depending on the cellular phone
type, the indicator light may not turn
green even though the charging is
complete.
The indicator light will blink orange
for 10 seconds if there is a malfunction in the wireless charging system.
In this case, temporarily stop the
charging process, and re-attempt to
wirelessly charge your cellular phone
again.
The system warns you with a message on the LCD display if the cellular
phone is still on the wireless charging
unit after the engine is turned OFF
and the front door is opened.
NOTICE
• The wireless cellular phone
charging system may not support certain cellular phones,
which are not verified for the Qi
specification (
).
• Locate your cell phone well in
the middle of the wireless cellular phone charging system.
Even when your cell phone
locates slightly to one side, the
charging speed may decrease.
• The wireless charging process
may temporarily stop, when a
smart key function operates (i.e.
starting the vehicle, opening the
doors, closing the doors).
• For certain cell phones, the indicator color may not change to
green, even when the wireless
charging process is properly
completed.
(Continued)
3-127
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
The wireless cellular phone charging
system charges only the Qi-enabled
cellular phones (
). Read the label
on the cellular phone accessory
cover or visit your cellular phone
manufacturer’s website to check
whether your cellular phone supports
the Qi technology.
The wireless charging process starts
when you put a Qi-enabled cellular
phone on the wireless charging unit.
Convenient features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• The wireless charging process
may temporarily stop, when temperature abnormally increases
inside the wireless cellular
phone charging system. The
wireless charging process
restarts, when temperature falls
to a certain level.
• The wireless charging process
may temporarily stop when
there is any metallic item, such
as a coin, between the wireless
cellular phone charging system
and a cellular phone.
Clock
Clothes Hanger (if equipped)
WARNING
■ Type A
Do not adjust the clock while
driving, you may lose your
steering control and cause an
accident that results in severe
personal injury or death.
Vehicles with Audio system
Select the [SETUP] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Date/Time].
• Set time: Set the time displayed on
the audio screen.
• Time format: Choose between 12hour and 24-hour time formats.
OPDE046050
■ Type B
Vehicles with Navigation system
Select the Settings menu on the
Navigation
system
➟
Select
[Date/Time].
• GPS time: Displays time according
to the received GNSS time.
• 24-hour: Switches to 12 hour or 24
hour.
3-128
OPD046411
These hangers are not designed to
hold large or heavy items.
WARNING
Floor Mat Anchor(s)
OPD046343
ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors
to attach the front floor mats to the
vehicle. The anchors on the front
floor carpet keep the floor mats from
sliding forward.
WARNING
Do not overlay additional mats
or liners over the floor mats. If
using All Weather mats, remove
the carpeted floor mats before
installing them. Only use floor
mats designed to connect to the
anchors.
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat
to the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchor(s)
before driving the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to
the vehicle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top
of one another (e.g. all-weather rubber mat on top of a carpeted floor mat). Only a single
floor mat should be installed
in each position.
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver’s side
floor mat anchors that are
designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal operation, HYUNDAI recommends
that the HYUNDAI floor mat
designed for use in your vehicle
be installed.
3-129
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
OPD046048
Do not hang other objects such
as hangers or hard objects
except clothes. Also, do not put
heavy, sharp or breakable objects
in the clothes pockets. In an accident or when the curtain air bag
is inflated, it may cause vehicle
damage or personal injury.
WARNING
Convenient features of your vehicle
Luggage Net Holder (if equipped)
Cargo Area Cover (if equipped)
NOTICE
Since the cargo area cover may be
damaged or deformed, do not put
luggage on it when it is being
used.
WARNING
• Do not place objects on the
OPD046344
OPD046346
To keep items from shifting in the luggage compartment, you can use the 4
holders located in the luggage compartment to attach the luggage net.
Make sure the luggage net is securely
attached to the holders in the luggage
compartment.
Use the cover to hide items stored in
the cargo area.
The cargo area cover will lift when
the liftgate is opened.
Disconnect the strap (1) from the
holder if you want to return the cover
to the original position. To remove the
cargo area cover completely, lift the
cover to a 50-degree angle and pull it
out (2).
WARNING
Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretch the luggage net. ALWAYS
keep your face and body out of
the luggage net's recoil path. DO
NOT use the luggage net when
the strap has visible signs of
wear or damage.
3-130
cargo area cover while driving. Such objects may be
thrown about inside the vehicle and possibly injure vehicle
occupants during an accident
or when braking.
• Never allow anyone to ride in
the luggage compartment. It
is designed for luggage only.
• Maintain balance of the vehicle and locate the weight as
far forward as possible.
Multimedia System
Multimedia System.................................................4-2
AUX, USB and iPod® Port ...............................................4-2
Antenna ...............................................................................4-3
Steering Wheel Audio Controls......................................4-3
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Hands-Free...........4-4
Audio (Display Audio) / Video /
Navigation System (AVN).................................................4-4
4
Multimedia System
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
NOTICE
• If you install an aftermarket HID
head lamp, your vehicle's audio
and electronic devices may not
function properly.
• Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream,
hand cleaner, and air freshener
from contacting the interior
parts because they may cause
damage or discoloration.
AUX, USB and iPod® Port
■ Type A
❈ iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
OPDE046428
■ Type B
OPD047453L
You can use an AUX or USB cable to
connect audio devices to the vehicle
AUX or USB port.
4-2
i Information
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the portable audio
device's power source.
Antenna
Steering Wheel Audio Control
SEEK/PRESET (
/
) (2)
If the SEEK/PRESET switch is
pressed up or down and held for 0.8
second or more, it will function in the
following modes:
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button. It will SEEK until you
release the button.
The shark fin antenna will receive the
transmitted data (example: AM/FM,
SXM signal, GPS).
OPD046408
NOTICE
Do not operate multiple audio
remote control buttons simultaneously.
VOLUME (VOL + / - ) (1)
• Press the VOLUME switch up to
increase volume.
• Press the VOLUME switch down to
decrease volume.
If the SEEK/PRESET switch is
pressed up or down, it will function
in the following modes:
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION UP/DOWN button.
MEDIA mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/
DOWN button.
4-3
4
Multimedia System
OPD046345
MEDIA mode
It will function as the FF/RW button.
Multimedia System
MODE (3)
Press the MODE button to toggle
through Radio, SXM, or AUX modes.
MUTE (
Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Hands-Free
) (4)
• Press the MUTE button to mute the
sound.
• Press the MUTE button again to
activate the sound.
Audio (Display Audio) / Video /
Navigation System (AVN)
(if equipped)
i Information
Detailed information for audio control
buttons are described in the separately
supplied manual with the vehicle.
OPD046409
OPD046348
With the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology in the vehicle, you can
use the phone wireless.
(1) Call / Answer button
(2) Call end button
4-4
(3) Microphone
Detailed information for the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology hands-free is
described in the Car Multimedia
User's Manual.
Detailed information for the AVN system is described in the Car Multimedia
User's Manual.
Driving your vehicle
Ignition Switch........................................................5-6
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................................5-48
Vehicle Stability Management (VSM).........................5-51
Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) ....................................5-53
Good Braking Practices.................................................5-53
Key Ignition Switch ...........................................................5-6
Engine Start/Stop Button................................................5-9
Drive Mode Integrated Control System ............5-54
Blind Spot Detection System (BSD) ..................5-55
Manual Transmission ...........................................5-16
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist).............................................5-56
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ..................................5-59
Limitations of the System.............................................5-61
Before Driving ........................................................5-4
Before Entering the Vehicle ...........................................5-4
Before Starting ..................................................................5-4
Manual Transmission Operation..................................5-16
Good Driving Practices ..................................................5-18
Automatic Transmission ......................................5-19
Automatic Transmission Operation.............................5-19
Good Driving Practices ..................................................5-23
Dual Clutch Transmission....................................5-25
Dual Clutch Transmission Operation ..........................5-25
Good Driving Practices ..................................................5-33
Braking System ....................................................5-35
Power Brakes ...................................................................5-35
Disc Brakes Wear Indicator ..........................................5-36
Parking Brake (Hand type) ...........................................5-36
Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)...................................5-38
Auto Hold ..........................................................................5-43
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ....................................5-47
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)...............5-62
System Setting and Activation.....................................5-62
AEB Warning Message and System Control ............5-64
AEB Front Radar Sensor...............................................5-66
System Malfunction .......................................................5-68
Limitations of the System.............................................5-69
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).................5-74
LKAS Operation ...............................................................5-75
Warning Light and Message.........................................5-79
Limitations of the System.............................................5-80
LKAS Function Change ..................................................5-81
5
Driver Attention Alert System (DAA)................5-82
Winter Driving ....................................................5-110
System Setting and Activation.....................................5-82
Resetting the System .....................................................5-83
System Standby...............................................................5-84
System Malfunction .......................................................5-84
Snow or Icy Conditions................................................5-110
Winter Precautions.......................................................5-112
Cruise Control.......................................................5-86
Cruise Control operation ...............................................5-86
Advanced Smart Cruise Control System...........5-91
5
Smart Cruise Control Speed .........................................5-92
Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-to-Vehicle
Distance .............................................................................5-96
Sensor to Detect Distance to the
Vehicle Ahead ..................................................................5-99
To Adjust the Sensitivity of
Smart Cruise Control ....................................................5-101
To Convert to Cruise Control Mode .........................5-101
Limitations of the System...........................................5-102
Special Driving Conditions ................................5-107
Hazardous Driving Conditions....................................5-107
Rocking the Vehicle......................................................5-107
Smooth Cornering.........................................................5-108
Driving at Night .............................................................5-108
Driving in the Rain ........................................................5-108
Driving in Flooded Areas.............................................5-109
Highway Driving ............................................................5-109
Vehicle Load Limit..............................................5-114
Tire Loading Information Label.................................5-115
Trailer Towing.....................................................5-119
WARNING
Carbon monoxide (CO) gas is toxic. Breathing CO can cause unconsciousness and death.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide which cannot be seen or smelled.
Do not inhale engine exhaust.
If at any time you smell engine exhaust inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately. Exposure to CO can cause
unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If
you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the
vehicle, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in an
open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan control set to high so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
Keep the air intakes clear.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, keep the ventilation air intakes located in front of the windshield
clear of snow, ice, leaves, or other obstructions.
If you must drive with the liftgate open:
Close all windows.
Open instrument panel air vents.
Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face", and the fan control set to high.
5-3
5
Driving your vehicle
Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Run the engine only
long enough to start the engine and to move the vehicle out of the garage.
Driving your vehicle
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components
including components found in
the interior furnishings in a
vehicle, contain or emit harmful
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
birth defects and reproductive
harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of components
contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive
harm.
5-4
Before Entering the Vehicle
Before Starting
• Be sure all windows, outside mirror(s), and outside lights are clean
and unobstructed.
• Remove frost, snow, or ice.
• Visually check the tires for uneven
wear and damage.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
• Make sure the hood, the liftgate,
and the doors are securely closed
and locked.
• Adjust the position of the seat and
steering wheel.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Verify all the lights work.
• Fasten your seatbelt. Check that all
passengers have fastened their
seatbelts.
• Check the gauges and indicators in
the instrument panel and the messages on the instrument display
when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
• Check that any items you are carrying are stored properly or fastened down securely.
WARNING
NEVER drink or take drugs and
drive.
Drinking or taking drugs and driving is dangerous and may result
in an accident and SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH.
Drunk driving is the number
one contributor to the highway
death toll each year. Even a
small amount of alcohol will
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. Just one
drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions
and emergencies and your reaction time gets worse with each
additional drink.
Driving while under the influence of drugs is as dangerous
or more dangerous than driving
under the influence of alcohol.
(Continued)
(Continued)
You are much more likely to have
a serious accident if you drink or
take drugs and drive. If you are
drinking or taking drugs, don't
drive. Do not ride with a driver
who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated driver or call a taxi.
5
Driving your vehicle
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, take the following precautions:
• ALWAYS wear your seat belt.
All passengers must be properly belted whenever the vehicle is moving. For more information, refer to "Seat Belts" in
chapter 2.
• Always drive defensively.
Assume other drivers or pedestrians may be careless and
make mistakes.
• Stay focused on the task of
driving. Driver distraction can
cause accidents.
• Leave plenty of space between
you and the vehicle in front of
you.
WARNING
5-5
Driving your vehicle
IGNITION SWITCH
Key Ignition Switch
■ Type A
ACC
ON
START
WARNING
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, take the following precautions:
• NEVER allow children or any
person who is unfamiliar with
the vehicle to touch the ignition switch or related parts.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur.
• NEVER reach through the
steering wheel for the ignition
switch, or any other control,
while the vehicle is in motion.
The presence of your hand or
arm in this area may cause a
loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
LOCK
OAE056172L
■ Type B
OAE056173L
Whenever the front door is opened,
the ignition switch will illuminate, provided the ignition switch is not in the
ON position. The light will go off
immediately when the ignition switch
is turned on or go off after about 30
seconds when the door is closed. (if
equipped)
5-6
WARNING
NEVER turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK or ACC position
while the vehicle is in motion
except in an emergency. This
will result in the engine turning
off and loss of power assist for
the steering and brake systems.
This may lead to loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.
Before leaving the driver's seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in 1st gear (for manual transmission vehicle) or P (Park, for
automatic transmission/dual
clutch transmission vehicle)
position, apply the parking
brake, and turn ignition switch
to the LOCK position.
Unexpected vehicle movement
may occur if these precautions
are not followed.
Key ignition switch positions
Switch
Position
Action
LOCK
To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, put the
key in at the ACC position and turn the key towards the
LOCK position.
The ignition key can be removed in the LOCK position.
(The shift lever must be in the P (Park) position for automatic transmission/dual clutch transmission vehicles)
ACC
START
Electrical accessories are usable.
The steering wheel unlocks.
5
This is the normal key position when the engine has Do not leave the ignition switch in the ON position when
started.
the engine is not running in order to prevent the battery
from discharging.
All features and accessories are usable.
The warning lights can be checked when you turn the
ignition switch from ACC to ON.
To start the engine, turn the ignition switch to the START The engine will crank until you release the key.
position. The switch returns to the ON position when you
let go of the key.
5-7
Driving your vehicle
ON
Notice
Driving your vehicle
Starting the engine
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes, such as high
heels, ski boots, sandals, flipflops, etc., may interfere with
your ability to use the brake and
accelerator pedals.
Vehicle with manual transmission:
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Make sure the shift lever is in neutral.
3. Depress the clutch and brake pedals.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the
START position. Hold the key
(maximum of 10 seconds) until the
engine starts and release it.
i Information
Depress the brake pedal and clutch
pedal until the engine starts.
5-8
Vehicle with automatic transmission/
dual clutch transmission:
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the
START position. Hold the key
(maximum of 10 seconds) until the
engine starts and release it.
i Information
• It is best to maintain a moderate
engine speed until the vehicle engine
comes up to normal operating temperature. Avoid harsh or abrupt
acceleration or deceleration while
the engine is still cold.
• Whether the engine is cold or warm,
always start the vehicle with your
foot on the brake pedal. Do not
depress the accelerator while starting the vehicle. Do not rev the
engine while warming it up.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
• Do not hold the ignition key in
the START position for more
than 10 seconds. Wait 5 to 10
seconds before trying again.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle
to start the engine.
Engine Start/Stop Button
OPD056001
WARNING
To reduce risk of serious injury
or death, NEVER allow children
or any person who is unfamiliar
with the vehicle to touch the
Engine Start/Stop button or
related parts. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement can
occur.
To turn the engine off in an
emergency:
Press and hold the Engine
Start/Stop button for more than
two seconds OR rapidly press
and release the Engine Start/
Stop button three times (within
three seconds).
If the vehicle is still moving, you
can restart the engine without
depressing the brake pedal by
pressing the Engine Start/Stop
button with the shift lever in the
N (Neutral) position.
WARNING
• NEVER press the Engine Start/
Stop button while the vehicle
is in motion except in an emergency. This will result in the
engine turning off and loss of
power assist for the steering
and brake systems.
(Continued)
(Continued)
This may lead to loss of directional control and braking
function, which could cause
an accident.
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, set the parking
brake, press the Engine Start/
Stop button to the OFF position, and take the Smart Key
with you. Unexpected vehicle
movement may occur if these
precautions are not followed.
• NEVER reach through the
steering wheel for the Engine
Start/Stop button or any other
control while the vehicle is in
motion. The presence of your
hand or arm in this area may
cause a loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
5-9
5
Driving your vehicle
Whenever the front door is opened,
the Engine Start/Stop button will illuminate and will go off 30 seconds
after the door is closed.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle
Engine Start/Stop button positions
- Vehicle with manual transmission
Button Position
Action
OFF
To turn off the engine, stop the vehicle and
then press the Engine Start/Stop button.
Notice
Not illuminated
ACC
Orange indicator
5-10
Press the Engine Start/Stop button when the
button is in the OFF position without depressing the clutch pedal.
Electrical accessories are usable.
If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the
ACC position for more than one hour, the battery power will turn off automatically to prevent
the battery from discharging.
- Vehicle with manual transmission
Button Position
Action
ON
Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it is
in the ACC position without depressing the
clutch pedal.
The warning lights can be checked before
the engine is started.
Notice
If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
the ON position for more than one hour, the
battery power will turn off automatically to
prevent the battery from discharging.
5
START
To start the engine, depress the clutch and
brake pedals and press the Engine Start/
Stop button with the shift lever in neutral.
Driving your vehicle
Blue indicator
If you press the Engine Start/Stop button
without depressing the clutch pedal, the
engine does not start and the Engine
Start/Stop button changes as follows:
OFF → ACC → ON → OFF
Not illuminated
5-11
Driving your vehicle
Engine Start/Stop button positions
- Vehicle with automatic transmission/dual clutch transmission
Button Position
Action
OFF
To turn off the engine, press the Engine
Start/Stop button with shift lever in P (Park).
When you press the Engine Start/Stop button without the shift lever in P (Park), the
Engine Start/Stop button does not turn to the
OFF position, but turns to the ACC position.
ACC
Press the Engine Start/Stop button when the
button is in the OFF position without depressing the brake pedal.
Electrical accessories are usable.
5-12
Notice
If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the
ACC position for more than one hour, the battery power will turn off automatically to prevent
the battery from discharging.
- Vehicle with automatic transmission/dual clutch transmission
Button Position
ON
START
Action
Notice
Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it is Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
in the ACC position without depressing the the ON position when the engine is not runbrake pedal.
ning to prevent the battery from discharging.
The warning lights can be checked before
the engine is started.
If you press the Engine Start/Stop button without depressing the brake pedal, the engine
does not start and the Engine Start/Stop button changes as follows:
OFF → ACC → ON → OFF
However, the engine may start if you depress
the brake pedal within 0.5 second after pressing the Engine Start/Stop button from the OFF
position.
5-13
5
Driving your vehicle
To start the engine, depress the brake pedal
and press the Engine Start/Stop button with
the shift lever in the P (Park) or in the N
(Neutral) position.
For your safety, start the engine with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position.
Driving your vehicle
Starting the engine
WARNING
• Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes, such as
high heels, ski boots, sandals,
flip-flops, etc., may interfere
with your ability to use the
brake and accelerator pedals.
• Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle can move and lead
to an accident.
• Wait until the engine rpm is
normal. The vehicle may suddenly move if the brake pedal
is released when the rpm is
high.
5-14
i Information
• The engine will start by pressing the
Engine Start/Stop button, only when
the smart key is in the vehicle.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle, if it is far away from the driver,
the engine may not start.
• When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ACC or ON position, if any
door is open, the system checks for
the smart key. If the smart key is not
in the vehicle, the "
" indicator
will blink and the warning "Key not
in vehicle" will come on and if all
doors are closed, the chime will also
sound for about 5 seconds. Keep the
smart key in the vehicle when using
the ACC position or if the vehicle
engine is ON.
Vehicle with manual transmission:
1. Always carry the smart key with
you.
2. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in neutral.
4. Depress the clutch and brake pedals.
5. Press the Engine Start/Stop button.
i Information
Depress the brake pedal and clutch
pedal until the engine starts.
Vehicle with automatic transmission/
dual clutch transmission:
1. Always carry the smart key with
you.
2. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Press the Engine Start/Stop button.
i Information
• Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at moderate
engine speeds. (Aggressive accelerating and decelerating should be
avoided.)
• Always start the vehicle with your
foot on the brake pedal. Do not
depress the accelerator while starting the vehicle. Do not rev the
engine while warming it up.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
When the stop lamp switch fuse is
blown, you can't start the engine
normally. Replace the fuse with a
new one. If you are not able to
replace the fuse, you can start the
engine by pressing and holding
the Engine Start/Stop button for
10 seconds with the Engine Start/
Stop button in the ACC position.
Do not press the Engine Start/Stop
button for more than 10 seconds
except when the stop lamp switch
fuse is blown.
For your safety always depress
the brake pedal before starting the
engine.
OPD056005
i Information
If the smart key battery is weak or the
smart key does not work correctly,
you can start the engine by pressing
the Engine Start/Stop button with the
smart key in the direction of the picture above.
5-15
5
Driving your vehicle
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
• If the engine stalls while you are
in motion, do not attempt to
move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position.
If traffic and road conditions
permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position
while the vehicle is still moving
and press the Engine Start/Stop
button in an attempt to restart
the engine.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle
to start the engine.
NOTICE
Driving your vehicle
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
WARNING
Before leaving the driver's seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in 1st gear when the vehicle is
parked on a uphill and in R
(Reverse) on a downhill, set the
parking brake, and place the
ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF
position. Unexpected vehicle
movement may occur if these
precautions are not followed.
The shift lever can be moved without
pressing the button (1).
The button (1) must be pressed while
moving the shift lever to R (Reverse).
OPDE056107
Manual Transmission
Operation
The manual transmission has 6 forward gears. The transmission is fully
synchronized in all forward gears so
shifting to either a higher or a lower
gear is easily accomplished.
5-16
To shift to R (Reverse), make sure
the vehicle has completely stopped,
and then move the shift lever to neutral before moving into R (Reverse).
When you've come to a complete
stop and it's hard to shift into 1st gear
or R (Reverse):
1. Put the shift lever in neutral and
release the clutch pedal.
2. Depress the clutch pedal, and
then shift into 1 (First) or R
(Reverse) gear.
i Information
During cold weather, shifting may be
difficult until the transmission lubricant has warmed up.
Using the clutch
The clutch pedal should be
depressed all the way before:
- Starting the engine
The engine will not start without
depressing the clutch pedal.
- Shifting into gear, up shifting to the
next higher gear, or down shifting
to the next lower gear.
When releasing the clutch pedal,
release it slowly. The clutch pedal
should always be fully released while
driving.
NOTICE
Down shift to a lower gear when
slowing down in heavy traffic or driving up a steep hill to prevent high
engine loads.
Also, downshifting reduces the
chance of stalling and helps reaccelerate the vehicle when you need to
increase your speed.
When the vehicle is going downhill,
downshifting helps maintain safe
speed by providing engine braking
(brake power from the engine) and
results in less wear on the brakes.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the engine,
clutch and transmission:
• When downshifting from 5th
gear to 4th gear, be careful not to
inadvertently push the shift
lever sideways engaging the 2nd
gear. A drastic downshift may
cause the engine speed to
increase to the point the
tachometer will enter the redzone and may cause engine
damage.
• Do not downshift more than two
gear at a time or downshift the
gear when the engine is running
at high speed (5,000 RPM or
higher).
Such down shifting may damage
the engine, clutch and the transmission.
5-17
5
Driving your vehicle
To prevent unnecessary wear or
damage to the clutch:
• Do not rest your foot on the
clutch pedal while driving.
• Do not hold the vehicle with the
clutch on an incline, while waiting for the traffic light, etc.
• Always depress the clutch pedal
down fully to prevent noise or
damage.
• Do not depress the clutch pedal
again until it is fully released.
• Do not start with the 2nd gear
engaged except when you start
on a slippery road.
• Do not drive with cargo loaded
more than required loading
capacity.
Downshifting
Driving your vehicle
Good Driving Practices
• Never take the vehicle out of gear
and coast down a hill. This is
extremely dangerous.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can
cause the brakes and related parts
to overheat and malfunction.
When you are driving down a long
hill, slow down and shift to a lower
gear. Engine braking will help slow
down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. This will help avoid
over-revving the engine, which can
cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter
cross winds. This gives you much
better control of your vehicle.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you shift into R
(Reverse) to prevent damage to
the transmission.
5-18
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
may cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident
WARNING
Do not use aggressive engine
braking (shifting from a higher
gear to a lower gear) on slippery roads. This could cause
the tires to slip and may result
in an accident.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.
In a collision, an unbelted
occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belted occupant.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• HYUNDAI recommends you
follow all posted speed limits.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING
Move shift lever.
OPDE056007
Automatic Transmission Operation
The automatic transmission has six forward speeds and one reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected automatically in the D (Drive) position.
5-19
5
Driving your vehicle
Press the shift button, then move shift lever.
Depress the brake pedal, press ths shift button, and then move shift lever.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death:
• ALWAYS check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for
people, especially children,
before shifting a vehicle into
D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, then set the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK/OFF position. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur
if these precautions are not
followed.
• When using Manual Shift
Mode, use caution when shifting from a higher gear to a
lower gear on slippery roads.
This could cause the tires to
slip and may result in an accident.
Driving your vehicle
Transmission ranges
The indicator in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park).
To shift from P (Park), you must
depress firmly on the brake pedal
and make sure your foot is off the
accelerator pedal.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot shift the lever out of P
(Park), see "Shift-Lock Release" in
this section.
The shift lever must be in P (Park)
before turning the engine off.
5-20
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion may
cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
• After the vehicle has stopped,
always make sure the shift
lever is in P (Park), apply the
parking brake, and turn the
engine off.
• When parking on an incline,
place the shift lever in P (Park)
and apply the parking brake to
prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill.
• For safety, always engage the
parking brake with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position
except for the case of emergency parking.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transmission if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged.
Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart
a stalled engine.
Shift into P (Park) if you need to
leave your vehicle for any reason.
Always depress the brake pedal
when you are shifting from N
(Neutral) to another gear.
In Manual Shift mode, moving the
shift lever backwards and forwards
will allow you to select the desired
range of gears for the current driving
conditions.
+ (Up) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
- (Down) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
WARNING
Do not shift into gear unless
your foot is firmly on the brake
pedal. Shifting into gear when
the engine is running at high
speed can cause the vehicle to
move very rapidly. You could
lose control of the vehicle and
hit people or objects.
- ( D OW N )
OPDE056127
Manual shift mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, manual shift mode is
selected by pushing the shift lever
from the D (Drive) position into the
manual gate. To return to D (Drive)
range operation, push the shift lever
back into the main gate.
i Information
• Only the six forward gears can be
selected in Manual Shift mode. To
reverse or park the vehicle, move
the shift lever to the R (Reverse) or
P (Park) position as required.
• Downshifts are made automatically
when the vehicle slows down. When
the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected.
• When the engine rpm approaches
the red zone the transmission will
upshift automatically.
(Continued)
For more information, refer to
"Drive Mode Integrated Control
System" later in this chapter.
5-21
5
Driving your vehicle
D (Drive)
This is the normal driving position.
The transmission will automatically
shift through a six-gear sequence,
providing the best fuel economy and
power.
For extra power when passing another vehicle or driving uphill depress
the accelerator pedal further until
you feel the transmission downshift
to a lower gear.
The DRIVE MODE switch, located
on the shift lever console, allows the
driver to switch from NORMAL mode
to SPORT mode.
+ (UP)
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
• If the driver presses the lever to
+ (Up) or - (Down) position, the
transmission may not make the
requested gear change if the next
gear is outside of the allowable
engine rpm range. The driver must
execute upshifts in accordance with
road conditions, taking care to keep
the engine rpms below the red zone.
• When accelerating from a stop on a
slippery road, push the shift lever
forward into the + (Up) position.
This allows the transmission to shift
into the 2nd gear which is better for
smooth driving on a slippery road.
Push the shift lever to the - (Down)
side to shift back to the 1st gear.
• When driving in Manual Shift
Mode, slow down before shifting to
a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged if the
engine rpms are outside of the
allowable range.
5-22
Shift-lock system
For your safety, the automatic transmission has a shift-lock system
which prevents shifting the transmission from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transmission from P
(Park) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
Shift-lock release
OPDE056122
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position into R (Reverse)
position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, and then do the following:
1. Place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Carefully remove the cap (1) covering the shift-lock release access
hole.
4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screwdriver) into the access hole and
press down on the tool.
5. Move the shift lever.
6. Remove the tool from the shiftlock override access hole then
install the cap.
If you need to use the shift-lock
release, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.
Good Driving Practices
Always come to a complete stop and
continue to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, apply the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position. Take the Key
with you when exiting the vehicle.
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Do not move the shift lever to N
(Neutral) when driving. Doing so
may result in an accident because
of a loss of engine braking and the
transmission could be damaged.
• Do not drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
consistent pedal pressure can
result in the brakes overheating,
brake wear and possibly even
brake failure.
• Depressing both accelerator and
brake pedals at the same time can
trigger logic for engine power
reduction to assure vehicle deceleration. Vehicle acceleration will
resume after the brake pedal is
released.
WARNING
• When you stay in the vehicle
with the engine running, be
careful not to depress the
accelerator pedal for a long
period of time. The engine or
exhaust system may overheat
and start a fire.
• The exhaust gas and the
exhaust system are very hot.
Keep away from the exhaust
system components.
• Do not stop or park over flammable materials, such as dry
grass, paper or leaves. They
may ignite and cause a fire.
5-23
5
Driving your vehicle
Parking
Driving your vehicle
• Always apply the parking brake
when leaving the vehicle. Do not
depend on placing the transmission in P (Park) to keep the vehicle
from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
may cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator.
5-24
WARNING
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.
In a collision, an unbelted
occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• HYUNDAI recommends you
follow all posted speed limits.
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
Dual Clutch Transmission
Operation
Press the shift button, then move shift lever.
Depress the brake pedal, press the shift button, and then move shift lever.
Move shift lever.
OPDE056007
5-25
5
Driving your vehicle
The dual clutch transmission has
seven forward speeds and one
reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected
automatically when the shift lever is
in the D (Drive) position.
• The dual clutch transmission can
be thought of as an automatically
shifting manual transmission. It
gives the driving feel of a manual
transmission, yet provides the
ease of a fully automatic transmission.
• When D (Drive) is selected, the
transmission will automatically shift
through the gears similar to a conventional automatic transmission.
Unlike a traditional automatic
transmission, the gear shifting can
sometimes be felt and heard as the
actuators engage the clutches and
the gears are selected.
Driving your vehicle
• The dual clutch transmission incorporates a dry-type dual clutch
mechanism, which allows for better
acceleration performance and
increased fuel efficiency while driving. But it differs from a conventional automatic transmission
because it does not incorporate a
torque converter. Instead, the transition from one gear to the next is
managed by clutch slip, especially
at lower speeds. As a result, shifts
are sometimes more noticeable,
and a light vibration can be felt as
the transmission shaft speed is
matched with the engine shaft
speed. This is a normal condition of
the dual clutch transmission.
• The dry-type clutch transfers
torque more directly and provides
a direct-drive feeling which may
feel different from a conventional
automatic transmission. This may
be more noticeable when launching the vehicle from a stop or when
traveling at low, stop-and-go vehicle speeds.
5-26
• When rapidly accelerating from a
lower vehicle speed, the engine
rpm may increase dramatically as
a result of clutch slip as the dual
clutch transmission selects the correct gear. This is a normal condition.
• When accelerating from a stop on
an incline, press the accelerator
smoothly and gradually to avoid
any shudder feeling or jerkiness.
• When traveling at a lower vehicle
speed, if you release the accelerator pedal quickly, you may feel
engine braking before the transmission changes gears. This
engine braking feeling is similar to
operating a manual transmission at
low speed.
• When driving downhill, you may
wish to move the gear shift lever to
Manual Shift mode and downshift
to a lower gear in order to control
your speed without using the brake
pedal excessively.
• When you turn the engine on and
off, you may hear clicking sounds
as the system goes through a selftest. This is a normal sound for the
dual clutch transmission.
• During the first 1000 miles, you
may feel that the vehicle may not
be smooth when accelerating at
low speed. During this break-in
period, the shift quality and performance of your new vehicle is
continuously optimized.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death:
• ALWAYS check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for
people, especially children,
before shifting a vehicle into
D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, then set the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK/OFF position. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur
if these precautions are not
followed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use aggressive engine
braking (shifting from a higher gear to a lower gear) on
slippery roads. This could
cause the tires to slip and may
result in an accident.
DCT warning messages
• If the vehicle is held or creeping
forward on an incline by applying
the accelerator pedal, the clutch
and transmission may overheat
which can result in damage. At this
time, a warning message will
appear on the LCD display.
• If the LCD display warning is
active, the foot brake must be
applied.
• Ignoring the warnings can lead to
damage to the transmission.
NOTICE
OTLE055019
5
Steep grade
This warning message is displayed
when vehicle is driven slowly on a
grade and the vehicle detects that
the brake pedal is not applied.
Driving up hills or on steep grades:
• To hold the vehicle on an incline
use the foot brake or the parking
brake.
• When in stop-and-go traffic on an
incline, allow a gap to form ahead
of you before moving the vehicle
forward. Then hold the vehicle on
the incline with the foot brake.
Driving your vehicle
• Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive) or
R (Reverse).
• Do not put the shift lever in N
(Neutral) while driving.
5-27
Driving your vehicle
OTLE055022
Transmission high temperature
• Under certain conditions, such as
repeated stop-and-go launches on
steep grades, sudden take off or
acceleration, or other harsh driving
conditions, the transmission clutch
temperatures will increase excessively.
• When the clutch temperatures are
too high, the "Transmission temp is
high! Stop safely" warning message will appear on the LCD display, a chime will sound, and the
transmission shifting may not be
smooth.
5-28
• If this occurs, pull over to a safe
location, stop the vehicle with the
engine running, apply the brakes
and shift the vehicle to P (Park)
with engine on, and allow the
transmission to cool.
• If you ignore this warning, the driving condition may become worse.
You may experience abrupt shifts,
frequent shifts, or jerkiness.
• When the message "Trans cooled.
Resume driving" appears you can
continue to drive your vehicle.
• When possible, drive the vehicle
smoothly.
OPD047426N/OPD047427N
Transmission overheated
• If the vehicle continues to be driven and the clutch temperatures
reach the maximum temperature
limit, the "Trans Hot! Park with
engine on" warning will be displayed. When this occurs the clutch
is disabled until the clutch cools to
normal temperatures.
• The warning will display a time to
wait for the transmission to cool.
• If this occurs, pull over to a safe
location, stop the vehicle with the
engine running, apply the brakes
and shift the vehicle to P (Park)
with engine on for a certain time,
and allow the transmission to cool.
• When the message "Trans cooled.
Resume driving" appears you can
continue to drive your vehicle.
• When possible, drive the vehicle
smoothly.
If any of the warning messages in
the LCD display continue to blink, for
your safety, contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked.
Transmission ranges
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park).
To shift from P (Park), you must
depress firmly on the brake pedal
and make sure your foot is off the
accelerator pedal.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot shift the lever out of P
(Park), see "Shift-Lock Release" in
this chapter.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
WARNING
NOTICE
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion may
cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
• After the vehicle has stopped,
always make sure the shift
lever is in P (Park), apply the
parking brake, and turn the
engine off.
• When parking on an incline,
place the shift lever in P (Park)
and apply the parking brake to
prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill.
• For safety, always engage the
parking brake with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position
except for the case of emergency parking.
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transmission if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged.
Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart
a stalled engine, or if it is necessary
to stop with the engine ON.
Shift into P (Park) if you need to
leave your vehicle for any reason.
Always depress the brake pedal
when you are shifting from N
(Neutral) to another gear.
5-29
5
Driving your vehicle
The indicator in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position
The shift lever must be in P (Park)
before turning the engine off.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
Do not shift into gear unless
your foot is firmly on the brake
pedal. Shifting into gear when
the engine is running at high
speed can cause the vehicle to
move very rapidly. You could
lose control of the vehicle and
hit people or objects.
The DRIVE MODE switch, located
on the shift lever console, allows the
driver to switch from NORMAL mode
to SPORT mode.
For more information, refer to
"Drive Mode Integrated Control
System" later in this chapter.
OPDE056127
D (Drive)
This is the normal driving position.
The transmission will automatically
shift
through
a
seven-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing another vehicle or driving uphill depress
the accelerator pedal further until
you feel the transmission downshift
to a lower gear.
5-30
Manual shift mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, manual shift mode is
selected by pushing the shift lever
from the D (Drive) position into the
manual gate. To return to D (Drive)
range operation, push the shift lever
back into the main gate.
In Manual Shift mode, moving the
shift lever backwards and forwards
will allow you to select the desired
range of gears for the current driving
conditions.
+ (Up) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
- (Down) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
i Information
OPD056015
The paddle shifter is functional when
the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position or the manual shift mode.
With the shift lever in the D position
The paddle shifter will operate when
the vehicle speed is more than
6 mph (10 km/h).
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear and the
system changes from automatic
mode to manual mode.
When the vehicle speed is lower
than 6 mph (10 km/h), if you depress
the accelerator pedal for more than 5
seconds or if you move the shift lever
from Manual Shift mode to D (Drive),
the system changes from manual
mode to automatic mode.
With the shift lever in the manual
shift mode
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear.
i Information
If the [+] and [-] paddle shifters are
pulled at the same time, gear change
may not occur.
5-31
5
Driving your vehicle
• Only the seven forward gears can be
selected in Manual Shift Mode. To
reverse or park the vehicle, move
the shift lever to the R (Reverse) or
P (Park) position as required.
• Downshifts are made automatically
when the vehicle slows down. When
the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected.
• When the engine rpm approaches
the red zone the transmission will
upshift automatically.
• If the driver presses the lever to
+ (Up) or - (Down) position, the
transmission may not make the
requested gear change if the next
gear is outside of the allowable
engine rpm range. The driver must
execute upshifts in accordance with
road conditions, taking care to keep
the engine rpms below the red zone.
Paddle shifter (if equipped)
Driving your vehicle
Shift-lock system
For your safety, the automatic transmission has a shift-lock system
which prevents shifting the transmission from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transmission from P
(Park) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
Shift-lock release
5. Move the shift lever.
6. Remove the tool from the shiftlock override access hole then
install the cap.
If you need to use the shift-lock
release, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
immediately.
Parking
OPDE056122
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position into R (Reverse)
position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, and then do the following:
1. Place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Carefully remove the cap (1) covering the shift-lock release access
hole.
4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screwdriver) into the access hole and
press down on the tool.
5-32
Always come to a complete stop and
continue to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, apply the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position. Take the key
with you when exiting the vehicle.
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to D
(Drive). Depress the accelerator
pedal gradually while releasing the
brake pedal.
WARNING
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Do not move the shift lever to N
(Neutral) when driving. Doing so
may result in an accident because
of a loss of engine braking and the
transmission could be damaged.
• Do not drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
consistent pedal pressure can
result in the brakes overheating,
brake wear and possibly even
brake failure.
• Depressing both accelerator and
brake pedals at the same time can
trigger logic for engine power
reduction to assure vehicle deceleration. Vehicle acceleration will
resume after the brake pedal is
released.
• When driving in Manual Shift
mode, slow down before shifting to
a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged if the
engine rpms are outside of the
allowable range.
• Always apply the parking brake
when leaving the vehicle. Do not
depend on placing the transmission in P (Park) to keep the vehicle
from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
may cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator.
5-33
5
Driving your vehicle
When you stay in the vehicle
with the engine running, be
careful not to depress the accelerator pedal for a long period of
time. The engine or exhaust
system may overheat and start
a fire.
The exhaust gas and the
exhaust system are very hot.
Keep away from the exhaust
system components.
Do not stop or park over flammable materials, such as dry
grass, paper or leaves. They
may ignite and cause a fire.
Good Driving Practices
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.
In a collision, an unbelted
occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
(Continued)
5-34
(Continued)
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• HYUNDAI recommends you
follow all posted speed limits.
BRAKING SYSTEM
Power Brakes
WARNING
Take the following precautions:
• Do not drive with your foot
resting on the brake pedal.
This will create abnormal high
brake temperatures, excessive brake lining and pad
wear, and increased stopping
distances.
• When descending down a
long or steep hill, move the
gear shift lever to Manual
Shift Mode and manually
downshift to a lower gear in
order to control your speed
without using the brake pedal
excessively. Applying the
brakes continuously will
cause the brakes to overheat
and could result in a temporary loss of braking performance.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Wet brakes may impair the
vehicle's ability to safely slow
down; the vehicle may also
pull to one side when the
brakes are applied. Applying
the brakes lightly will indicate
whether they have been
affected in this way. Always
test your brakes in this fashion after driving through deep
water. To dry the brakes, lightly tap the brake pedal to heat
up the brakes while maintaining a safe forward speed until
brake performance returns to
normal. Avoid driving at high
speeds until the brakes function correctly.
5-35
5
Driving your vehicle
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power
assist for the brakes will not work.
You can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than typical. The stopping distance, however, will be longer than
with power brakes.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.
Driving your vehicle
Disc Brakes Wear Indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high pitched warning sound from
your front or rear brakes. You may
hear this sound come and go or it
may occur whenever you depress
the brake pedal.
Note that some driving conditions or
climates may cause a brake squeal
when you first apply (or lightly apply)
the brakes. This is normal and does
not indicate a problem with your
brakes.
NOTICE
To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
i Information
Always replace brake pads as complete front or rear axle sets.
5-36
Parking Brake
(hand type, if equipped)
OPD056017
OPD056016
Always set the parking brake before
leaving the vehicle. To apply the
parking brake:
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Pull up the parking brake lever as far
as possible.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, do not operate the parking brake while the
vehicle is moving except in an
emergency situation. It could
damage the brake system and
lead to an accident.
To release:
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
While pressing the release button
(1), slightly pull up on the parking
brake lever then lower the parking
brake lever (2).
If the parking brake does not release
or does not release all the way, have
your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
• Whenever leaving the vehicle
• Do not apply the accelerator
pedal while the parking brake is
engaged. If you depress the
accelerator pedal with the parking brake engaged, warning will
sound. Damage to the parking
brake may occur.
• Driving with the parking brake
on can overheat the braking system and cause premature wear
or damage to brake parts. Make
sure the parking brake is
released and the Brake Warning
Light is off before driving.
Check the Parking
Brake Warning Light
by placing the ignition
switch to the ON position (do not start the
engine).
This light will be illuminated when the
parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is released and the Brake
Warning Light is OFF.
If the Parking Brake Warning Light
remains on after the parking brake is
released while engine is running,
there may be a malfunction in the
brake system. Immediate attention is
necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately. If that is not possible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location.
5-37
5
Driving your vehicle
or parking, always come to a
complete stop and continue to
depress the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever into P (Park)
position, then apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF
position.
Vehicles with the parking
brake not fully engaged are at
risk for moving inadvertently
and causing injury to yourself
or others.
• When parking on an incline,
block the wheels to prevent
the vehicle from rolling down.
• NEVER allow anyone who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released
unintentionally, serious injury
may occur.
• Only release the parking
brake when you are seated
inside the vehicle with your
foot firmly on the brake pedal.
NOTICE
Driving your vehicle
Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)
(if equipped)
Applying the parking brake
WARNING
Releasing the parking brake
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, do not operate the EPB while the vehicle is
moving except in an emergency
situation. It could damage the
brake system and lead to an
accident.
OPD056019
OPD056018
To apply the EPB
(Electronic Parking Brake):
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Pull up the EPB switch.
Make sure the Parking Brake
Warning Light comes on.
5-38
To release the EPB (Electronic
Parking Brake), press the EPB
switch in the following condition:
• Place the Engine Start/Stop button
in the ON position.
• Depress the brake pedal.
Make sure the Parking Brake
Warning Light goes off.
• Automatic transmission/Dual clutch
transmission vehicle
1. Ensure seat belts are fastened
and the doors, hood and liftgate
are closed.
2. With the engine running, depress
the brake pedal and shift out of P
(Park) to R (Reverse) or D
(Drive).
3. Depress the accelerator pedal.
Make sure the Parking Brake
Warning light goes off.
i Information
• For your safety, you can engage the
EPB even though the Engine Stop/
Start button is in the OFF position,
but you cannot release it.
• For your safety, depress the brake
pedal and release the parking brake
manually with the EPB switch when
you drive downhill or when backing
up the vehicle.
i Information - Manual transmission
A vehicle towing a trailer on a hill or
on an incline may slightly roll backwards when starting the vehicle. To
prevent the situation follow the below
instructions.
1. Depress the clutch pedal and select
a gear.
2. Keep pulling up the EPB switch.
3. Depress the accelerator pedal and
slowly release the clutch pedal.
4. If the vehicle starts off with enough
driving power release the EPB
switch.
Do not follow the above procedure
when driving on a flat level ground.
The vehicle may suddenly move forward.
5-39
5
Driving your vehicle
To release EPB (Electronic Parking
Brake) automatically:
• Shift lever in P (Park)
With the engine running depress
the brake pedal and shift out of P
(Park) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Shift lever in N (Neutral)
With the engine running depress
the brake pedal and shift out of N
(Neutral) to R (Reverse) or D
(Drive).
• Manual transmission vehicle
1. Ensure seat belts are fastened
and the doors, hood and liftgate
are closed.
2. With the engine running, depress
the clutch pedal and move the
shift lever to 1 (First) gear or R
(Reverse).
3. Depress the accelerator pedal
while releasing the clutch pedal.
Driving your vehicle
NOTICE
Warning messages
WARNING
• If the parking brake warning
light is still on even though the
EPB has been released, have the
system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not drive your vehicle with
the EPB applied. It may cause
excessive brake pad and brake
rotor wear.
EPB (Electronic Parking Brake)
may be automatically applied
when:
• Requested by other systems
• If the driver turns the engine off
while Auto Hold is operating, EPB
will be automatically applied.
5-40
• Whenever leaving the vehicle
OPDE056130
To release EPB, fasten seatbelt,
close door, hood and tailgate
• If you try to drive with the EPB
applied, a warning will sound and a
message will appear.
• If the driver's seat belt is unfastened and the engine hood or liftgate is opened, a warning will
sound and a message will appear.
• If there is a problem with the vehicle, a warning may sound and a
message may appear.
If the situation occurs, depress the
brake pedal and release EPB by
pressing the EPB switch.
or parking, always come to a
complete stop and continue
to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into the P
(Park) position, press the EPB
switch, and press the Engine
Start/Stop button to the OFF
position. Take the Smart Key
with you when exiting the
vehicle.
Vehicles not fully engaged in
P (Park) with the parking
brake set are at risk for moving inadvertently and causing
injury to yourself or others.
• NEVER allow anyone who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the EPB switch. If the
EPB is released unintentionally, serious injury may occur.
• Only release the EPB when
you are seated inside the
vehicle with your foot firmly
on the brake pedal.
NOTICE
i Information
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
OTLE055028/OLFH044408L
OLF054131N/OLF044411N
AUTO HOLD deactivating.
Press brake pedal
When the conversion from Auto Hold
to EPB is not working properly a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
Parking brake automatically locked
If the EPB is applied while Auto Hold
is activated, a warning will sound and
a message will appear.
• A clicking sound may be heard
while operating or releasing the
EPB. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the EPB is functioning properly.
• When leaving your keys with a
parking attendant or assistant,
make sure to inform him/her how to
operate the EPB.
5-41
5
Driving your vehicle
• Do not apply the accelerator
pedal while the parking brake is
engaged. If you depress the
accelerator pedal with the EPB
engaged, a warning will sound
and a message will appear.
Damage to the parking brake
may occur.
• Driving with the parking brake
on can overheat the braking system and cause premature wear
or damage to brake parts. Make
sure the EPB is released and the
Parking Brake Warning Light is
off before driving.
■ Type A
Driving your vehicle
EPB malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
■ Type A
■ Type B
The EPB malfunction indicator may
illuminate when the ESC indicator
comes on to indicate that the ESC is
not working properly, but it does not
indicate a malfunction of the EPB.
NOTICE
OPD056021/OPD056074
This warning light illuminates if the
Engine Start/Stop button is changed
to the ON position and goes off in
approximately 3 seconds if the system is operating normally.
If the EPB malfunction indicator
remains on, comes on while driving,
or does not come on when the
Engine Start/Stop button is changed
to the ON position, this indicates that
the EPB may have malfunctioned.
If this occurs, have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
5-42
• If the EPB warning light is still
on, have the system checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the parking brake warning
light does not illuminate or
blinks even though the EPB
switch was pulled up, the EPB
may not be applied.
• If the parking brake warning
light blinks when the EPB warning light is on, press the switch,
and then pull it up. Repeat this
one more time. If the EPB warning does not go off, have the
system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Emergency braking
If there is a problem with the brake
pedal while driving, emergency braking is possible by pulling up and
holding the EPB switch. Braking is
possible only while you are holding
the EPB switch. However, braking
distance will be longer than normal.
WARNING
Do not operate the parking
brake while the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation. It could damage the
brake system and lead to a
severe accident.
i Information
During emergency braking, the parking brake warning light will illuminate to indicate that the system is
operating.
NOTICE
Auto Hold
If you continuously notice a noise
or burning smell when the EPB is
used for emergency braking, have
system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
The Auto Hold maintains the vehicle
in a standstill even though the brake
pedal is not depressed after the driver brings the vehicle to a complete
stop by depressing the brake pedal.
When the EPB (Electronic Parking
Brake) does not release
If the EPB does not release normally, we recommend that you contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer by
loading the vehicle on a flatbed tow
truck and have the system checked.
To apply :
White
Green
White
OPD056023
5-43
5
Driving your vehicle
OPD056022
1. With the driver's door, engine
hood and liftgate closed, fasten
the driver's seat belt or depress
the brake pedal and then press
the [AUTO HOLD] switch. The
white AUTO HOLD indicator will
come on and the system will be in
the standby position.
2. When you stop the vehicle completely by depressing the brake
pedal, the Auto Hold maintains the
brake pressure to hold the vehicle
stationary. The indicator changes
from white to green.
3. The vehicle will remain stationary
even if you release the brake
pedal.
4. If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be
released.
Driving your vehicle
To release :
To cancel :
• If you press the accelerator pedal
with the shift lever in D (Drive), R
(Reverse) or manual shift mode,
the Auto Hold will be released
automatically and the vehicle will
start to move. The AUTO HOLD
indicator changes from green to
white.
• If the vehicle is restarted using the
cruise control toggle switch (RES+
or SET-) while Auto Hold and cruise
control is operating, the Auto Hold
will be released regardless of
accelerator pedal operation. The
AUTO HOLD indicator changes
from green to white. (if equipped
with cruise control system)
WARNING
When the AUTO HOLD is automatically released by depressing the accelerator pedal, always
take a look around your vehicle.
Slowly depress the accelerator
pedal for a smooth start.
5-44
WARNING
To prevent, unexpected and sudden vehicle movement, ALWAYS
press your foot on the brake
pedal to cancel the Auto Hold
before you:
- Drive downhill.
- Drive the vehicle in R (Reverse).
- Park the vehicle.
Light off
OPD056024
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the [AUTO HOLD] switch.
The AUTO HOLD indicator will turn
off.
i Information
NOTICE
If the AUTO HOLD indicator
changes to yellow, the Auto Hold
is not working properly. Contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
• Depress the accelerator pedal
slowly when you start the
vehicle.
• For your safety, cancel the
Auto Hold when you drive
downhill, back up the vehicle
or park the vehicle.
NOTICE
If there is a malfunction with the
driver's door or engine hood open
detection system, the Auto Hold
may not work properly.
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
5-45
5
Driving your vehicle
• The Auto Hold does not operate
when:
- The driver's seat belt is unfastened
and driver's door is opened
- The engine hood is opened
- The shift lever is in P (Park) or R
(Reverse)
- The EPB is applied
• For your safety, the Auto Hold automatically switches to EPB when:
- The driver's seat belt is unfastened
and driver's door is opened
- The engine hood is opened with the
shift lever is in D (Drive)
- The vehicle stops for more than 10
minutes
- The vehicle stands on a steep slope
- The vehicle moves several times
(Continued)
(Continued)
In these cases, the parking brake
warning light comes on, the AUTO
HOLD indicator changes from
green to white, and a warning sound
and a message will appear to inform
you that EPB has been automatically engaged. Before driving off again,
press foot brake pedal, check the
surrounding area near your vehicle
and release parking brake manually
with the EPB switch.
• While operating Auto Hold, you may
hear mechanical noise. However, it is
normal operating noise.
Driving your vehicle
Warning messages
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type B
OLF054131N/OLF044411N
Parking brake automatically locked
When the EPB is applied from Auto
Hold, a warning will sound and a
message will appear.
5-46
■ Type A
OTLE055028/OLFH044408L
OLF054127N/OLF044407N
AUTO HOLD deactivating.
Press brake pedal
When the conversion from Auto Hold
to EPB is not working properly a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
When this message is displayed, the
Auto Hold and EPB may not operate.
For your safety, depress the brake
pedal.
Press brake pedal to deactivate
AUTO HOLD
If you did not apply the brake pedal
when you release the Auto Hold by
pressing the [AUTO HOLD] switch, a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
WARNING
OPDE056108
ABS is an electronic braking system
that helps prevent a braking skid.
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time.
5-47
5
Driving your vehicle
AUTO HOLD conditions not met.
Close door and hood, then fasten
seatbelt
When you press the [AUTO HOLD]
switch, if the driver's door and engine
hood are not closed or the driver's
seat belt is unfastened, a warning
will sound and a message will
appear on the LCD display. At this
moment, press the [AUTO HOLD]
button after closing the driver's door
and engine hood, and fastening the
seat belt.
An Anti-Lock Braking System
(ABS) or an Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system will not
prevent accidents due to
improper or dangerous driving
maneuvers. Even though vehicle control is improved during
emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance
between you and objects ahead
of you. Vehicle speeds should
always be reduced during
extreme road conditions. The
braking distance for cars
equipped with ABS or ESC may
be longer than for those without
these systems in the following
road conditions.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Drive your vehicle at reduced
speeds during the following
conditions:
• Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.
• On roads where the road surface is pitted or has different
surface height.
• Tire chains are installed on
your vehicle.
The safety features of an ABS
or ESC equipped vehicle should
not be tested by high speed
driving or cornering. This could
endanger the safety of yourself
or others.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
If the ABS warning light (
) is
on and stays on, you may have
a problem with the ABS. Your
power brakes will work normally. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death, contact your
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
CAUTION
When you drive on a road having poor traction, such as an icy
road, and apply your brakes
continuously, the ABS will be
active continuously and the
ABS warning light (
) may
illuminate. Pull your car over to
a safe place and turn the engine
off.
Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a
problem with your ABS system.
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
i Information
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the ABS
warning light (
) may turn on at the
same time. This happens because of
the low battery voltage. It does not
mean your ABS is malfunctioning.
Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
5-48
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)
OPD056028
The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system helps to stabilize the
vehicle during cornering maneuvers.
ESC checks where you are steering
and where the vehicle is actually
going. ESC applies braking pressure
to any one of the vehicle's brakes
and intervenes in the engine management system to assist the driver
with keeping the vehicle on the
intended path. It is not a substitute
for safe driving practices. Always
adjust your speed and driving to the
road conditions.
WARNING
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when
cornering. The ESC system will
not prevent accidents.
Excessive speed in turns, abrupt
maneuvers, and hydroplaning
on wet surfaces can result in
severe accidents.
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
ESC OFF condition
To cancel ESC operation :
• State 1
Press the ESC OFF button briefly.
The ESC OFF indicator light and
message "Traction Control disabled“
will illuminate. In this state, the traction
control function of ESC (engine management) is disabled, but the brake
control function of ESC (braking
management) still operates.
5
Driving your vehicle
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the ESC and the ESC OFF
indicator lights illuminate for approximately three seconds. After both
lights go off, the ESC is enabled.
When operating
When the ESC is in operation, the ESC indicator light
blinks:
• When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear sounds from
the brakes, or feel a corresponding
sensation in the brake pedal. This
is normal and it means your ESC is
active.
• When the ESC activates, the
engine may not respond to the
accelerator as it does under routine conditions.
• If the Cruise Control was in use
when the ESC activates, the
Cruise Control automatically disengages. The Cruise Control can be
reengaged when the road conditions allow. See "Cruise Control
System" later in this chapter. (if
equipped)
• When moving out of the mud or
driving on a slippery road, the
engine RPM (revolutions per
minute) may not increase even if
you press the accelerator pedal
deeply. This is to maintain the stability and traction of the vehicle and
does not indicate a problem.
5-49
Driving your vehicle
• State 2
Press and hold the ESC OFF button
continuously for more than 3 seconds. The ESC OFF indicator light
and message "Traction & Stability
Control disabled" illuminates and a
warning chime sounds. In this state,
both the traction control function of
ESC (engine management) and the
brake control function of ESC (braking management) are disabled.
If the ignition switch is placed to the
LOCK/OFF position when ESC is off,
ESC remains off. Upon restarting the
engine, the ESC will automatically turn
on again.
5-50
Indicator lights
■ ESC indicator light (blinks)
■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)
When the ignition switch is placed to
the ON position, the ESC indicator
light illuminates, then goes off if the
ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever the ESC is operating.
If ESC indicator light stays on, your
vehicle may have a malfunction with
the ESC system. When this warning
light illuminates have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off.
WARNING
When the ESC is blinking, this
indicates the ESC is active:
Drive slowly and NEVER attempt
to accelerate. NEVER turn the
ESC off while the ESC indicator
light is blinking or you may lose
control of the vehicle resulting in
an accident.
NOTICE
Driving with wheels and tires with
different sizes may cause the ESC
system to malfunction. Before
replacing tires, make sure all four
tires and wheels are the same
size. Never drive the vehicle with
different sized wheels and tires
installed.
ESC OFF usage
When Driving
The ESC OFF mode should only be
used briefly to help free the vehicle if
stuck in snow or mud by temporarily
stopping operation of the ESC to
maintain wheel torque.
To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving on
a flat road surface.
NOTICE
i Information
Turning the ESC off does not affect
ABS or standard brake system operation.
The Vehicle Stability Management
(VSM) is a function of the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system. It
helps ensure the vehicle stays stable
when accelerating or braking suddenly on wet, slippery and rough
roads where traction over the four
tires can suddenly become uneven.
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when using the Vehicle Stability
Management (VSM):
• ALWAYS check the speed and
the distance to the vehicle
ahead. The VSM is not a substitute for safe driving practices.
• Never drive too fast for the
road conditions. The VSM system will not prevent accidents. Excessive speed in bad
weather, slippery and uneven
roads can result in severe
accidents.
5-51
5
Driving your vehicle
To prevent damage to the transmission:
• Do not allow wheel(s) of one
axle to spin excessively while
the ESC, ABS, and parking brake
warning lights are displayed.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Reduce engine power and do
not spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights are displayed.
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, make sure the
ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light
illuminated).
Vehicle Stability Management
(VSM)
Driving your vehicle
VSM operation
VSM ON condition
The VSM operates when:
• The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately
above 9 mph (15 km/h) on curve
roads.
• Vehicle speed is approximately
above 12 mph (20 km/h) when the
vehicle is braking on rough roads.
When operating
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may activate the
ESC, you may hear sounds from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your VSM is active.
5-52
NOTICE
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on a banked road such
as gradient or incline.
• Driving rearward.
• ESC OFF indicator light is on.
• EPS (Electric Power Steering)
warning light ( ) is on or
blinks.
WARNING
If ESC indicator light ( ) or
EPS warning light ( ) stays on
or blinks, your vehicle may have
a malfunction with the VSM system. When the warning light illuminates, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
Driving with wheels and tires with different sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction. Before replacing
tires, make sure all four tires and
wheels are the same size. Never
drive the vehicle with different sized
tires and wheels installed.
Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)
The Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)
helps prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards when starting a vehicle
from a stop on a hill. The system
operates the brakes automatically for
approximately 2 seconds and releases the brake after 2 seconds or when
the accelerator pedal is depressed.
WARNING
NOTICE
• The HAC does not operate when
the shift lever is in P (Park) or N
(Neutral)
• The HAC activates even though
the ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is off but does not activate when the ESC has malfunctioned.
WARNING
Whenever leaving the vehicle or
parking, always come to a complete stop and continue to
depress the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever into the 1st gear
(for manual transmission vehicle) or P (Park, for automatic
transmission vehicle) position,
then apply the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch in
the LOCK/OFF position.
Vehicles parked with the parking brake not applied or not
fully engaged may roll inadvertently and may cause injury to
the driver and others. ALWAYS
apply the parking brake before
exiting the vehicle.
Wet brakes can be dangerous! The
brakes may get wet if the vehicle is
driven through standing water or if it
is washed. Your vehicle will not stop
as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet
brakes may cause the vehicle to pull
to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns
to normal, taking care to keep the
vehicle under control at all times. If
the braking action does not return to
normal, stop as soon as it is safe to
do so and call an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
DO NOT drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
constant pedal pressure can result in
the brakes overheating, brake wear,
and possibly even brake failure.
If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe location.
Keep your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when the vehicle is stopped to
prevent the vehicle from rolling forward.
5-53
5
Driving your vehicle
Always be ready to depress the
accelerator pedal when starting
off on a incline.The HAC activates
only for approximately 2 seconds.
Good Braking Practices
Driving your vehicle
DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The mode changes, as below, whenever the DRIVE MODE button is
pressed.
NORMAL
SPORT
NORMAL mode
OPDE056035
The drive mode may be selected
according to the driver's preference
or road condition.
The system resets to be in the NORMAL mode, when the engine is
restarted.
i Information
If there is a problem with the instrument cluster, the drive mode will be in
NORMAL mode and may not change
to SPORT mode.
In NORMAL mode the engine and
transmission control logic work
together to provide regular daily driving performance with some fuel efficiency.
• When NORMAL mode is selected,
it is not displayed on the instrument
cluster.
SPORT mode
SPORT mode manages
the driving dynamics by
automatically adjusting the
steering effort, and the
engine and transmission control
logic for enhanced driving performance.
• When SPORT mode is selected by
pressing the DRIVE MODE button,
the SPORT indicator will illuminate.
• Whenever the engine is restarted,
the Drive Mode will revert back to
NORMAL mode. If SPORT mode is
desired, re-select SPORT mode
from the DRIVE MODE button.
• When SPORT mode is activated:
- The engine rpm will tend to
remain raised over a certain
length of time even after releasing the accelerator
- Upshifts are delayed when accelerating
i Information
In SPORT mode, the fuel efficiency
may decrease.
5-54
BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)
Blind spot area
Closing at high speed
The Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) uses radar sensors in the rear
bumper to monitor and warn the driver of an approaching vehicle in the
driver's blind spot area.
The system monitors the rear area of
the vehicle and provides information
to the driver with an audible alert and
an indicator on the outer side view
mirrors.
WARNING
• Always be aware of road conditions while driving and be
alert for unexpected situations
even though the Blind Spot
Detection System is operating.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is not a substitute for proper and safe driving. Always drive safely and
use caution when changing
lanes or backing up the vehicle. The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) may not detect
every object alongside the
vehicle.
5-55
5
Driving your vehicle
OAE056106
(1) BSD (Blind Spot Detection)
The blind spot detection range
varies relative to vehicle speed.
Note that if your vehicle is traveling much faster than the vehicles
around you, the warning will not
occur.
(2) LCA (Lane Change Assist)
The Lane Change Assist feature
will alert you when a vehicle is
approaching in an adjacent lane
at a high rate of speed. If the driver activates the turn signal when
the system detects an oncoming
vehicle, the system sounds an
audible alert.
(3) RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert feature monitors approaching cross
traffic from the left and right side
of the vehicle when your vehicle is
in reverse. The feature will operate
when the vehicle is moving in
reverse below about 6 mph (10
km/h). If oncoming cross traffic is
detected a warning chime will
sound. The time of alert varies
according to the speed difference
between you and the approaching
vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist)
Operating conditions
To cancel:
Press the BSD switch again. The
indicator on the switch will go off.
When the system is not used, turn
the system off by turning off the
switch.
■ Left side
■ Right side
i Information
OPD056041
To operate:
Press the BSD switch with the ignition switch in the ON position.
The indicator on the BSD switch will
illuminate.
5-56
• If the ignition switch is turned OFF
and then ON again, the BSD system
returns to the previous state.
• When the system is turned on, the
warning light will illuminate for 3
seconds on the outer side view mirror.
The system will activate when:
1. The system is on.
2. The vehicle speed is above
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
3. An oncoming vehicle is detected
in the blind spot area.
OPD056042
First stage alert
If a vehicle is detected within the
boundary of the system, a warning
light will illuminate on the outer side
view mirror.
Once the detected vehicle is no
longer within the blind spot area, the
warning will turn off depending on
the driving conditions of the vehicle.
■ Left side
• The second stage alarm may be
deactivated.
- To deactivate the warning chime:
Go to the 'User Settings → Sound
and deselect Blind Spot Detection
Sound' on the LCD display.
- To activate the warning chime:
Go to the 'User Settings → Sound
and select Blind Spot Detection
Sound' on the LCD display.
■ Right side
OPD056043
OPD056044
i Information
The warning chime function helps
alert the driver. Deactivate this function only when it is necessary.
5-57
5
Driving your vehicle
Second stage alert
A warning chime to alert the driver will activate when:
1. A vehicle has been detected in the blind spot area by the radar system
(the warning light will illuminate on the outer side view mirror) AND
2. The turn signal is applied (same side as where the vehicle is being
detected).
When this alert is activated, the warning light on the side view mirror will
also blink.
If you turn off the turn signal indicator, the warning chime will be deactivated.
Driving your vehicle
Detecting sensor
Warning message
OPD057045L
OAE056040L
The sensors are located inside the
rear bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper clean
for the proper operation of the system.
Blind Spot Detection disabled.
Radar blocked
• This warning message may appear
when :
- One or both of the sensors on the
rear bumper is blocked by dirt or
snow or a foreign object.
- Driving in rural areas where the
BSD sensor does not detect
another vehicle for an extended
period of time.
- When there is inclement weather
such as heavy snow or rain.
5-58
- A trailer or carrier is installed. To
use the BSD system, remove the
trailer or carrier from your vehicle.
If any of these conditions occur, the
light on the BSD switch and the system will turn off automatically.
When the BSD cancelled warning
message is displayed in the cluster,
check to make sure that the rear
bumper is free from any dirt or snow
in the areas where the sensor is
located. Remove any dirt, snow, or
foreign material that could interfere
with the radar sensors.
After any dirt or debris is removed,
the BSD system should operate normally after about 10 minutes of driving the vehicle.
If the system still does not operate
normally have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i Information
Turn off the system by pressing the
BSD switch and deselecting Rear
Cross Traffic Alert from the User
Settings mode on the cluster, when
using a trailer or carrier behind your
vehicle.
■ Type A
■ Type B
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert feature
monitors approaching cross traffic
from the left and right side of the vehicle when your vehicle is in reverse.
Warning type
■ Left
■ Right
Operating conditions
OAD055091L/OTLE055040
OPDE056046/OPDE056047
If the vehicle detected by the sensors
approaches your vehicle, the warning chime will sound, the warning
light on the outer side view mirror will
blink and a message will appear on
the LCD display.
i Information
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
detecting range is approximately 1 - 65
ft (0.5 – 20 m). An approaching vehicle
will be detected if their vehicle speed is
within 2.5 - 22.5 mph (4 - 36 km/h).
Note that the detecting range may vary
under certain conditions. As always,
use caution and pay close attention to
your surroundings when backing up
your vehicle.
i Information
• The warning chime will turn off
when:
- The detected vehicle moves out of
the sensing area or
- when the vehicle is right behind
your vehicle or
(Continued)
5-59
5
Driving your vehicle
Check BSD system
If there is a problem with the BSD
system, a warning message will
appear and the light on the switch will
turn off. The system will turn off automatically. Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
To operate:
Go to the 'User Settings → Driving
Assist and select Rear Cross Traffic
Alert' on the LCD display. (For more
information, refer to "LCD
Display" in chapter 3.).
The system will turn on and standby
to activate. The system will activate
when vehicle speed is below 6 mph
(10 km/h) and with the shift lever in R
(Reverse).
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
- when the vehicle is not approaching your vehicle or
- when the other vehicle slows down.
• The system may not operate properly due to other factors or circumstances. Always pay attention to
your surroundings.
• If the sensing area near the rear
bumper is blocked by either a wall
or barrier or by a parked vehicle,
the system sensing area may be
reduced.
WARNING
• The warning light on the outer
side view mirror will illuminate whenever a vehicle is
detected at the rear side by
the system.
To avoid accidents, do not
focus only on the warning
light and neglect to see the
surrounding of the vehicle.
(Continued)
5-60
(Continued)
• Drive safely even though the
vehicle is equipped with a
Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert (RCTA). Do not solely
rely on the system but check
your surrounding before
changing lanes or backing the
vehicle up.
The system may not alert the
driver in some conditions so
always check your surroundings while driving.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA) are not a
substitute for proper and safe
driving practices. Always
drive safely and use caution
when changing lanes or backing up your vehicle. The Blind
Spot Detection System (BSD)
may not detect every object
alongside the vehicle.
NOTICE
• The system may not work properly when the bumper has been
damaged, or if the rear bumper
has been replaced or repaired.
• The sensing range differs somewhat according to the width of
the road. When the road is narrow, the system may detect
other vehicles in the next lane
OR when the road is wide, the
system may not detect other
vehicles in the next lane.
• The system may turn off due to
strong electromagnetic waves.
Non-operating condition
The BSD indicator on the outer side
view mirror may not illuminate
properly when:
- The outer side view mirror housing
is damaged.
- The mirror is covered with dirt,
snow, or debris.
- The window is covered with dirt,
snow, or debris.
- The window is tinted.
Limitations of the System
• If there are small objects in the
detecting area such as a shopping
cart or a baby stroller.
• If there is a low height vehicle such
as a sports car.
• When other vehicles are close to
your vehicle.
• When the vehicle in the next lane
moves two lanes away from you
OR when the vehicle two lanes
away moves to the next lane to you.
• When driving through a narrow
road with many trees or bushes.
• When driving through a large area
with few vehicles or structures
around, such as a desert, rural
area, etc.
• When driving on wet surfaces.
i Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
5-61
5
Driving your vehicle
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations, because the system may not detect other vehicles or
objects in certain circumstances.
• The vehicle drives on a curved road
or through a tollgate.
• The vehicle is turning left or right at
a crossroads.
• The sensor is polluted with rain,
snow, mud, etc.
• The rear bumper where the sensor
is located is covered with a foreign
object such as a bumper sticker, a
bumper guard, a bike rack, etc.
• The rear bumper is damaged, or
the sensor is out of the original
default position.
• The vehicle height gets lower or
higher due to heavy loading in the
luggage compartment, abnormal
tire pressure, etc.
• The vehicle drives in inclement
weather such as heavy rain or
snow.
• There is a fixed object near the
vehicle, such as a guardrail, person, animal, etc.
• The vehicle is driven near areas
containing metal substances such
as a construction zone, railroad,
etc.
• A big vehicle is near such as a bus
or truck.
• A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
• A flat trailer is near.
• If the vehicle has started at the
same time as the vehicle next to
you and has accelerated.
• When the other vehicle passes at a
very fast speed.
• While changing lanes.
• While going down or up a steep
road where the height of the lane is
different.
• When the other vehicle approaches
very close.
• When a trailer or carrier is installed.
• When the temperature near the
rear bumper area is high or low.
• When the sensors are blocked by
other vehicles, walls or parking-lot
pillars.
• When the detected vehicle also
moves back, as your vehicle drives
back.
Driving your vehicle
AUTOMATIC (AUTONOMOUS) EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) (IF EQUIPPED)
The Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) system is designed to help
detect and monitor the vehicle ahead
or detect a pedestrian (if equipped)
in the roadway through radar signals
and camera recognition to warn the
driver that a collision is imminent,
and if necessary, apply emergency
braking.
5-62
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when using the Automatic
Emergency Braking (AEB):
• This system is only a supplemental system and it is not
intended to, nor does it replace
the need for extreme care and
attention of the driver. The
sensing range and objects
detectable by the sensors are
limited. Pay attention to the
road conditions at all times.
• NEVER drive too fast in accordance with the road conditions or while cornering.
• Always drive cautiously to
prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring. AEB does not stop the
vehicle completely and is not
a collision avoidance system.
System Setting and Activation
System setting
• The driver can activate the AEB by
placing the ignition switch to the
ON position and by selecting:
'User Settings → Driving Assist →
Autonomous Emergency Braking'
The AEB deactivates, when the driver deselects the system setting.
The warning light illuminates on the LCD display,
when you cancel the AEB
system. The driver can
monitor the AEB ON/OFF status on
the LCD display. Also, the warning
light illuminates when the ESC
(Electronic Stability Control) is
turned off.
If the warning light remains ON when
the AEB is activated, have the system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
- Early :
When this condition is selected, the
initial Forward Collision Warning is
activated earlier than normal. This
setting maximizes the amount of distance between the vehicle ahead
before the initial warning occurs.
Even though, 'Early' is selected if the
front vehicle suddenly stops the initial warning activation time may not
seem fast.
- Normal :
When this condition is selected, the
initial Forward Collision Warning is
activated normally. This setting
allows for a nominal amount of distance between the vehicle or pedestrian ahead before the initial warning
occurs.
- Late :
When this condition is selected, the
initial Forward Collision Warning is
activated later than normal. This setting reduces the amount of distance
between the vehicle or pedestrian
ahead before the initial warning
occurs.
Select 'Late' when traffic is light and
when driving speed is slow.
Prerequisite for activation
The AEB system is on and ready
when AEB is selected on the LCD
display and when the following prerequisites are satisfied:
- The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is on.
- Driving speed exceeds approximately 6mph (10km/h). (The AEB
is only activated within a certain
speed range.)
- The system detects a pedestrian
or a vehicle in front, which may collide with your vehicle. (The AEB
may not be activated or may sound
a warning alarm in accordance
with the driving situation or vehicle
condition.)
5-63
5
Driving your vehicle
• The driver can select the initial warning activation time on the LCD display.
Go to the 'User Settings → Driving
Assist → Forward Collision Warning
→ Late/Normal/Early'.
The options for the initial Forward
Collision Warning includes the following:
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
• Completely stop the vehicle
on a safe location before
operating the switch on the
steering wheel to activate
/deactivate the AEB system.
• The AEB automatically activates upon placing the ignition switch to the ON position.
The driver can deactivate the
AEB by canceling the system
setting on the LCD display.
• The AEB automatically deactivates upon canceling the ESC
(Electronic Stability Control).
When the ESC is canceled,
the AEB cannot be activated
on the LCD display.
AEB Warning Message and
System Control
The AEB produces warning messages and warning alarms in accordance with the collision risk levels,
such as abrupt stopping of the vehicle in front, insufficient braking distance, or pedestrian detection. Also,
it controls the brakes in accordance
with the collision risk levels.
The driver can select the initial warning activation time in the User
Settings in the LCD display. The
options for the initial Forward Collision
Warning include EARLY, NORMAL, or
LATE initial warning time.
Forward Warning (1st warning)
OPDE056036
This initial warning message appears
on the LCD display with a warning
chime.
5-64
Collision Warning (2nd warning)
Emergency Braking
(3rd warning)
Brake operation
OPDE056037
OPDE056038
This warning message appears on
the LCD display with a warning
chime.
Additionally, some vehicle system
intervention occurs by the engine
management system to help decelerate the vehicle.
- The AEB system limitedly controls
the brakes to preemptively mitigate
impact in a collision. The brake
control is maximized just before a
collision.
CAUTION
The driver should always use
extreme caution while operating
the vehicle, whether or not there
is a warning message or alarm
from the AEB system.
5-65
5
Driving your vehicle
This warning message appears on
the LCD display with a warning
chime. Additionally, some vehicle
system intervention occurs by the
engine management system to help
decelerate the vehicle.
- Your vehicle speed may decelerate
moderately.
- The AEB system limitedly controls
the brakes to preemptively mitigate
impact in a collision.
• In an urgent situation, the braking
system enters into the ready status
for prompt reaction against the driver’s depressing the brake pedal.
• The AEB provides additional braking power for optimum braking performance, when the driver depresses the brake pedal.
• The braking control is automatically deactivated, when the driver
sharply depresses the accelerator
pedal, or when the driver abruptly
operates the steering wheel.
• The AEB braking control is automatically canceled, when risk factors disappear.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
AEB Sensor
NOTICE
■ Front radar
The AEB braking control cannot
completely stop the vehicle nor
avoid all collisions. The driver
should hold the responsibility
to safely drive and control the
vehicle.
WARNING
The AEB system logic operates
within certain parameters, such
as the distance from the vehicle
or pedestrian ahead, the speed
of the vehicle ahead, and the
driver's vehicle speed. Certain
conditions such as inclement
weather and road conditions
may affect the operation of the
AEB system.
WARNING
Never deliberately drive dangerously to activate the system.
5-66
OPDE056039
■ Front camera
OPDE056048
In order for the AEB system to operate properly, always make sure the
sensor cover or sensor is clean and
free of dirt, snow, and debris. Dirt,
snow, or foreign substances on the
sensor cover or sensor may adversely affect the sensing performance of
the sensor.
• Do not apply license plate molding or foreign objects such as a
bumper sticker or a bumper
guard near the radar sensor.
Doing so may adversely affect
the sensing performance of the
radar.
• Always keep the radar sensor
and cover clean and free of dirt
and debris.
• Use only a soft cloth to wash the
vehicle. Do not spray pressurized water directly on the sensor
or sensor cover.
• Be careful not to apply unnecessary force on the radar sensor or
sensor cover. If the sensor is
forcibly moved out of proper
alignment, the AEB system may
not operate correctly. In this
case, a warning message may
not be displayed. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the front bumper becomes
damaged in the area around the
radar sensor, the AEB system
may not operate properly. Have
the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Use only genuine HYUNDAI
parts to repair or replace a damaged sensor or sensor cover. Do
not apply paint to the sensor
cover.
NOTICE
i Information
Have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer when:
• The windshield glass is replaced.
• The sensor cover or sensor gets
damaged or replaced.
OAE056031L
Auto Emergency Braking disabled.
Radar blocked
When the sensor cover is blocked
with dirt, snow, or debris, the AEB
system operation may stop temporarily. If this occurs, a warning
message will appear on the LCD display. Remove any dirt, snow, or
debris and clean the radar sensor
cover before operating the AEB system.
The AEB may not properly operate in
an area (e.g. open terrain), where
any substances are not detected
after turning ON the engine.
5-67
5
Driving your vehicle
• NEVER install any accessories
or stickers on the front windshield, nor tint the front windshield.
• NEVER locate any reflective
objects (i.e. white paper, mirror)
over the dashboard. Any light
reflection may cause a malfunction of the system.
• Pay extreme caution to keep the
camera out of water.
• NEVER disassemble the camera
assembly, nor apply any impact
on the camera assembly.
• Playing the vehicle audio system at high volume may offset
the system warning sounds.
Warning message and warning
light
Driving your vehicle
System Malfunction
■ Type A
■ Type B
WARNING
• The AEB is only a supplemen-
OTLE055071/OAE056038L
Check AEB system
• When the AEB is not working properly, the AEB warning light (
)
will illuminate and the warning
message will appear for a few seconds. After the message disappears, the master warning light
(
) will illuminate. In this case,
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• The AEB warning message may
appear along with the illumination
of the ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) warning light.
5-68
tal system for the driver’s convenience. The driver should
hold the responsibility to control the vehicle operation. Do
not solely depend on the AEB
system. Rather, maintain a
safe braking distance, and, if
necessary, depress the brake
pedal to reduce the driving
speed.
• In certain instances and
under certain driving conditions, the AEB system may
activate prematurely. This initial warning message appears
on the LCD display with a
warning chime.
Also, in certain instances the
front radar sensor or camera
recognition system may not
detect the vehicle or pedestrian ahead. The AEB system
may not activate and the
warning message will not be
displayed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If there is a malfunction with
the AEB system, the automatic emergency braking is not
applied even though the braking system is operating normally.
• If the vehicle in front stops
suddenly, you may have less
control of the brake system.
Therefore, always keep a safe
distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you.
• The AEB system may activate
during braking and the vehicle may stop suddenly shifting loose objects toward the
passengers. Always keep
loose objects secured.
• The AEB system may not activate if the driver applies the
brake pedal to avoid a collision.
• The brake control may be
insufficient, possibly causing
a collision, if a vehicle in front
abruptly stops. Always pay
extreme caution.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Occupants may get injured, if
the vehicle abruptly stops by
the activated AEB system. Pay
extreme caution.
WARNING
• The AEB system operates
•
•
•
Limitations of the System
The Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) system is designed to monitor
the vehicle ahead or a pedestrian on
the roadway through radar signals
and camera recognition to warn the
driver that a collision is imminent,
and if necessary, apply emergency
braking.
In certain situations, the radar sensor or the camera may not be able to
detect the vehicle or pedestrian
ahead. In these cases, the AEB system may not operate normally. The
driver must pay careful attention in
the following situations where the
AEB operation may be limited.
5-69
5
Driving your vehicle
•
only to detect vehicles or
pedestrians in front of the
vehicle.
The AEB system does not
operate when the vehicle is in
reverse.
The AEB system is not
designed to detect other
objects on the road such as
animals.
The AEB system does not
detect vehicles in the opposite lane.
The AEB system does not
detect cross traffic vehicles
that are approaching.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The AEB system cannot
detect the driver approaching
the side view of a parked vehicle (for example on a dead
end street.)
In these cases, you must maintain a safe braking distance,
and if necessary, depress the
brake pedal to reduce the driving speed in order to maintain a
safe distance.
Driving your vehicle
Detecting vehicles
The sensor may be limited when:
• The radar sensor or camera is
blocked with a foreign object or
debris
• Inclement weather such as heavy
rain or snow obscures the field of
view of the radar sensor or camera
• There is interference by electromagnetic waves
• There is severe irregular reflection
from the radar sensor
• The radar/camera sensor recognition is limited
• The vehicle in front is too small to
be detected (for example a motorcycle or a bicycle, etc.)
• The vehicle in front is an oversize
vehicle or trailer that is too big to
be detected by the camera recognition system (for example a tractor
trailer, etc.)
• The driver's field of view is not well
illuminated (either too dark or too
much reflection or too much backlight that obscures the field of view)
• The vehicle in front does not have
their rear lights properly turned ON
5-70
• The outside brightness changes
suddenly, for example when entering or exiting a tunnel
• Light coming from a street light or
an oncoming vehicle is reflected on
a wet road surface such as a puddle in the road
• The field of view in front is
obstructed by sun glare
• The windshield glass is fogged up;
a clear view of the road is obstructed
• The vehicle in front is driving erratically
• The vehicle drives through a construction area, on an unpaved
road, or above metal materials,
such as a railway
• The vehicle drives inside a building,
such as a basement parking lot
• The adverse road conditions cause
excessive vehicle vibrations while
driving
• The vehicle in front is moving vertically to the driving direction
• The vehicle in front is stopped vertically
• The vehicle in front is driving
towards your vehicle or reversing
OAE056100
- Driving on a curve
The performance of the AEB system
may be limited when driving on a
curved road.
In certain instances on a curved
road, the AEB system may activate
prematurely.
Also, in certain instances the front
radar sensor or camera recognition
system may not detect the vehicle
traveling on a curved road.
In these cases, the driver must maintain a safe braking distance, and if
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.
OPD056102
OAE056103
The AEB system may recognize a
vehicle in the next lane when driving
on a curved road.
In this case, the system may unnecessarily alarm the driver and apply
the brake.
Always pay attention to road and
driving conditions, while driving. If
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.
Also, when necessary depress the
accelerator pedal to prevent the system from unnecessarily decelerating
your vehicle.
- Driving on a slope
The performance of the AEB decreases while driving upward or downward
on a slope, not recognizing the vehicle in front in the same lane. It may
unnecessarily produce the warning
message and the warning alarm, or it
may not produce the warning message and the warning alarm at all.
When the AEB suddenly recognizes
the vehicle in front while passing
over a slope, you may experience
sharp deceleration.
Always keep your eyes forward while
driving upward or downward on a
slope, and, if necessary, depress the
brake pedal to reduce your driving
speed in order to maintain distance.
- Changing lanes
When a vehicle changes lanes in
front of you, the AEB system may not
immediately detect the vehicle, especially if the vehicle changes lanes
abruptly. In this case, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.
5-71
5
Driving your vehicle
OAE056101
Driving your vehicle
Detecting pedestrians
(if equipped)
OAE056109
OPD056040
When driving in stop-and-go traffic,
and a stopped vehicle in front of you
merges out of the lane, the AEB system may not immediately detect the
new vehicle that is now in front of
you. In this case, you must maintain
a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to
reduce your driving speed in order to
maintain a safe distance.
- Detecting the vehicle in front of you
If the vehicle in front of you has cargo
that extends rearward from the cab,
or when the vehicle in front of you
has higher ground clearance, additional special attention is required.
The AEB system may not be able to
detect the cargo extending from the
vehicle. In these instances, you must
maintain a safe braking distance
from the rearmost object, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to
reduce your driving speed in order to
maintain distance.
5-72
The sensor may be limited when:
• The pedestrian is not fully detected
by the camera recognition system,
for example, if the pedestrian is
leaning over or is not fully walking
upright
• The pedestrian is moving very
quickly or appears abruptly in the
camera detection area
• The pedestrian is wearing clothing
that easily blends into the background, making it difficult to be
detected by the camera recognition system
• The outside lighting is too bright
(e.g. when driving in bright sunlight
or in sun glare) or too dark (e.g.
when driving on a dark rural road
at night)
• It is difficult to detect and distinguish the pedestrian from other
objects in the surroundings, for
example, when there is a group of
pedestrians or a large crowd
• There is an item similar to a person's body structure
i Information
In some instances, the AEB system
may be canceled when subjected to
electromagnetic interference.
i Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
• Do not use the Automatic
Emergency Braking system
when towing a vehicle.
Application of the AEB system
while towing may adversely
affect the safety of your vehicle or the towing vehicle.
• Use extreme caution when the
vehicle in front of you has
cargo that extends rearward
from the cab, or when the
vehicle in front of you has
higher ground clearance.
• The AEB system is designed
to detect and monitor the vehicle ahead or detect a pedestrian in the roadway through
radar signals and camera
recognition. It is not designed
to detect bicycles, motorcycles, or smaller wheeled
objects such as luggage bags,
shopping carts, or strollers.
• Never try to test the operation
of the AEB system. Doing so
may cause severe injury or
death.
5-73
5
Driving your vehicle
• The pedestrian is small
• The pedestrian has impaired
mobility
• The sensor recognition is limited
• The radar sensor or camera is
blocked with a foreign object or
debris
• Inclement weather such as heavy
rain or snow obscures the field of
view of the radar sensor or camera
• When light coming from a street
light or an oncoming vehicle is
reflected on a wet road surface
such as a puddle in the road
• The field of view in front is
obstructed by sun glare
• The windshield glass is fogged up;
a clear view of the road is obstructed
• The adverse road conditions cause
excessive vehicle vibrations while
driving
Driving your vehicle
LANE KEEPING ASSIST SYSTEM (LKAS) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
The lane keeping assist system
is not a substitute for safe driving practices, but a convenience function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always be aware of the surrounding and steer the vehicle.
OPDE056048
The Lane Keeping Assist System
helps detect lane markers on the
road with a camera at the front windshield, and assists the driver's steering to help keep the vehicle between
lanes.
When the system detects the vehicle
straying from its lane, it alerts the
driver with a visual and audible warning, while applying a slight countersteering torque, to try to prevent the
vehicle from moving out of its lane.
5-74
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when using the Lane Keeping
Assist System (LKAS):
• Do not steer the steering
wheel suddenly when the
steering wheel is being assisted by the system.
• LKAS helps to prevent the driver from moving out of the lane
unintentionally by assisting the
driver's steering. However, the
driver should not solely rely on
the system but always pay
attention on the steering wheel
to stay in the lane.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The operation of the LKAS
can be canceled or not work
properly according to road
condition and surroundings.
Always be cautious when
driving.
• Do not disassemble the LKAS
camera temporarily to tint the
window or attach any types of
coatings and accessories. If
you disassemble the camera
and assemble it again, take
your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the
system checked for calibration.
• When you replace the windshield glass, LKAS camera or
related parts of the steering
wheel, take your vehicle to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer
and have the system checked
for calibration.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always have your hands on
the steering wheel while the
LKAS system is activated. If
you continue to drive with
your hands off the steering
wheel after the "Keep hands
on steering wheel" warning
message appears, the system
will turn off automatically.
• The steering wheel is not continuously controlled so if the
vehicle speed is at a higher
speed when leaving a lane the
vehicle may not be able to be
controlled by the system. The
driver must always follow the
speed limit when using the
system.
• If you attach objects to the
steering wheel, the system
may not assist steering or the
hands off alarm may not work
properly.
LKAS Operation
OPD056049
To activate/deactivate the LKAS:
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, press the LKAS button
located on the instrument panel on
the left hand side of the steering
wheel. The indicator in the cluster
display will initially illuminate white.
This indicates the LKAS is in the
READY but NOT ENABLED state.
5-75
5
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
• The system detects lane lines
and controls the steering
wheel by a camera, therefore,
if the lane lines are hard to
detect, the system may not
work properly.
Please refer to "Limitations of
the system".
• Do not remove or damage the
related parts of LKAS.
• You may not hear a warning
sound of LKAS because of
excessive audio sound.
• Do not place objects on the
dashboard that reflects light
such as mirrors, white paper,
etc. The system may malfunction if the sunlight is reflected.
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
The color of indicator will
change depending on the
condition of LKAS.
LKAS activation
WARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist
System is a system to prevent
the driver from leaving the lane.
However, the driver should not
solely rely on the system but
always check the road conditions when driving.
- White : Sensor does not detect
lane lines or vehicle speed
is under 40mph (64 km/h).
- Green : Sensor detects lane lines
and the system is able to
control vehicle steering.
OPDE056055
• To see the LKAS screen on the
LCD display in the cluster, select
Assist mode ( ). For more
details, refer to "LCD Display
Modes" in chapter 3.
• When both lane lines are detected
and all the conditions to activate
the LKAS are satisfied, a green
steering wheel indicator will illuminate and the LKAS indicator light
will change from white to green.
This indicates that the LKAS system is in the ENABLED state and
the steering wheel will be able to
be controlled.
5-76
■ Lane line undetected
■ Lane line detected
• If your vehicle speed exceeds 40
mph (64 km/h) and the LKAS button is ON, the system is enabled. If
your vehicle departs from the projected lane in front of you, the
LKAS operates as follows:
■ Left lane line
■ Right lane line
OAEE056129L
• If the system detects a lane line,
the color changes from gray to
white.
• If the system detects the left lane
line, the left lane line color will
change from gray to white.
• If the system detects the right lane
line, the right lane line color will
change from gray to white.
• Both lane lines must be detected
for the system to fully activate.
Keep hands on steering wheel
If the driver takes their hands off the
steering wheel for several seconds
while the LKAS is activated, the system will warn the driver.
OPDE056056/OPDE056057
A visual warning appears on the
cluster LCD display. Either the left
lane line or the right lane line in the
cluster LCD display will blink
depending on which direction the
vehicle is veering.
If the steering wheel appears, the
system will control the vehicle’s
steering to prevent the vehicle from
crossing the lane line.
i Information
If the steering wheel is held very lightly the message may still appear
because the LKAS system may not
recognize that the driver has their
hands on the wheel.
5-77
5
Driving your vehicle
OPDE056051/OPDE056052
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
WARNING
• The driver is responsible for
The warning message may
appear late according to road
conditions. Therefore, always
have your hands on the steering
wheel while driving.
accurate steering.
• Turn off the system in below
OAEE056130L
Driver's grasp not detected.
LKAS will be disabled momentarily
If the driver still does not have their
hands on the steering wheel after the
message "Keep hands on steering
wheel", the system will not control
the steering wheel and warn the driver only when the driver crosses the
lane lines.
However, if the driver has their hands
on the steering wheel again, the system will start controlling the steering
wheel.
5-78
situations.
- In bad weather
- In bad road condition
- When the steering wheel
needs to be controlled by the
driver frequently.
i Information
• Even though the steering is assisted
by the system, the driver can still
steer to control the steering wheel.
• The steering wheel may feel heavier
when the steering wheel is assisted
by the system than when it is not.
Warning Light and Message
LKAS failure indicator
The LKAS failure indicator (yellow) will illuminate
if the LKAS is not working
properly. Have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OAEE056131L
If the problem is not solved, have
your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
5-79
5
Driving your vehicle
Check LKAS
If there is a problem with the system
a message will appear for a few seconds. If the problem continues the
LKAS failure indicator will illuminate.
When there is a problem with the
system do one of the following:
• Turn the system on after turning
the engine off and on again.
• Check if the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
• Check if the system is affected by
the weather. (ex: fog, heavy rain,
etc.)
• Check if there is foreign matter on
the camera lens.
The LKAS system will not be in the
ENABLED state and the steering
wheel will not be assisted when:
• The turn signal is turned on before
changing a lane. If you change
lanes without the turn signal on,
the steering wheel might be controlled.
• The vehicle is not driven in the middle of the lane when the system is
turned on or right after changing a
lane.
• ESC (Electronic Stability Control)
is activated.
• The vehicle is driven on a sharp
curve.
• Vehicle speed is below 40 mph
(60 km/h) and over 110 mph (180
km/h).
• The vehicle makes sharp lane
changes.
• The vehicle brakes suddenly.
• Only one lane line is detected.
• The lane is very wide or narrow.
• There are more than two lane lines
on the road. (e.g. construction
area)
• The vehicle is driven on a steep
incline.
Driving your vehicle
Limitations of the System
The LKAS may operate prematurely
even if the vehicle does not depart
from the intended lane, OR, the
LKAS may not warn you if the vehicle
leaves the intended lane under the
following circumstances:
When the lane and road conditions are poor
• It is difficult to distinguish the lane
marking from the road surface or
the lane marking is faded or not
clearly marked.
• There are markings on the road
surface that look like a lane line
that is inadvertently being detected
by the camera.
• The lane line is merged or divided.
(e.g. tollgate)
• The lane number increases or
decreases or the lane marker are
crossing complicatedly.
• There are more than two lane lines
on the road in front of you.
• The lane line is very thick or thin.
• The lanes ahead are not visible
due to rain, snow, water on the
road, damaged or stained road
surface, or other factors.
5-80
• The shadow is on the lane marker
by a median strip, trees, etc.
• The lanes are incomplete or the
area is in a construction zone.
• There are crosswalk signs or other
symbols on the road.
• The lane line in a tunnel is stained
with oil, etc.
When external condition is intervened
• The brightness outside changes
suddenly such as when entering or
exiting a tunnel or passing under a
bridge.
• The brightness outside is too low
such as when the headlamps are
not on at night or the vehicle is
going through a tunnel or passing
under a bridge..
• There is a boundary structure in
the roadway such as a concrete
barrier, guardrail and reflector post
that is inadvertently being detected
by the camera.
• When light coming from a street
light or an oncoming vehicle is
reflected on a wet road surface
such as a puddle in the road.
• The field of view in front is
obstructed by sun glare.
• The lane suddenly disappears
such as at the intersection.
• There is not enough distance
between you and the vehicle in
front to be able to detect the lane
line or the vehicle ahead is driving
on the lane line.
• Driving on a steep grade, over a
hill, or when driving on a curved
road.
• The adverse road conditions cause
excessive vehicle vibrations while
driving.
• The surrounding of the inside rear
view mirror temperature is high
due to direct sunlight.
When front visibility is poor
• The windshield or the LKAS camera lens is blocked with dirt or
debris.
• The windshield glass is fogged up;
a clear view of the road is obstructed.
• Placing objects on the dashboard,
etc.
LKAS Function Change
Standard LKA
The driver can change LKAS to Lane
Departure Warning System (LDWS)
or change the LKAS mode between
Standard LKA and Active LKA from
the LCD display. Go to the 'User
Settings → Driving Assist → Lane
Keep Assist System → Lane
Departure Warning/Standard LKA/
Active LKA'.
The system is automatically set to
Standard LKA if a function is not
selected.
The Standard LKA mode guides the
driver to help keep the vehicle within
the lanes. It rarely controls the steering wheel, when the vehicle drives
well inside the lanes. However, it
starts to control the steering wheel,
when the vehicle is about to deviate
out of the lanes.
LDWS alerts the driver with a visual
warning and a warning alarm when
the system detects the vehicle
departing the lane. The steering
wheel will not be controlled.
The Active LKA mode provides more
frequent steering wheel control in
comparison with the Standard LKA
mode. Active LKA can reduce the driver’s fatigue to assist the steering for
maintaining the vehicle in the middle
of the lane.
5
Driving your vehicle
Lane Departure Warning
Active LKA
i Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
5-81
Driving your vehicle
DRIVER ATTENTION ALERT SYSTEM (DAA, IF EQUIPPED)
The Driver Attention Alert (DAA) system displays the condition of the driver's fatigue level and inattentive
driving practices.
System Setting and Activation
System setting
• The Driver Attention Alert system
is set to be in the OFF position,
when your vehicle is first delivered
to you from the factory.
• To turn ON the Driver Attention
Alert system, turn on the engine,
and then select 'User Settings →
Driving Assist → Driver Attention
Alert → Normal/Early' on the LCD
display.
• The driver can select the mode of
the Driver Attention Alert system.
- Off : The Driver Attention Alert
system is deactivated.
- Normal : The Driver Attention
Alert system helps alert the driver of his/her fatigue level or inattentive driving practices.
- Early : The Driver Attention Alert
system helps alert the driver of
his/her fatigue level or inattentive
driving practices faster than
Normal mode.
• The set-up of the Driver Attention
Alert system will be maintained, as
selected, when the engine is restarted.
Driver's attention level
■ System off
OPDE056125
■ Attentive driving
OPDE056061
■ Inattentive driving
OPDE056062
5-82
Take a break
Resetting the System
OPDE056063
• The "Consider taking a break"
message appears on the LCD display and a warning sounds in order
to suggest the driver to take a
break, when the driver’s attention
level is below 1.
• The Driver Attention Alert system
does not suggest the driver to take
a break, when the total driving time
is shorter than 10 minutes.
• The last break time is set to 00:00
and the driver's attention level is
set to 5 (very attentive) when the
driver resets the Driver Attention
Alert system.
• The Driver Attention Alert system
resets in the following situations.
- The engine is turned OFF.
- The driver unfastens the seat belt
and then opens the driver's door.
- The vehicle is stopped for more
than 10 minutes.
• The Driver Attention Alert system
operates again, when the driver
restarts driving.
5-83
5
Driving your vehicle
• The driver can monitor their driving
conditions on the LCD display.
The DAA screen will appear when
you select the Assist mode tab ( )
on the LCD display if the system is
activated. (For more information,
refer to "LCD Display Modes" in
chapter 3.)
• The driver's attention level is displayed on the scale of 1 to 5. The
lower the number is, the more inattentive the driver is.
• The number decreases when the
driver does not take a break for a
certain period of time.
• The number increases when the
driver attentively drives for a certain period of time.
• When the driver turns on the system while driving, it displays 'Last
Break time' and level.
Driving your vehicle
System Standby
System Malfunction
WARNING
• The Driver Attention Alert
OPDE056126
OPDE057065N
The Driver Attention Alert system
enters the ready status and displays
the 'Standby' screen in the following
situations.
- The camera does not detect the
lanes.
- Driving speed remains under 40
mph (60 km/h) or over 125 mph
(200 km/h).
Check Driver Attention Alert system
When the warning message
appears, the system is not working
properly. In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
5-84
system is not a substitute for
safe driving practices, but a
convenience function only. It
is the responsibility of the
driver to always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected
and sudden situations from
occurring. Pay attention to the
road conditions at all times.
• The system may suggest a
break according to the driver's driving pattern or habits
even if the driver doesn't feel
fatigue.
• The driver, who feels fatigued,
should take a break, even
though there is no break suggestion by the Driver Attention
Alert system.
NOTICE
CAUTION
The Driver Attention Alert system may not properly operate
with limited alerting in the following situations:
• The lane detection performance is limited. (For more information, refer to "Lane Keeping
Assist System (LKAS)" in this
chapter.)
• The vehicle is violently driven
or is abruptly turned for obstacle avoidance (e.g. construction area, other vehicles, fallen
objects, bumpy road).
• Forward drivability of the vehicle is severely undermined
(possibly due to wide variation
in tire pressures, uneven tire
wear-out, toe-in/toe-out alignment).
• The vehicle drives on a curvy
road.
• The vehicle drives on a bumpy
road.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The vehicle drives through a
windy area.
• The vehicle is controlled by the
following driving assist systems:
- Lane Keeping Assist System
(LKAS)
- Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) System
- Smart Cruise Control (SCC)
System
CAUTION
Playing the vehicle audio system at high volume may offset
the Driver Attention Alert system warning sounds.
5-85
5
Driving your vehicle
The Driver Attention Alert system
utilizes the camera sensor on the
front windshield for its operation.
To keep the camera sensor in the
best condition, you should
observe the followings:
• NEVER install any accessories
or stickers on the front windshield, nor tint the front windshield.
• NEVER locate any reflective
objects (i.e. white paper, mirror)
over the dashboard. Any light
reflection may cause a malfunction of the Driver Attention Alert
(DAA) system.
• Pay extreme caution to keep the
camera sensor out of water.
• NEVER arbitrarily disassemble
the camera assembly, nor apply
any impact on the camera
assembly.
Driving your vehicle
CRUISE CONTROL
Cruise Control operation
OPD047149L
1. Cruise indicator
2. SET indicator
The Cruise Control system allows
you to drive at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h) without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
5-86
WARNING
Take the following precautions:
• Always set the vehicle speed
under the speed limit.
• If the Cruise Control is left on,
(cruise indicator light in the
instrument cluster is illuminated) the Cruise Control can
be activated unintentionally.
Keep the Cruise Control system off (cruise indicator light
OFF) when the Cruise Control
is not in use, to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.
• Use the Cruise Control system only when traveling on
open highways in good
weather.
• Do not use the Cruise Control
when it may be unsafe to keep
the vehicle at a constant
speed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use when:
- Driving in heavy traffic or
when traffic conditions make
it difficult to drive at a constant speed
- Driving on rainy, icy, or
snow-covered roads
- Driving on hilly or windy
roads
- Driving in windy areas
- Driving with limited view
(possibly due to bad weather
such as fog, snow, rain and
sandstorm)
NOTICE
During cruise-speed driving of a
manual transmission vehicle, do
not shift into neutral without
depressing the clutch pedal, since
the engine will be overrevved. If
this happens, depress the clutch
pedal or press the cruise control
ON / OFF button.
i Information
• During normal cruise control operation, when the SET switch is activated or reactivated after applying the
brakes, the cruise control will energize after approximately 3 seconds.
This delay is normal.
• Before activating the cruise control
function, the system will check to
verify that the brake switch is operating normally. Depress the brake
pedal at least once after turning ON
the ignition or starting the engine.
To set Cruise Control speed
OPD056068
OPD056067
i Information
On a steep slope, the vehicle may
slightly slow down or speed up, while
driving uphill or downhill.
i Information - Manual transmission
For manual transmission vehicles, you
should depress the brake pedal at
least once to set the cruise control
after starting the engine.
5-87
5
Driving your vehicle
1. Press the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The cruise indicator will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
3. Push the toggle switch down
(SET-), and release it. The SET
indicator light will illuminate.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.
Driving your vehicle
To increase Cruise Control
speed
• Depress the accelerator pedal.
When the vehicle attains the
desired speed, push the toggle
switch down (SET-).
To decrease Cruise Control
speed
OPD056069
OPD056068
• Push the toggle switch up (RES+)
and hold it, while monitoring the
SET speed on the instrument cluster.
Release the toggle switch when
the desired speed is shown and
the vehicle will accelerate to that
speed.
• Push the toggle switch up (RES+)
and release it immediately. The
cruising speed will increase 1.0
mph (1.6 km/h) each time the toggle switch is operated in this manner.
• Push the toggle switch down (SET-)
and hold it.Your vehicle will gradually slow down. Release the toggle
switch at the speed you want to
maintain.
• Push the toggle switch down (SET-)
and release it immediately. The
cruising speed will decrease 1.0
mph (1.6 km/h) each time the toggle
switch is operated in this manner.
• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired
speed, push the toggle switch
down (SET-).
5-88
To temporarily accelerate with
the Cruise Control ON
Cruise Control will be canceled
when:
Depress the accelerator pedal. When
you take your foot off the accelerator,
the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
If you push the toggle switch down
(SET-) at the increased speed, the
Cruise Control will maintain the
increased speed.
• The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is operating.
• Downshifting to the 2nd gear in
manual shift mode. (for automatic
transmission/dual clutch transmission vehicle)
i Information
OPD056070
5-89
5
Driving your vehicle
• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Depressing the clutch pedal.
(for manual transmission vehicle)
• Pressing the CANCEL button
located on the steering wheel.
• Pressing the CRUISE button. Both
the cruise indicator and the "SET"
indicator will turn OFF.
• Moving the shift lever into N
(Neutral).(for automatic transmission/ dual clutch transmission vehicle)
• Decreasing the vehicle speed to
less than approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Each of the above actions will cancel
Cruise Control operation (the "SET"
indicator in the instrument cluster will
go off), but only pressing the CRUISE
button will turn the system off. If you
wish to resume Cruise Control operation, push the toggle switch up (RES+)
located on your steering wheel. You
will return to your previously preset
speed, unless the system was turned off
using the CRUISE button.
Driving your vehicle
To resume preset Cruising
speed
To turn Cruise Control off
OPD056067
OPD056069
Push the toggle switch up (RES+). If
the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (30
km/h), the vehicle will resume the
preset speed.
5-90
• Press the CRUISE button (the
cruise indicator light will go off).
• Turn the vehicle OFF.
ADVANCED SMART CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The Smart Cruise Control System
allows you to program the vehicle to
maintain constant speed and minimum distance between the vehicle
ahead.
The Smart Cruise Control System
will automatically adjust your vehicle
speed to maintain your programmed
speed and following distance without
requiring you to depress the accelerator or brake pedals.
OAE056097N
To see the SCC screen on the LCD
display in the cluster, select Assist
mode ( ). For more details, refer to
"LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.
WARNING
For your safety, please read the
owner's manual before using the
Smart Cruise Control system.
WARNING
The Smart Cruise Control
System is not a substitute for
safe driving practices, but a
convenience function only. It is
the responsibility of the driver
to always check the speed and
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Take the following precautions :
• Always set the vehicle speed
under the speed limit.
• If the Smart Cruise Control is
left on, (cruise (
)
indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated)
the Smart Cruise Control can
be activated unintentionally.
Keep the Smart Cruise
Control System off (cruise
(
) indicator light
OFF) when the Smart Cruise
Control is not in use, to avoid
inadvertently setting a speed.
• Use the Smart Cruise Control
System only when traveling
on open highways in good
weather.
(Continued)
5-91
5
Driving your vehicle
➀ Cruise indicator
➁ Set speed
➂ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
WARNING
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
• Do not use the Smart Cruise
Control when it may not be
safe to keep the vehicle at a
constant speed.
• Do not use when:
- Driving in heavy traffic or
when traffic conditions make
it difficult to drive at a constant speed
- Driving on rainy, icy, or
snow-covered roads
- Driving on a steep downhill
or uphill
- Driving in windy areas
- Driving in parking lots
- Driving near crash barriers
- Driving on a sharp curve
- Driving with limited view
(possibly due to bad weather, such as fog, snow, rain or
sandstorm)
- The vehicle's sensing ability
decreases due to vehicle
modification, resulting in a
level difference of the vehicle's front and rear
5-92
Smart Cruise Control Speed
To set Smart Cruise Control
speed
OPD056068
OPD056067
1. Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The cruise (
) indicator will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
The Smart Cruise Control speed
can be set as follows:
• 20 – 110 mph (30 -180 km/h) :
when there is no vehicle in front
• 0 – 110 mph (0 -180 km/h) :
when there is a vehicle in front
3. Push the toggle switch down
(SET-). The Set Speed and
Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance on the
LCD display will illuminate.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.
The desired speed will automatically be maintained.
If there is a vehicle in front of you, the
speed may decrease to maintain the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
i Information
Vehicle speed may decrease on an
upward slope and increase on a downward slope.
To increase Smart Cruise
Control set speed
CAUTION
To decrease the Smart Cruise
Control set speed
Check the driving condition
before using the toggle switch.
Driving speed sharply increases, when you push up and hold
the toggle switch.
OPD056068
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the toggle switch down
(SET-), and release it immediately.
The cruising speed will decrease
by 1 mph (1 km/h) each time you
move the toggle switch down in
this manner.
• Push the toggle switch down
(SET-), and hold it. Your vehicle set
speed will decrease by 5 mph (10
km/h). Release the toggle switch
at the speed you want.
• You can set the speed to 20 mph
(30 km/h).
5-93
5
Driving your vehicle
OPD056069
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the toggle switch up (RES+),
and release it immediately. The
cruising speed will increase by
1 mph (1 km/h) each time you
move the toggle switch up in this
manner.
• Push the toggle switch up (RES+),
and hold it. Your vehicle set speed
will increase by 5 mph (10 km/h).
Release the toggle switch at the
speed you want.
Driving your vehicle
To temporarily accelerate with
the Smart Cruise Control on
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the Smart Cruise Control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with Smart Cruise Control operation
or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If you push the toggle switch down
(SET-) at increased speed, the cruising speed will be set again pedal.
Smart Cruise Control set speed
will be temporarily canceled
when:
i Information
Be careful when accelerating temporarily, because the speed is not controlled automatically at this time even
if there is a vehicle in front of you.
5-94
OPD056070
Canceled manually
• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Pressing the CANCEL button
located on the steering wheel.
The Smart Cruise Control turns off
temporarily when the Set Speed and
Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance indicator
on the LCD display turns off.
The cruise (
) indicator is
illuminated continuously.
Canceled automatically
• The driver's door is opened.
• The vehicle is shifted to N (Neutral),
R (Reverse) or P (Park).
• The EPB (Electronic Parking Brake)
is applied.
• The vehicle speed is over 120 mph
(190 km/h).
• The vehicle stops on a steep incline.
• The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), TCS (Traction Control
System) or ABS is operating.
• The ESC is turned off.
• The sensor or the cover is dirty or
blocked with foreign matter.
• The vehicle is stopped for a certain
period of time.
• The vehicle stops and goes repeatedly for a long period of time.
• The accelerator pedal is continuously depressed for a long period of
time.
• The engine performance is abnormal.
i Information
If the Smart Cruise Control is canceled
by other than the reasons mentioned,
have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
To resume Smart Cruise Control
set speed
If any method other than the cruise
toggle switch was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the cruising speed will
automatically resume when you
push the toggle switch up (RES+) or
down (SET-).
If you push the toggle switch up
(RES+), the speed will resume to the
recently set speed. However, if vehicle speed drops below 20 mph (30
km/h), it will resume when there is a
vehicle in front of your vehicle.
i Information
OAEE056165N
Smart Cruise Control canceled
If the system is cancelled, the warning chime will sound and a message
will appear for a few seconds.
You must adjust the vehicle speed by
depressing the accelerator or brake
pedal according to the road condition
ahead and driving condition.
Always check the road conditions.
Do not rely on the warning chime.
Always check the road conditions
when you push the toggle switch up
(RES+) to resume speed.
5-95
5
Driving your vehicle
• The driver starts driving by pushing
the toggle switch up (RES+)/down
(SET-) or depressing the accelerator pedal, after the vehicle is
stopped by the Smart Cruise
Control System with no other vehicle ahead.
• The driver starts driving by pushing
the toggle switch up (RES+)/down
(SET-) or depressing the accelerator pedal, after stopping the vehicle
with a vehicle stopped far away in
front.
• The AEB is activated.
Each of these actions will cancel
the Smart Cruise Control operation. The Set Speed and Vehicle-toVehicle Distance on the LCD display will go off.
In a condition the Smart Cruise
Control is cancelled automatically,
the Smart Cruise Control will not
resume even though the RES+ or
SET- toggle switch is pushed.
Driving your vehicle
To turn Cruise Control off
Smart Cruise Control Vehicleto-Vehicle Distance
To set Vehicle-to-Vehicle
Distance
Each time the button is pressed, the
vehicle to vehicle distance changes
as follows:
Distance 4
Distance 3
Distance 2
Distance 1
For example, if you drive at 56 mph
(90 km/h), the distance is maintained
as follows:
OPD056067
• Press the CRUISE button (the
cruise (
) indicator light
will go off).
OPD056083
When the Smart Cruise Control
System is ON, you can set and maintain the distance from the vehicle
ahead of you without pressing the
accelerator or brake pedal.
5-96
Distance
Distance
Distance
Distance
4
3
2
1
-
approximately
approximately
approximately
approximately
172 feet
130 feet
106 feet
82 feet
i Information
The distance is set to the last set distance when the system is used for the
first time after starting the engine.
When the lane ahead is clear:
When there is a vehicle ahead
of you in your lane:
Distance 4
Distance 3
Distance 2
Distance 1
WARNING
OPDE056089R
OPDE056084R
OPDE056085R/OPDE056086R/OPDE056087R/OPDE056088R
• Your vehicle speed will slow down
or speed up to maintain the selected distance.
• If the vehicle ahead speeds up,
your vehicle will travel at a steady
cruising speed after accelerating to
the set speed.
When using the Smart Cruise
Control System:
• The warning chime sounds
and the Vehicle-to Vehicle
Distance indicator blinks if
the vehicle is unable to maintain the selected distance
from the vehicle ahead.
• If the warning chime sounds,
depress the brake pedal or
use the steering wheel to
actively adjust the vehicle
speed, and the distance to the
vehicle ahead.
(Continued)
5-97
5
Driving your vehicle
The vehicle speed will maintain the
set speed.
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
• Even if the warning chime is
not activated, always pay
attention to the driving conditions to prevent dangerous
situations from occurring.
• Playing the vehicle audio system at high volume may offset
the system warning sounds.
CAUTION
In traffic situation
OPDE056090
OPDE056091
If the vehicle ahead (vehicle
speed: less than 20 mph (30
km/h)) disappears to the next
lane, the warning chime will
sound and a message "Watch
for surrounding vehicles" will
appear. Adjust your vehicle
speed for vehicles or objects
that can suddenly appear in
front of you by depressing the
brake pedal.
Always pay attention to the road
condition ahead.
5-98
Use switch or pedal to accelerate
• In traffic, your vehicle will stop if the
vehicle ahead of you stops. Also, if
the vehicle ahead of you starts
moving, your vehicle will start as
well. However, if the vehicle stops
for more than 3 seconds, you must
depress the accelerator pedal or
push up the toggle switch (RES+)
or push down the toggle switch
(SET-) to start driving.
• If you push the advanced smart
cruise control toggle switch (RES+
or SET-) while Auto Hold and
advanced smart cruise control is
operating the Auto Hold will be
released regardless of accelerator
pedal operation and the vehicle will
start to move. The AUTO HOLD
indicator changes from green to
white.
Sensor to Detect Distance to
the Vehicle Ahead
Warning message
OAE056166L
OPDE056039
5-99
5
Driving your vehicle
The Smart Cruise Control uses a
sensor to detect distance to the vehicle ahead.
Smart Cruise Control disabled.
Radar blocked
When the sensor lens cover is
blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, the
Smart Cruise Control System operation may stop temporarily. If this
occurs, a warning message will
appear on the LCD display. Remove
any dirt, snow, or debris and clean
the radar sensor lens cover before
operating the Smart Cruise Control
System. The Smart Cruise Control
system may not properly activate, if
the radar is totally contaminated, or if
any substance is not detected after
turning on the engine (e.g. in an
open terrain).
Driving your vehicle
i Information
For the SCC operation is temporarily
stopped if the radar is blocked, but
you wish to use conventional cruise
control mode (speed only control function), you must convert to the cruise
control mode (refer to "To convert to
Cruise Control mode" in the following
page.
CAUTION
• Do not apply license plate
frame or foreign objects such
as a bumper sticker or a
bumper guard near the radar
sensor. Doing
so
may
adversely affect the sensing
performance of the radar.
• Always keep the radar sensor
and lens cover clean and free
of dirt and debris.
• Use only a soft cloth to wash
the vehicle. Do not spray pressurized water directly on the
sensor or sensor cover.
(Continued)
5-100
(Continued)
• Be careful not to apply unnecessary force on the radar sensor or sensor cover. If the sensor is forcibly moved out of
proper alignment, the Smart
Cruise Control System may
not operate correctly. In this
case, a warning message may
not be displayed. Have the
vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the front bumper becomes
damaged in the area around
the radar sensor, the Smart
Cruise Control System may
not operate properly. Have the
vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Use only genuine HYUNDAI
parts to repair or replace a
damaged sensor or sensor
cover. Do not apply paint to
the sensor cover.
OAE056167L
Check Smart Cruise Control System
The message will appear when the
vehicle to vehicle distance control
system is not functioning normally.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked.
To Convert to Cruise Control
Mode
The sensitivity of vehicle speed
when following the front vehicle to
maintain the set distance can be
adjusted. Go to the 'User Settings →
Driving Assist → Smart Cruise
Control Response → Slow/Normal/
Fast' on the LCD display. You may
select one of the three stages you
prefer.
• Slow:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is slower than normal speed.
• Normal:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is normal.
• Fast:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is faster than normal speed.
The driver may choose to switch to
use the conventional Cruise Control
mode (speed only control function)
by following these steps:
1. Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The cruise (
) indicator will illuminate.
2. Push and hold the Vehicle-toVehicle Distance button for more
than 2 seconds.
3. Choose between "Smart Cruise
Control" and "Cruise Control".
When the system is canceled using
the CRUISE button or the CRUISE
button is used after the engine is
turned on, the Smart Cruise Control
mode will turn on.
WARNING
When using the conventional
Cruise Control mode, you must
manually adjust the distance to
other vehicles by depressing
the accelerator or brake pedal.
The system does not automatically adjust the distance to
vehicles in front of you.
5
Driving your vehicle
To Adjust the Sensitivity of
Smart Cruise Control
i Information
The last selected speed sensitivity of
the smart cruise control is remained in
the system.
5-101
Driving your vehicle
Limitations of the System
On curves
The Smart Cruise Control System
may have limits to its ability to detect
distance to the vehicle ahead due to
road and traffic conditions.
OAE056101
OAE056100
• The Smart Cruise Control System
may not detect a moving vehicle in
your lane, and then your vehicle
could accelerate to the set speed.
Also, the vehicle speed will
decrease when the vehicle ahead
is recognized suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on curves and apply the brakes or
accelerator pedal if necessary.
5-102
Your vehicle speed can be reduced
due to a vehicle in the adjacent lane.
Apply the accelerator pedal and
select the appropriate set speed.
Check to be sure that the road conditions permit safe operation of the
Smart Cruise Control.
On inclines
Lane changing
Detecting vehicles
OAE056103
OAE056104
• A vehicle which moves into your
lane from an adjacent lane cannot
be recognized by the sensor until it
is in the sensor's detection range.
• The radar may not detect immediately when a vehicle cuts in suddenly. Always pay attention to the
traffic, road and driving conditions.
• If a slower vehicle moves into your
lane, your speed may decrease to
maintain the distance to the vehicle
ahead.
• If a faster vehicle which moves into
your lane, your vehicle will accelerate to the set speed.
Some vehicles in your lane cannot
be recognized by the sensor:
- Narrow vehicles such as motorcycles or bicycles
- Vehicles offset to one side
- Slow-moving vehicles or suddendecelerating vehicles
- Stopped vehicles
- Vehicles with small rear profile
such as trailers with no loads
5-103
5
Driving your vehicle
OAE056102
• During uphill or downhill driving,
the Smart Cruise Control System
may not detect a moving vehicle in
your lane, and cause your vehicle
to accelerate to the set speed.
Also, the vehicle speed will rapidly
decrease when the vehicle ahead
is recognized suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on inclines and apply the brake or
accelerator pedal if necessary.
Driving your vehicle
A vehicle ahead cannot be recognized correctly by the sensor if any of
following occurs:
- When the vehicle is pointing
upwards due to overloading in the
luggage compartment
- While the steering wheel is operating
- When driving to one side of the
lane
- When driving on narrow lanes or
on curves
Apply the brake or accelerator pedal
if necessary.
5-104
OAE056108
OAE056109
• Your vehicle may accelerate when
a vehicle ahead of you disappears.
• When you are warned that the
vehicle ahead of you is not detected, drive with caution.
• When driving in stop-and-go traffic,
and a stopped vehicle in front of
you merges out of the lane, the
system may not immediately
detect the new vehicle that is now
in front of you. In this case, you
must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress
the brake pedal to reduce your
driving speed in order to maintain a
safe distance.
WARNING
OPD056040
• Always look out for pedestrians
when your vehicle is maintaining a
distance with the vehicle ahead.
• Always be cautious for vehicles
with higher height or vehicles carrying loads that sticks out from the
back of the vehicle.
5-105
5
Driving your vehicle
OAE056110
When using the Smart Cruise
Control take the following precautions:
• If an emergency stop is necessary, you must apply the
brakes. The vehicle cannot be
stopped at every emergency
situation by using the Smart
Cruise Control System.
• Keep a safe distance according to road conditions and
vehicle speed. If the vehicle to
vehicle distance is too close
during a high-speed driving, a
serious collision may result.
• Always maintain sufficient
braking distance and decelerate your vehicle by applying
the brakes if necessary.
• The Smart Cruise Control
System cannot recognize a
stopped vehicle, pedestrians or
an oncoming vehicle. Always
look ahead cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden
situations from occurring.
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
• Vehicles moving in front of
you with a frequent lane
change may cause a delay in
the system's reaction or may
cause the system to react to a
vehicle actually in an adjacent
lane. Always drive cautiously
to prevent unexpected and
sudden situations from occurring.
• Always be aware of the selected speed and vehicle to vehicle distance. The driver
should not solely rely on the
system but always pay attention to driving conditions and
control your vehicle speed.
• The Smart Cruise Control
System may not recognize
complex driving situations so
always pay attention to driving conditions and control
your vehicle speed.
5-106
NOTICE
The Smart Cruise Control System
may not operate temporarily due
to:
• Electrical interference
• Modifying the suspension
• Differences of tire abrasion or
tire pressure
• Installing different type of tires
i Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the device.
i Information
Radio frequency radiation exposure
information:
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for
an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed
and operated with minimum distance
of 8 in. (20 cm) between the radiator
(antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with
any other antenna or transmitter.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
Rocking the Vehicle
When hazardous driving elements
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud and sand, take the
below suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and keep a longer
braking distance.
• Avoid abrupt braking or steering.
• When your vehicle is stuck in snow,
mud, or sand, use second gear.
Accelerate slowly to avoid unnecessary wheel spin.
• Put sand, rock salt, tire chains or
other non-slip materials under the
wheels to provide additional traction while the vehicle becomes
stuck in ice, snow, or mud.
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between R (Reverse) and a forward gear.
Try to avoid spinning the wheels, and
do not race the engine.
To prevent transmission wear, wait
until the wheels stop spinning before
shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal while
the transmission is in gear. Slowly
spinning the wheels in forward and
reverse directions causes a rocking
motion that may free the vehicle.
WARNING
Downshifting with an automatic
transmission/dual clutch transmission while driving on slippery surfaces can cause an
accident. The sudden change in
tire speed could cause the tires
to skid. Be careful when downshifting on slippery surfaces.
WARNING
If the vehicle is stuck and
excessive wheel spin occurs,
the temperature in the tires can
increase very quickly. If the tires
become damaged, a tire blow
out or tire explosion can occur.
This condition is dangerous you and others may be injured.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle.
If you attempt to free the vehicle,
the vehicle can overheat quickly,
possibly causing an engine
compartment fire or other damage. Try to avoid spinning the
wheels as much as possible to
prevent overheating of either the
tires or the engine. DO NOT
allow the vehicle to spin the
wheels above 35 mph (56 km/h).
5-107
5
Driving your vehicle
Hazardous Driving Conditions
Driving your vehicle
i Information
The ESC system must be turned OFF
before rocking the vehicle.
NOTICE
If you are still stuck after rocking
the vehicle a few times, have the
vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle
to avoid engine overheating, possible damage to the transmission,
and tire damage. See "Towing" in
chapter 6.
Smooth Cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration.
5-108
Driving at Night
Driving in the Rain
Night driving presents more hazards
than driving in the daylight. Here are
some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance between you and other vehicles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's headlamps.
• Keep your headlamps clean and
properly aimed. Dirty or improperly
aimed headlamps will make it
much more difficult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlamps of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous. Here are a few things to
consider when driving in the rain or
on slick pavement:
• Slow down and allow extra following distance. A heavy rainfall
makes it harder to see and increases the distance needed to stop
your vehicle.
• Turn OFF your Cruise Control.
• Replace your windshield wiper
blades when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the
windshield.
• Tires should be properly maintained with at least 2/32nds of an
inch of tread depth. If your tires do
not have enough tread, making a
quick stop on wet pavement can
cause a skid and possibly lead to
an accident. See "Tire Tread" in
chapter 7.
• Turn on your headlamps to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
• If you believe your brakes may be
wet, apply them lightly while driving until normal braking operation
returns.
Hydroplaning
The risk of hydroplaning increases as the depth of tire tread
decreases, refer to "Tire Tread" in
chapter 7.
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
reduced.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine
oil
Driving at higher speeds on the highway consumes more fuel and is less
efficient than driving at a slower,
more moderate speed. Maintain a
moderate speed in order to conserve
fuel when driving on the highway.
Be sure to check both the engine
coolant level and the engine oil
before driving.
Drive belt
Highway Driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation, as specified.
Under-inflation may overheat or
damage the tires.
Do not install worn-out or damaged
tires, which may reduce traction or
adversely affect vehicle handling.
This could lead to sudden tire failure
that may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
A loose or damaged drive belt may
overheat the engine.
WARNING
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Make sure all
passengers are wearing their
seat belts.
i Information
Never over-inflate your tires above the
maximum inflation pressure, as specified on your tires.
5-109
5
Driving your vehicle
If the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough, your vehicle may
have little or no contact with the road
surface and actually ride on the
water. The best advice is SLOW
DOWN when the road is wet.
Driving in Flooded Areas
Driving your vehicle
WINTER DRIVING
The severe weather conditions of
winter quickly wear out tires and
cause other problems. To minimize
winter driving problems, you should
take the following suggestions:
Snow or Icy Conditions
You need to keep sufficient distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you.
Apply the brakes gently. Speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake
applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause the vehicle to skid.
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
or to install tire chains on your tires.
Always carry emergency equipment.
Some of the items you may want to
carry include tire chains, tow straps
or chains, a flashlight, emergency
flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables,
a window scraper, gloves, ground
cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.
5-110
Snow tires
Tire chains
WARNING
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle’s
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your
vehicle may be adversely affected.
If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure to use radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
The traction provided by snow tires
on dry roads may not be as high as
your vehicle's original equipment
tires. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
i Information
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.
OPD056072
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner than other types of tires, they
may be damaged by mounting some
types of tire chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tires is
recommended instead of tire chains.
Do not mount tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels; if
unavoidable use a wire type chain. If
tire chains must be used, use genuine HYUNDAI parts and install the
tire chain after reviewing the instructions provided with the tire chains.
Damage to your vehicle caused by
improper tire chain use is not covered by your vehicle manufacturer’s
warranty.
WARNING
CAUTION
If your vehicle has 225/40R18
size tires do not use tire chain;
they can damage your vehicle
(wheel, suspension and body).
• Install tire chains on both left and
right front tires. It should be noted
that installing tire chains on the
tires will provide a greater driving
force, but will not prevent side
skids.
• Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and
municipal regulations for possible
restrictions against their use.
Chain installation
When installing tire chains, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions and
mount them as tightly possible. Drive
slowly (less than 20 mph (30 km/h))
with chains installed. If you hear the
chains contacting the body or chassis, stop and tighten them. If they still
make contact, slow down until the
noise stops. Remove the tire chains
as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning Flasher and place a
triangular emergency warning device
behind the vehicle (if available).
Always place the vehicle in P (Park),
apply the parking brake and turn off
the engine before installing snow
chains.
5-111
5
Driving your vehicle
The use of tire chains may
adversely affect vehicle handling:
• Drive less than 20 mph
(30 km/h) or the chain manufacturer's recommended speed
limit, whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid
bumps, holes, sharp turns,
and other road hazards, which
may cause the vehicle to
bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked
wheel braking.
i Information
Driving your vehicle
NOTICE
- When using tire chains:
• Wrong size chains or improperly
installed chains can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body and wheels.
• Use SAE "S" class or wire
chains.
• If you hear noise caused by
chains contacting the body,
retighten the chain to prevent
contact with the vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage,
retighten the chains after driving
0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).
• Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with aluminum
wheels. If unavoidable, use a
wire type chain.
• Use wire chains less than 0.47
inch (12 mm) wide to prevent
damage to the chain’s connection.
5-112
Winter Precautions
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
cooling system. It is the only type of
coolant that should be used because
it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water
pump and prevents freezing. Be sure
to replace or replenish your coolant
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in chapter 7. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure
that its freezing point is sufficient for
the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
In some climates it is recommended
that a lower viscosity "winter weight"
oil be used during cold weather. See
chapter 8 for recommendations. If
you aren't sure what weight oil you
should use, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on
the battery system. Visually inspect
the battery and cables as described
in chapter 7. The level of charge in
your battery can be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
service station.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Do not let your parking brake
freeze
Inspect your spark plugs as
described in chapter 7 and replace
them if necessary. Also check all
ignition wiring and components to be
sure they are not cracked, worn or
damaged in any way.
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position. This is most likely to happen
when there is an accumulation of
snow or ice around or near the rear
brakes or if the brakes are wet. If
there is a risk the parking brake may
freeze, apply it only temporarily while
you put the gear selector lever in P
and block the rear wheels so the car
cannot roll. Then release the parking
brake.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
Do not let ice and snow accumulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering. When
driving in severe winter conditions
where this may happen, you should
periodically check underneath the
car to be sure the movement of the
front wheels and the steering components is not obstructed.
Placement of foreign object or materials which prevent cooling of the
engine, in the engine compartment,
may cause a failure or combustion.
The manufacturer is not responsible
for the damage caused by such
placement.
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing,
squirt an approved de-icer fluid or
glycerine into the key opening. If a
lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove
the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,
you may be able to thaw it out by
using a heated key. Handle the heated key with care to avoid injury.
5-113
5
Driving your vehicle
To keep the water in the window
washer system from freezing, add an
approved window washer anti-freeze
solution in accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
most auto parts outlets. Do not use
engine coolant or other types of antifreeze as these may damage the
paint finish.
Don't place foreign objects or
materials in the engine compartment
Driving your vehicle
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
Two labels on your driver's door sill
show how much weight your vehicle
was designed to carry: the Tire and
Loading Information Label and the
Certification Label.
Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms
for determining your vehicle’s weight
ratings, from the vehicle's specifications and the Certification Label:
Cargo Weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passengers.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
Base Curb Weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the Certification Label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the Certification Label
located on the driver’s door sill.
Vehicle Curb Weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.
5-114
Tire Loading Information Label
■ Type A
The label located on the driver's door
sill gives the original tire size, cold
tire pressures recommended for your
vehicle, the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and vehicle
capacity weight.
Vehicle capacity weight
■ Type B
849 lbs. (385 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
Seating capacity
Total : 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
■ Type C
Cargo capacity
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.
OPD067040N/OPD067038N/OPD067037N
5-115
Driving your vehicle
Towing capacity
5
Driving your vehicle
Steps for determining correct
load limit
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5-116
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
WARNING
Do not overload the vehicle as
there is a limit to the total
weight, or load limit, including
occupants and cargo, the vehicle can carry. Overloading can
shorten the life of the vehicle. If
the GVWR or the GAWR is
exceeded, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change
the handling of your vehicle.
These could cause you to lose
control and result in an accident.
Example 1
≥
Maximum Load
(1400 lbs.)
(635 kg)
+
Cargo Weight
(1100 lbs.)
(499 kg)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs. × 2 = 300 lbs.)
(68 kg × 2 = 136 kg)
Example 2
≥
5
Cargo Weight
(650 lbs.)
(295 kg)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs. × 5 = 750 lbs.)
(68 kg × 5 = 340 kg)
Driving your vehicle
Maximum Load
(1400 lbs.)
(635 kg)
+
Example 3
≥
Maximum Load
(1400 lbs.)
(635 kg)
+
Passenger Weight
(172 lbs. × 5 = 860 lbs.)
(78 kg × 5 = 390 kg)
Cargo Weight
(540 lbs.)
(245 kg)
5-117
Driving your vehicle
Certification label
The total weight of the vehicle,
including all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out
the actual loads on your front and
rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Be
sure to spread out your load equally
on both sides of the centerline.
OBH059070
The certification label is located on
the driver’s door sill at the center pillar and shows the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel and cargo.
This label also tells you the maximum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
5-118
WARNING
Overloading
• Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle
and vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
affect your vehicle’s handling
and braking ability, and cause
an accident.
• Do not overload your vehicle.
Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your
vehicle’s tires and possible
tire failure, increased stopping distances and poor vehicle handling-all of which may
result in a crash.
TRAILER TOWING
NOTICE
Overloading your vehicle may
cause damage. Repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do
not overload your vehicle.
WARNING
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
If you carry items inside your
vehicle (e.g., suitcases, tools,
packages, or anything else),
they are moving as fast as the
vehicle. If you have to stop or
turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, the items will keep going
and can cause an injury if they
strike the driver or a passenger.
• Put items in the cargo area of
your vehicle. Try to spread the
weight evenly.
• Do not stack items, like suitcases, inside the vehicle
above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured
child restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure it.
5
Driving your vehicle
5-119
What to do in an emergency
Hazard Warning Flasher .......................................6-2
In Case of an Emergency While Driving.............6-2
If the Engine Stalls While Driving .................................6-2
If the Engine Stalls at a Crossroad or Crossing ........6-2
If you Have a Flat Tire While Driving ..........................6-3
If the Engine Will Not Start..................................6-3
If the Engine Doesn't Turn Over or Turns Over
Slowly ...................................................................................6-3
If the Engine Turns Over Normally but Doesn't
Start ......................................................................................6-3
If You Have a Flat Tire........................................6-14
Jack and Tools .................................................................6-14
Changing Tires .................................................................6-15
Towing ...................................................................6-20
Towing Service.................................................................6-20
Removable Towing Hook ...............................................6-21
Emergency Towing..........................................................6-22
Tie-down Hook................................................................6-23
Jump Starting..........................................................6-4
If the Engine Overheats........................................6-6
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).........6-8
Check Tire Pressure .........................................................6-8
Tire Pressure Monitoring System .................................6-9
Low Tire Pressure Telltale ............................................6-10
Low Tire Pressure LCD Display with Position
Indicator.............................................................................6-10
TPMS Malfunction Indicator ........................................6-11
Changing a Tire with TPMS..........................................6-12
6
What to do in an emergency
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
To turn the hazard warning flasher
on or off, press the hazard warning
flasher button. The button is located
in the center fascia panel. Both the
left and right turn signal lights will
flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
OPD066001
The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exercise extreme caution when approaching, overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
6-2
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
WHILE DRIVING
If the Engine Stalls While
Driving
• Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.
• Turn on your hazard warning flasher.
• Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or
seek other qualified assistance.
If the Engine Stalls at a
Crossroad or Crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroads or
crossing, if safe to do so, move the
shift lever to the N (Neutral) position
and then push the vehicle to a safe
location.
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If the Engine Doesn't Turn
Over or Turns Over Slowly
If the Engine Turns Over
Normally but Doesn't Start
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
• Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow down
while driving straight ahead. Do not
apply the brakes immediately or
attempt to pull off the road as this
may cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident. When the
vehicle has slowed to such a speed
that it is safe to do so, brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off
the road as far as possible and park
on firm, level ground. If you are on
a divided highway, do not park in
the median area between the two
traffic lanes.
• When the vehicle is stopped, press
the hazard warning flasher button,
move the shift lever into P (Park),
and apply the parking brake, and
place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
• Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
• When changing a flat tire, follow
the instructions provided later in
this chapter.
• Be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park). The engine
starts only when the shift lever is in
N (Neutral) or P (Park).
• Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
• Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate
the starter, the battery is drained.
Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. This could cause damage to
your vehicle. See instructions for
"Jump Starting" provided in this
chapter.
Check the fuel level and add fuel if
necessary.
If the engine still does not start, have
your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
What to do in an emergency
If you Have a Flat Tire While
Driving
6
CAUTION
Push or pull starting the vehicle
may cause the catalytic converter to overload which can
lead to damage to the emission
control system.
6-3
What to do in an emergency
JUMP STARTING
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Follow the jump
starting procedure in this section to
avoid serious injury or damage to
your vehicle. If in doubt about how to
properly jump start your vehicle, we
strongly recommend that you have a
service technician or towing service
do it for you.
WARNING
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH to you or bystanders,
always follow these precautions
when working near or handling
the battery:
Always read and follow
instructions
carefully
when handling a battery.
Wear eye protection
designed to protect the
eyes from acid splashes.
Keep all flames, sparks,
or smoking materials
away from the battery.
Hydrogen is always
present in battery cells,
is highly combustible,
and may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of
reach of children.
(Continued)
6-4
(Continued)
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is highly
corrosive. Do not allow
acid to contact your
eyes, skin or clothing.
If acid gets into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If acid
gets on your skin, thoroughly
wash the area. If you feel pain or
a burning sensation, get medical attention immediately.
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle if your battery is
frozen.
(Continued)
i Information
Pb
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose of the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulations.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to your vehicle:
• Only use a 12-volt power supply
(battery or jumper system) to
jump start your vehicle.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle by push-starting.
Jump starting procedure
1. Position the vehicles close enough
that the jumper cables will reach,
but do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in
the engine compartment at all
times, even when the vehicles are
turned off.
3. Turn off all electrical devices such
as radios, lights, air conditioning,
etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park)
and set the parking brakes. Turn
both vehicles OFF.
1VQA4001
4. Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illustration. First connect one jumper
cable to the red, positive (+)
jumper terminal of your vehicle
(1).
5. Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the red, positive
(+) battery/jumper terminal of the
assisting vehicle (2).
6. Connect the second jumper cable
to the black, negative (-) battery/
chassis ground of the assisting
vehicle (3).
6-5
What to do in an emergency
(Continued)
• NEVER attempt to recharge
the battery when the vehicle's
battery cables are connected
to the battery.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
NEVER touch these components with the engine running
or when the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
6
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
7. Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the black,
negative (-) chassis ground of
your vehicle (4).
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the correct battery or jumper terminals or
the correct ground. Do not lean
over the battery when making
connections.
8. Start the engine of the assisting
vehicle and let it run at approximately 2,000 rpm for a few minutes. Then start your vehicle.
If your vehicle will not start after a
few attempts, it probably requires
servicing. In this event please seek
qualified assistance. If the cause of
your battery discharging is not
apparent, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
6-6
Disconnect the jumper cables in the
exact reverse order you connected
them:
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from
the black, negative (-) chassis
ground of your vehicle (4).
2. Disconnect the other end of the
jumper cable from the black, negative (-) battery/chassis ground of
the assisting vehicle (3).
3. Disconnect the second jumper
cable from the red, positive (+)
battery/jumper terminal of the
assisting vehicle (2).
4. Disconnect the other end of the
jumper cable from the red, positive
(+) jumper terminal of your vehicle
(1).
If your temperature gage indicates
overheating, you experience a loss
of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine may be overheating. If this happens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (Park)
and set the parking brake. If the air
conditioning is ON, turn it OFF.
3. If engine coolant is running out
under the vehicle or steam is coming out from the hood, stop the
engine. Do not open the hood until
the coolant has stopped running
or the steaming has stopped. If
there is no visible loss of engine
coolant and no steam, leave the
engine running and check to be
sure the engine cooling fan is
operating. If the fan is not running,
turn the engine off.
WARNING
4. Check for coolant leaking from the
radiator, hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air conditioning had
been in use, it is normal for cold
water to be draining from it when
you stop.)
5. If engine coolant is leaking out,
stop the engine immediately and
call the nearest authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
Your
vehicle
is
equipped with a pressurized
coolant
reserve tank. NEVER
remove the engine
coolant reservoir tank/radiator
cap or the drain plug while the
engine and radiator are HOT.
Hot coolant and steam may
blow out under pressure, causing serious injury.
Turn the engine off and wait
until the engine cools down.
Use extreme care when removing the engine coolant reservoir
tank/radiator cap. Wrap a towel
or thick rag around it, and turn it
counterclockwise slowly to
release some of the pressure
from the system. Step back
while the pressure is released.
When you are sure all the pressure has been released, continue turning the cap counterclockwise to remove it.
6. If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to normal. Then, if coolant has been
lost, carefully add coolant to the
reservoir to bring the fluid level in
the reservoir up to the halfway
mark.
7. Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again,
call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
CAUTION
Serious loss of coolant indicates a leak in the cooling system and should be checked as
soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
6-7
What to do in an emergency
While the engine is
running, keep hands,
clothing and tools
away from the moving parts such as the
cooling fan and drive
belt to prevent serious injury.
WARNING
6
What to do in an emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
• The displayed tire pressure values
may differ from those measured
with a tire pressure gage.
• You can change the tire pressure
unit in the User Settings mode on
the cluster.
- psi, kpa, bar (Refer to the "User
Settings Mode" section in
chapter 3).
Check Tire Pressure
OPD066009
OPD067007L
OPD067005L
(1) Low Tire Pressure / TPMS
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(2) Low Tire Pressure /
Tire Pressure Monitor /
TPMS Malfunction Display
(shown on the cluster LCD display)
6-8
• You can check the tire pressure in
the Assist mode on the cluster.
Refer to the "LCD Display Mode"
section in chapter 3.
• A "Drive to display" message will
appear for the first few minutes of
driving after initial engine start up.
If the tire pressure is not displayed
after a few minutes of driving,
check the tire pressures.
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
WARNING
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label. A cold tire
means the vehicle has been sitting for
3 hours and driven for less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) in that 3 hour period.
Allow the tire to cool before measuring the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
6-9
What to do in an emergency
Over-inflation or under-inflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure that
may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
6
What to do in an emergency
NOTICE
If any of the below happens, have
the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
1. The Low Tire Pressure TPMS
Malfunction Indicator does not
illuminate for 3 seconds when
the ignition switch is placed to
the ON position or engine is
running.
2. The TPMS Malfunction Indicator
remains illuminated after blinking for approximately 1 minute.
3. The Low Tire Pressure LCD display remains illuminated
Low Tire Pressure
Telltale
Low Tire Pressure LCD
Display with Position Indicator
OPD067005L
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illuminated and the warning message is
displayed on the cluster LCD display,
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. The LCD position indicator will indicate which tire
is significantly under-inflated by illuminating the corresponding position
light.
6-10
If any of your tire pressures are indicated as being low, immediately
reduce your speed, avoid hard cornering, and anticipate increased
stopping distances. You should stop
and check your tires as soon as possible. Inflate the tires to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s placard or tire inflation pressure
label located on the driver's side center pillar outer panel.
If you cannot reach a service station
or if the tire cannot hold the newly
added air, replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire.
The Low Tire Pressure LCD position
indicator will remain on and the
TPMS Malfunction Indicator may
blink for one minute and then remain
illuminated until you have the low
pressure tire repaired and replaced
on the vehicle.
NOTICE
The spare tire is not equipped with
a tire pressure sensor.
CAUTION
Low pressure damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pressure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
The TPMS Malfunction
Indicator will illuminate after it blinks
for approximately one minute when
there is a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System.
Have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible.
NOTICE
If there is a malfunction with the
TPMS, the individual tire pressures in the cluster LCD display
will not be available. Have the system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
6-11
What to do in an emergency
In winter or cold weather, the
Low Tire Pressure Telltale may
be illuminated if the tire pressure was adjusted to the recommended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunctioning because the decreased
temperature leads to a proportional lowering of tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tire inflation
pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
TPMS Malfunction
Indicator
WARNING
6
What to do in an emergency
NOTICE
The TPMS Malfunction Indicator
may illuminate after blinking for
one minute if the vehicle is near
electric power supply cables or
radio transmitters such as police
stations, government and public
offices, broadcasting stations,
military installations, airports,
transmitting towers, etc.
Additionally, the TPMS Malfunction
Indicator may illuminate if snow
chains are used or electronic
devices such as computers, chargers, remote starters, navigation,
etc. This may interfere with normal
operation of the TPMS.
Changing a Tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure and LCD position indicator
will come on. Have the flat tire
repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible or
replace the flat tire with the spare
tire.
CAUTION
Never use a puncture-repairing
agent not approved by HYUNDAI
dealer to repair and/or inflate a
low pressure tire. Tire sealant
not approved by HYUNDAI dealer may damage the tire pressure
sensor.
The spare tire does not come with a
tire pressure monitoring sensor.
When the low pressure tire or the flat
tire is replaced with the spare tire,
the Low Tire Pressure LCD position
indicator will remain on. Also, the
TPMS Malfunction Indicator will illuminate after blinking for one minute if
the vehicle is driven at speed above
15.5 mph (25 km/h) for approximately 20 minutes.
6-12
Once the original tire equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring sensor is
reinflated to the recommended pressure and reinstalled on the vehicle,
the Low Tire Pressure LCD position
indicator and TPMS Malfunction
Indicator will go off within a few minutes of driving.
If the indicators do not disappear
after a few minutes, please visit an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem (except for
the spare tire). You must use TPMS
specific wheels. It is recommended
that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
WARNING
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors such as nails or road
debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually with light
force, and slowly move to a
safe position off the road.
WARNING
i Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
components may interfere with
the system's ability to warn the
driver of low tire pressure conditions and/or TPMS malfunctions. Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void
the warranty for that portion of
the vehicle.
6-13
What to do in an emergency
You may not be able identify a tire
with low pressure by simply looking
at it. Always use a good quality tire
pressure gage to measure the tire's
inflation pressure. Please note that a
tire that is hot (from being driven) will
have a higher pressure measurement than a tire that is cold.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
hour period.
Allow the tire to cool before measuring the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
6
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
WARNING
Jack and Tools
Changing a tire can be dangerous. Follow the instructions in
this section when changing a
tire to reduce the risk of serious
injury or death.
CAUTION
OLF064031N
Be careful as you use the jack
handle to stay clear of the flat
end. The flat end has sharp
edges that could cause cuts.
OLF064004N
➀ Jack handle
② Jack
③ Wheel lug nut wrench
The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug
nut wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment under the luggage box
cover.
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
6-14
Turn the winged hold down bolt
counterclockwise to remove the
spare tire.
Store the spare tire in the same compartment by turning the winged hold
down bolt clockwise.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from "rattling", store them in their
proper location.
Changing Tires
WARNING
If it is hard to loosen the tire holddown wing bolt by hand, you can
loosen it easily using the jack handle.
1. Put the jack handle (1) inside of
the tire hold-down wing bolt.
2. Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise with the jack
handle.
Follow these steps to change your
vehicle's tire:
1. Park on a level, firm surface.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
or into R (Reverse) if equipped
with a manual transmission, apply
the parking brake, and place the
ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF
position.
3. Press the hazard warning flasher
button.
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
tire diagonally opposite of the tire
you are changing.
6-15
What to do in an emergency
OLF064005
A vehicle can slip or roll off of a
jack causing serious injury or
death to you or those nearby.
Take the following safety precautions:
• Never place any portion of
your body under a vehicle that
is supported by a jack.
• NEVER attempt to change a
tire in the lane of traffic.
ALWAYS move the vehicle
completely off the road on
level, firm ground away from
traffic before trying to change
a tire. If you cannot find a level,
firm place off the road, call a
towing service for assistance.
• Be sure to use the jack provided with the vehicle.
• ALWAYS place the jack on the
designated jacking positions
on the vehicle and NEVER on
the bumpers or any other part
of the vehicle for jacking support.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Keep children away from the
road and the vehicle.
6
What to do in an emergency
OPD067031L
OPDE066032
OPDE066033
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each in the
order shown above, but do not
remove any lug nuts until the tire
has been raised off of the ground.
7. Place the jack at the designated
jacking position under the frame
closest to the tire you are changing. The jacking positions are
plates welded to the frame with
two notches. Never jack at any
other position or part of the vehicle. Doing so may damage the
side seal molding or other parts of
the vehicle.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire clears the
ground. Make sure the vehicle is
stable on the jack.
6-16
NOTICE
OLF064013
• Check the tire pressure as soon
as possible after installing a
spare tire. Adjust it to the recommended pressure.
• Check and tighten the wheel lug
nuts after driving over 30 mph
(50 km) if tires are replaced.
Recheck the tire wheel lug nuts
after driving over 620 mph (1,000
km).
If you have a tire gage, check the tire
pressure (see "Tires and Wheels" in
chapter 8 for tire pressure instructions.). If the pressure is lower or
higher than recommended, drive
slowly to the nearest service station
and adjust it to the recommended
pressure. Always reinstall the valve
cap after checking or adjusting tire
pressure. If the cap is not replaced,
air may leak from the tire. If you lose
a valve cap, buy another and install it
as soon as possible. After changing
tires, secure the flat tire and return
the jack and tools to their proper storage locations.
What to do in an emergency
9. Loosen the lug nuts with the wheel
lug nut wrench and remove them
with your fingers. Remove the
wheel from the studs and lay it flat
on the ground out of the way.
Remove any dirt or debris from
the studs, mounting surfaces, and
wheel.
10. Install the spare tire onto the
studs of the hub.
11. Tighten the lug nuts with your fingers onto the studs with the
smaller end of the lug nuts closest to the wheel.
12. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
13. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown. Double-check each lug
nut until they are tight. After
changing tires, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer tighten the
lug nuts to their proper torque as
soon as possible. The wheel lug
nut should be tightened to
79~94 lbf·ft (11~13 kgf·m).
6
6-17
What to do in an emergency
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the studs and lug nuts. Make
certain during tire changing that
the same nuts that were
removed are reinstalled. If you
have to replace your lug nuts
make sure they have metric
threads to avoid damaging the
studs and ensure the wheel is
properly secured to the hub.
Consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for assistance.
If any of the equipment such as the
jack, lug nuts, studs, or other equipment is damaged or in poor condition, do not attempt to change the
tire and call for assistance.
6-18
Use of compact spare tires
Compact spare tires are designed for
emergency use only. Drive carefully
on the compact spare tire and
always follow the safety precautions.
WARNING
To prevent compact spare tire
failure and loss of control possibly resulting in an accident:
• Use the compact spare tire
only in an emergency.
• NEVER operate your vehicle
over 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Do not exceed the vehicle's
maximum load rating or the
load carrying capacity shown
on the sidewall of the compact spare tire.
• Do not use the compact spare
tire continuously. Repair or
replace the original tire as
soon as possible to avoid failure of the compact spare tire.
When driving with the compact spare
tire mounted to your vehicle:
• Check the tire pressure after
installing the compact spare tire.
The compact spare tire should be
inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the compact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn compact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
NOTICE
When the original tire and wheel
are repaired and reinstalled on the
vehicle, the lug nut torque must be
set correctly. The correct lug nut
tightening torque is 79~94 lbf·ft
(11~13 kgf·m).
CAUTION
Jack label
■ Example
OHYK065011
The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transmission or move
the shift lever to the P (Park) position on vehicles with automatic
transmission/dual clutch transmission.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacture
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
6-19
What to do in an emergency
To prevent damaging the compact spare tire and your vehicle:
• Drive slowly enough for the
road conditions to avoid all
hazards, such as a potholes
or debris.
• Avoid driving over obstacles.
The compact spare tire diameter is smaller than the diameter of a conventional tire and
reduces the ground clearance
approximately 1 inch (25 mm).
• Do not use tire chains on the
compact spare tire. Because
of the smaller size, a tire chain
will not fit properly.
• Do not use the compact spare
tire on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow
tires, wheel covers or trim
rings be used with the compact spare wheel.
6
What to do in an emergency
TOWING
Towing Service
dolly
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground
(without dollies) and the front wheels
off the ground. If any of the loaded
wheels or suspension components
are damaged or the vehicle is being
towed with the front wheels on the
ground, use a towing dolly under the
front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
CAUTION
• Do not tow the vehicle with the
front wheels on the ground as
this may cause damage to the
vehicle.
OPD066019
• Do not tow with sling-type
dolly
equipment. Use a wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
OPD066018
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial
tow-truck
service.
Proper lifting and towing procedures
are necessary to prevent damage to
the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies
or flatbed is recommended.
6-20
OPD066020
WARNING
Removable Towing Hook
■ Front
OPDE066021
■ Rear
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies:
1.Place the ignition switch in the
ACC position.
2.Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
3.Release the parking brake.
CAUTION
Failure to place the shift lever in
N (Neutral) when being towed
with the front wheels on the
ground can cause internal damage to the transaxle.
OPD067035L
1. Open the liftgate, and remove the
towing hook from the tool case.
What to do in an emergency
If your vehicle is equipped with
a rollover sensor, place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF or
ACC position when the vehicle
is being towed. The side impact
and curtain air bag may deploy
if the sensor detects the situation as a rollover.
6
OPD067023L
2. Remove the hole cover pressing
the lower part of the cover on the
front or rear bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.
6-21
What to do in an emergency
Emergency Towing
■ Front
OPDE066022
■ Rear
OPD067026L
If towing is necessary, we recommend you have it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
6-22
If a towing service is not available in
an emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency towing hook at the front (or rear) of the
vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle with a cable or chain. A
driver must be in the vehicle to steer
it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speeds.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
Always follow these emergency towing precautions:
• Place the ignition switch in the
ACC position so the steering
wheel is not locked. (if equipped)
• Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Depress the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will
have reduced braking performance.
• More steering effort will be
required because the power steering system will be disabled.
• Use a vehicle heavier than your
own to tow your vehicle.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other frequently.
• Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady
and even force.
CAUTION
• Use a towing cable or chain less
than 16 feet (5 m) long. Attach a
white or red cloth (about 12 inch
(30 cm) wide) in the middle of the
cable or chain for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so the towing cable
or chain remains tight during towing.
• Before towing, check the automatic transaxle/dual clutch transmission for fluid leaks under your vehicle. If the automatic transaxle/dual
clutch transmission fluid is leaking,
flatbed equipment or a towing dolly
must be used.
WARNING
Do not use the tie-down hook(s)
for towing purposes. If the tiedown hook(s) are used for towing, the tie-down hook(s) or
bumper will be damaged and
this could lead to serious injury.
What to do in an emergency
OTL065029
To avoid damage to your vehicle
and vehicle components when
towing:
• Always pull straight ahead
when using the towing hooks.
Do not pull from the side or at
a vertical angle.
• Do not use the towing hooks to
pull a vehicle out of mud, sand
or other conditions from which
the vehicle cannot be driven
out under its own power.
• Limit the vehicle speed to
10 mph (15 km/h) and drive
less than 1 mile (1.5 km) when
towing to avoid serious damage to the automatic transaxle/
dual clutch transmission.
Tie-down Hook
6
6-23
Maintenance
Engine Compartment .............................................7-3
Maintenance Services ...........................................7-4
Engine Coolant .....................................................7-23
Checking the Engine Coolant Level............................7-23
Changing Engine Coolant ..............................................7-26
Owner's Responsibility.....................................................7-4
Owner Maintenance Precautions..................................7-4
Brake/Clutch Fluid ...............................................7-27
Owner Maintenance ..............................................7-5
Checking the Brake/Clutch Fluid Level .....................7-27
Owner Maintenance Schedule .......................................7-6
Washer Fluid.........................................................7-28
Scheduled Maintenance Services........................7-7
Checking the Washer Fluid Level................................7-28
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Nu 2.0 GDI) ..............7-8
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions
(Nu 2.0 GDI) ......................................................................7-11
Normal Maintenance Schedule
(Gamma 1.6 T-GDI) .........................................................7-13
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions
(Gamma 1.6 T-GDI) .........................................................7-16
Parking Brake .......................................................7-28
Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items..7-18
Engine Oil ..............................................................7-21
Blade Inspection ..............................................................7-32
Blade Replacement .........................................................7-32
Filter Replacement..........................................................7-29
Climate Control Air Filter ....................................7-30
Filter Inspection...............................................................7-30
Wiper Blades.........................................................7-32
Battery...................................................................7-35
For Best Battery Service ..............................................7-36
Battery Recharging ........................................................7-36
Reset Features.................................................................7-37
Maintenance
Checking the Engine Oil Level ....................................7-21
Checking the Engine Oil and Filter.............................7-22
Checking the Parking Brake.........................................7-28
Air Cleaner ............................................................7-29
7
Tires and Wheels .................................................7-38
Light Bulbs ............................................................7-67
Tire Care............................................................................7-38
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures...........7-39
Check Tire Inflation Pressure ......................................7-40
Tire Rotation.....................................................................7-40
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............................7-41
Tire Replacement ............................................................7-42
Wheel Replacement ........................................................7-43
Tire Traction .....................................................................7-43
Tire Maintenance ............................................................7-43
Tire Sidewall Labeling ....................................................7-43
Tire Terminology and Definitions................................7-47
All Season Tires...............................................................7-50
Summer Tires ...................................................................7-50
Snow Tires ........................................................................7-51
Radial-Ply Tires ...............................................................7-51
Low Aspect Ratio Tires..................................................7-51
Headlamp, Parking Lamp, Daytime Running Light,
Turn Signal Lamp and Side Marker ............................7-67
Side Repeater Lamp Replacement ..............................7-70
Rear Combination Light Bulb Replacement ..............7-71
High Mounted Stop Lamp Replacement....................7-75
License Plate Light Bulb Replacement ......................7-76
Interior Light Bulb Replacement .................................7-76
Fuses......................................................................7-53
7
Instrument Panel Fuse Replacement..........................7-54
Engine Compartment Panel Fuse Replacement.......7-55
Fuse/Relay Panel Description......................................7-57
Appearance care ..................................................7-78
Exterior Care ....................................................................7-78
Interior Care .....................................................................7-82
Emission Control System ....................................7-85
Crankcase Emission Control System ..........................7-85
Evaporative Emission Control System Including
Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)............7-85
Exhaust Emission Control System ..............................7-86
California Perchlorate Notice.............................7-89
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ Gamma 1.6 T-GDI
1. Engine oil filler cap
2. Engine oil dipstick
3. Brake/Clutch fluid reservoir
4. Battery
5. Fuse box
6. Air cleaner
7. Engine coolant reservoir
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
9. Engine coolant reservoir cap
10. Radiator cap
The actual engine compartment in the
vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OPD076002/OPD077098L
7-3
Maintenance
■ Nu 2.0 GDI
7
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection procedures.
We recommend you have your vehicle maintained and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An
authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets
HYUNDAI's high service quality
standards and receives technical
support from HYUNDAI in order to
provide you with a high level of service satisfaction.
Owner's Responsibility
Maintenance service and record
retention are the owner's responsibility.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this information to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle warranties.
7-4
Detailed warranty information is provided in your Owner's Handbook &
Warranty Information booklet.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
Owner Maintenance
Precautions
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury. This
chapter provides instructions only for
the maintenance items that are easy
to perform. Several procedures can
be done only by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer with special tools.
Your vehicle should not be modified
in any way. Such modifications may
adversely affect the performance,
safety or durability of your vehicle
and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle.
Certain modifications may also be in
violation of regulations established by
the U.S. Department of Transportation
and other federal or state agencies.
NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Owner's Handbook &
Warranty Information booklet provided with the vehicle. If you're
unsure about any service or maintenance procedure, have it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
WARNING
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be performed by the owner or an authorized HYUNDAI dealer at the frequencies indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your dealer as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance vehicle
checks are generally not covered by
warranties and you may be charged
for labor, parts and lubricants used.
Maintenance
Performing maintenance work
on a vehicle can be dangerous.
If you lack sufficient knowledge
and experience or the proper
tools and equipment to do the
work, have it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
ALWAYS follow these precautions for performing maintenance work:
• Park your vehicle on level
ground, move the shift lever
into the P (Park, for automatic
transmission vehicle) position
or neutral (for manual transmission vehicle), apply the
parking brake, place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF
position.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Block the tires (front and
back) to prevent the vehicle
from moving.
Remove loose clothing or jewelry that can become entangled in moving parts.
• If you must run the engine
during maintenance, do so
out doors or in an area with
plenty of ventilation.
• Keep flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the
battery and fuel-related parts.
7
7-5
Maintenance
Owner Maintenance Schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check the coolant level in the
engine coolant reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Check the for low or under-inflated
tires.
WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. This may result in
coolant being blown out of the
opening and cause serious
burns and other injuries.
7-6
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice if there is any
increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or
change in its straight-ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or "pulls" to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or "hard-to-push" brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transmission
occurs, check the transmission
fluid level.
• Check the automatic transmission/
dual clutch transmission P (Park)
function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the brake lights,
turn signals and hazard warning
flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare for tires
that are worn, show uneven wear,
or are damaged.
• Check for loose wheel lug nuts.
At least twice a year:
(i.e., every Spring and Autumn)
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and hood
hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weather
strips.
• Lubricate door checker.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transmission linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule
if the vehicle is usually operated where
none of the following conditions apply.
If any of the following conditions apply,
you must follow the Maintenance
Under Severe Usage Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or
sandy areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in
cold temperatures and/or extremely humid climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy
city traffic during hot weather
above 90°F (32°C).
For additional information or assistance see your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
7-7
Maintenance
• Check radiator, heater and air conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windshield washer spray
and wiper operation. Clean wiper
blades with a clean cloth dampened with washer a fluid.
• Check headlamp alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the seat belts for wear and
function.
At least once a year:
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
SERVICES
7
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Nu 2.0 GDI)
MAINTENANCE Months
12
INTERVALS
Miles×1,000 7.5
MAINTENANCE
Km×1,000
12
ITEM
Rotate tires
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
108 120 132 144 156 168
15
22.5
30
37.5
45
52.5
60
67.5
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
108 120 132 144 156 168
Engine oil and engine oil filter
R
R
R
R
Fuel additives *
R
75
82.5
90
180
97.5 105 112.5
180
Rotate tires every 7,500 miles
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
I
I
R
Add fuel additives every 7,500 miles or 12 months
1
Air cleaner filter
I
I
R
I
I
R
I
I
R
I
I
R
At first, inspect at 60,000 miles or 72 months.
Thereafter, inspect every 15,000 miles or 24 months
Drive belts *2
Spark plugs
Replace every 97,500 miles
Vapor hose, fuel filler cap and fuel tank
Vacuum hose
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Fuel tank air filter *
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Fuel filter *3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3
I
I : Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*2 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.
*3 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of
power, hard starting problem, etc. replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
7-8
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Nu 2.0 GDI) (CONT)
MAINTENANCE Months
12
INTERVALS
Miles×1,000 7.5
MAINTENANCE
Km×1,000
12
ITEM
Fuel lines, hoses and connections
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
108 120 132 144 156 168
15
22.5
30
37.5
45
52.5
60
67.5
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
108 120 132 144 156 168
I
75
82.5
I
90
180
97.5 105 112.5
180
I
At first, replace at 120,000 miles or 10 years :
Thereafter, replace every 30,000 miles or 24 months
Engine coolant
Battery condition
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake lines, hoses and connections
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Parking brake
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Disc brakes and pads
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Driveshaft and boots
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Suspension mounting bolts
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Air conditioner refrigerant
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Air conditioner compressor
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Climate control air filter
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
I : Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
7-9
Maintenance
Brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
I
7
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Nu 2.0 GDI) (CONT)
MAINTENANCE Months
12
INTERVALS
Miles×1,000 7.5
MAINTENANCE
Km×1,000
12
ITEM
Dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
108 120 132 144 156 168
15
22.5
30
37.5
45
52.5
60
67.5
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
108 120 132 144 156 168
Manual transmission fluid (if equipped)
90
I
I
I
I
I
180
97.5 105 112.5
180
No check, No service required
I
I
I
I
I
I : Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
7-10
82.5
I
Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)
Exhaust pipe and muffler
75
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions (Nu 2.0 GDI)
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer
to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
Engine oil and filter
R
Every 3,750 miles or 6 months
A, B, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J, K
Air cleaner filter
R
More frequently
C, E
Spark plugs
R
More frequently
A, B, H, I, K
Automatic transmission fluid
(if equipped)
R
Every 60,000 miles
A, C, E, F, G, I
Dual clutch transmission fluid
(if equipped)
R
Every 75,000 miles
C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J
Manual transmission fluid
(if equipped)
R
Every 75,000 miles
C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J
Front brake disc/pads, calipers
I
More frequently
C, D, G, H
Rear brake shoes or disc/pads
I
More frequently
C, D, G, F
7-11
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE ITEM
7
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
Parking brake
I
More frequently
C, D, G, H
Steering gear box, linkage & boots/
lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball
joint
I
More frequently
C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Drive shafts and boots
I
Every 3,750 miles or 6 months
C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
R
More frequently
C, E
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Severe Driving Conditions
A - Repeatedly driving short distances of less than 5 miles
(8 km) in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km)
in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C- Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or saltspread roads
D- Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
7-12
E - Driving in sandy areas
F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)
G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H- Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle
towing
J - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI)
MAINTENANCE Months
12
INTERVALS
Miles×1,000 6
MAINTENANCE
Km×1,000
10
ITEM
Rotate tires
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
108 120 132 144 156 168
180
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
84
90
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100 110 120 130 140
150
Engine oil and engine oil filter
R
R
R
R
Fuel additives *
R
I
I
R
I
I
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
I
I
R
I
I
R
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I : Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*2 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.
*3 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of
power, hard starting problem, etc. replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
7-13
Maintenance
Replace every 42,000 miles
I
Vapor hose, fuel filler cap and fuel tank
Fuel tank air filter *3
R
At first, inspect at 60,000 miles or 72 months.
Thereafter, inspect every 12,000 miles or 24 months
Spark plugs
Vacuum hose
78
Add fuel additives every 6,000 miles or 12 months
Drive belts *2
Intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
72
Rotate tires every 6,000 miles
1
Air cleaner filter
66
7
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI) (CONT)
MAINTENANCE Months
12
INTERVALS
Miles×1,000 6
MAINTENANCE
Km×1,000
10
ITEM
3
Fuel filter *
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
108 120 132 144 156 168
180
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
84
90
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100 110 120 130 140
150
I
I
Fuel lines, hoses and connections
I
I
I
Valve clearance *4
66
I
72
78
I
I
I
I
Inspect every 60,000 miles or 72 months
At first, replace at 120,000 miles or 10 years :
Thereafter, replace every 30,000 miles or 24 months
Engine coolant
Battery condition
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake lines, hoses and connections
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Parking brake
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Disc brakes and pads
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I : Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*3 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of
power, hard starting problem, etc. replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*4 : Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. Have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer perform the operation.
7-14
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI) (CONT)
MAINTENANCE Months
12
INTERVALS
Miles×1,000 6
MAINTENANCE
Km×1,000
10
ITEM
Driveshaft and boots
I
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
108 120 132 144 156 168
180
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
84
90
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100 110 120 130 140
150
66
72
78
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Suspension mounting bolts
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Air conditioner refrigerant
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Climate control air filter
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
I
I
I
Dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
I
Manual transmission fluid (if equipped)
I
Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)
Exhaust pipe and muffler
I
I
I
I
No check, No service required
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I : Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
Maintenance
Air conditioner compressor
7
7-15
Maintenance
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI)
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer
to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
Engine oil and filter
R
Every 3,000 miles or 6 months
A, B, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J, K
Air cleaner filter
R
More frequently
C, E
Spark plugs
R
More frequently
A, B, H, I, K
Automatic transmission fluid
(if equipped)
R
Every 60,000 miles
A, C, E, F, G, I
Dual clutch transmission fluid
(if equipped)
R
Every 72,000 miles
C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J
Manual transmission fluid
(if equipped)
R
Every 72,000 miles
C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J
Front brake disc/pads, calipers
I
More frequently
C, D, G, H
Rear brake shoes or disc/pads
I
More frequently
C, D, G, F
MAINTENANCE ITEM
7-16
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
Parking brake
I
More frequently
C, D, G, H
Steering gear box, linkage & boots/
lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball
joint
I
More frequently
C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Drive shafts and boots
I
Every 3,000 miles or 6 months
C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
R
More frequently
C, E
MAINTENANCE ITEM
A - Repeatedly driving short distances of less than 5 miles
(8 km) in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km)
in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C- Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or saltspread roads
D- Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E - Driving in sandy areas
F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)
G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H- Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle
towing
J - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
7-17
Maintenance
Severe Driving Conditions
7
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine Oil and Filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the
vehicle is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter
changes are required.
Drive Belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil
saturation and replace if necessary.
Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and
adjusted as necessary.
Fuel Filter
A clogged-up fuel filter may limit the
vehicle driving speed, damage the
emission system, and cause the
hard starting. When a considerable
amount of foreign substances are
accumulated in the fuel tank, the fuel
filter should be replaced.
Upon installing a new fuel filter, operate the engine for several minutes,
and check the connections for any
leakages. Fuel filters should be
installed by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
7-18
Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and
Connections
Vacuum Crankcase Ventilation
Hoses (if equipped)
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and damage. Have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately.
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical
damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and
excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be
paid to examine those hose surfaces
nearest to high heat sources, such
as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to ensure
that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp
edges or moving component which
might cause heat damage or
mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are
secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced
immediately if there is any evidence
of deterioration or damage.
Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler
Cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure a new vapor
hose or fuel filler cap is correctly
replaced.
Air Cleaner Filter
A genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter
is recommended when the filter is
replaced.
Spark Plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.
Cooling System
Engine Coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.
Automatic transmission fluid should
not be checked under normal usage
conditions. But in severe conditions,
the fluid should be changed at an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer in
accordance to the scheduled maintenance at the beginning of this chapter.
NOTICE
Automatic transmission fluid
color is red when new.
As the vehicle is driven, the automatic transmission fluid will begin
to look darker. This is a normal
condition and you should not
judge the need to replace the fluid
based upon the changed color.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transmission
malfunction and failure. Use
only the specified automatic
transmission fluid (refer to
"Recommended Lubricants and
Capacities" in chapter 8).
Dual Clutch Transmission
Fluid (if equipped)
Inspect the dual clutch transmission
fluid according to the maintenance
schedule.
Manual Transmission Fluid
(if equipped)
Inspect the manual transmission
fluid according to the maintenance
schedule.
7-19
Maintenance
Check cooling system components,
such as radiator, coolant reservoir,
hoses and connections for leakage
and damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
(if equipped)
7
Maintenance
Brake Hoses and Lines
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler
Drive Shafts and Boots
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,
muffler and hangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Start the engine
and listen carefully for any exhaust
gas leakage. Tighten connections or
replace parts as necessary.
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Brake/Clutch Fluid
Check the brake/clutch fluid level in
the brake/clutch fluid reservoir. The
level should be between the MIN and
the MAX marks on the side of the
reservoir. Use only hydraulic
brake/clutch fluid conforming to DOT
3 or DOT 4 specification.
Parking Brake
Inspect the parking brake system
including the parking brake pedal
and cables.
Brake Discs, Pads, Calipers
and Rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
7-20
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Suspension Mounting Bolts
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
Steering Gear Box, Linkage &
Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint
With the vehicle stopped and the
engine off, check for excessive freeplay in the steering wheel. Check the
linkage for bends or damage. Check
the dust boots and ball joints for
deterioration, cracks, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and damage.
ENGINE OIL
■ 1.6 T-GDI
Checking the Engine Oil Level
OPD076008
OPDE076067
■ 2.0 GDI
6. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F and L.
Maintenance
1. Follow all of the oil manufacturer's
precautions.
2. Be sure the vehicle is on the level
ground in P (Park) with the parking brake set. If possible, block the
wheels.
3. Turn the engine on and allow the
engine to reach normal operating
temperature.
4. Turn the engine off and wait about
five minutes for the oil to return to
the oil pan.
5. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
OPD077007L
7. If it is near or at L, add enough oil
to bring the level to F.
Use only the specified engine oil.
(refer to "Recommended Lubricants
and Capacities" in chapter 8).
7-21
7
Maintenance
NOTICE
To prevent damage to your
engine:
• Do not overfill with engine oil.
Add oil in small quantities and
recheck level to ensure engine
is not overfilled.
• Do not spill engine oil when
adding or changing engine oil.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil
from being spilled on engine
components. Wipe off spilled oil
immediately.
Checking the Engine Oil and
Filter
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Have engine oil and filter changed by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
according to the Maintenance
Schedule at the beginning of this
chapter.
7-22
WARNING
Engine oil contains chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects
and reproductive harm. Used
engine oil may cause irritation
or cancer of the skin if left in
contact with the skin for prolonged periods of time. Always
protect your skin by washing
your hands thoroughly with
soap and warm water as soon
as possible after handling used
oil.
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year-round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at
the beginning of the winter season
and before traveling to a colder climate.
Checking the Engine Coolant
Level
■ 1.6 T-GDI
The coolant level should be filled
between the F and the L marks on
the side of the coolant reservoir
when the engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
distilled (deionized) water to bring the
level to the F mark, but do not overfill.
If frequent additions are required, see
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for a
cooling system inspection.
Recommended engine coolant
OPD076011
■ 2.0 GDI
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
7-23
Maintenance
OPD077091L
• When adding coolant, use only distilled (deionized) water for your
vehicle and never mix hard water in
the coolant filled at the factory.
• An improper coolant mixture can
result in severe malfunction or
engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol
with phosphate based coolant to
prevent corrosion and freezing.
• Do not use alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified coolant.
7
Maintenance
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
For mixing percentage, refer to the
following table:
Ambient
Temperature
5°F (-15°C)
-13°F (-25°C)
-31°F (-35°C)
-49°F (-45°C)
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze
35
40
50
60
For 1.6 T-GDI
Make sure the coolant cap is
properly closed after refilling
coolant. Otherwise the engine
could be overheated while driving.
■ Engine room front view
Water
65
60
50
40
i Information
If in doubt about the mix ratio, a 50%
water and 50% antifreeze mix is the
easiest to mix together as it will be the
same quantity of each. It is suitable to
use for most temperature ranges of
- 31°F and higher.
7-24
(Continued)
WARNING
OPDE076071
2. Make sure that the tiny protrusions inside the coolant
cap is securely interlocked.
OTL075062
1. Check if the coolant cap label
is straight In front.
(Continued)
■ 1.6 T-GDI
WARNING
OPD076014
■ 2.0 GDI
Never remove the
engine coolant reservoir tank/radiator cap
or the drain plug
while the engine and
radiator are hot. Hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure, causing serious
injury.
The electric motor for
the cooling fan may
continue to operate
or start up when the
engine is not running
and can cause serious injury.
Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from the rotating fan
blades of the cooling fan.
Turn the engine off and wait
until the engine cools down.
Use extreme care when removing the engine coolant reservoir
tank/radiator cap. Wrap a thick
towel around it, and turn it
counterclockwise slowly to the
first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the
cap, using a thick towel, and
continue turning counterclockwise to remove it.
The electric motor for the cooling fan
is controlled by engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure and
vehicle speed. As the engine coolant
temperature decreases, the electric
motor will automatically shut off. This
is a normal condition. If your vehicle
is equipped with GDI, the electric
motor for the cooling fan may begin
to operate at any time and continue
to operate until you disconnect the
negative battery cable.
7-25
Maintenance
OPD077015L
WARNING
7
Maintenance
Changing Engine Coolant
Have coolant changed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.
WARNING
Do not use engine coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
Engine coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may
cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
Engine coolant may also cause
damage to paint and body trim.
7-26
NOTICE
To prevent damage to engine
parts, put a thick towel around the
radiator cap before refilling the
coolant to prevent the coolant
from overflowing into engine
parts, such as the alternator.
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID
Checking the Brake/Clutch
Fluid Level
If the level is low, add the specified
brake/clutch fluid to the MAX level.
The level will fall with accumulated
mileage. This is a normal condition
associated with the wear of the
brake/clutch linings. If the fluid level
is excessively low, have the brake/
clutch system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not allow brake/clutch fluid
to come in contact with your
eyes. If brake/clutch fluid comes
in contact with your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention.
• Do not allow brake/clutch fluid
to contact the vehicle’s body
paint, as paint damage will
result.
• Brake/clutch fluid, which has
been exposed to open air for an
extended time should NEVER be
used as its quality cannot be
guaranteed. It should be disposed of properly.
• Do not use the wrong kind of
brake/clutch fluid. A few drops
of mineral based oil, such as
engine oil, in your brake/clutch
system can damage brake/
clutch system parts.
i Information
Use only the specified brake/clutch
fluid (refer to "Recommended
Lubricants and Capacities" in chapter 8).
7-27
Maintenance
OPD077016L
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake/clutch fluid, clean
the area around the reservoir cap
thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch
fluid contamination.
If the brake/clutch system
requires frequent additions of
fluid this could indicate a leak in
the brake/clutch system. Have
the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
7
Maintenance
PARKING BRAKE
WASHER FLUID
Checking the Washer Fluid
Level
OPD077017L
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.
7-28
WARNING
To prevent serious injury or
death, take the following safety
precautions when using washer
fluid:
• Do not use engine coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
Engine coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may
cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident or damage to paint and body trim.
• Do not allow sparks or flames
to contact the washer fluid or
the washer fluid reservoir.
Washer fluid may contain alcohol and can be flammable.
• Do not drink washer fluid and
avoid contact with skin.
Washer fluid is harmful to
humans and animals.
• Keep washer fluid away from
children and animals.
Checking the Parking Brake
OPD056016
Check the stroke of the parking
brake by counting the number of
"clicks" heard while fully applying it
from the released position. Also, the
parking brake alone should securely
hold the vehicle on a fairly steep
grade. If the stroke is more or less
than specified, have the parking
brake adjusted by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Stroke : 6 clicks at a force of 44
lbs (20 kg, 196 N)
AIR CLEANER
4. Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips.
5. Check that the cover is firmly
installed.
Filter Replacement
i Information
OPD077021L
OPD077018L
OPD077104L
Be sure to insert the hinge (A) before
locking the cover with the cover
attaching clips.
OPD077022L
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
7-29
Maintenance
The air cleaner filter can be cleaned
for inspection using compressed air.
Do not attempt to wash or to rinse it,
as water will damage the filter.
If soiled, the air cleaner filter must be
replaced.
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover
attaching clips and open the cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
7
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
i Information
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the element more often than the usual recommended intervals (refer to
"Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions" in this chapter).
NOTICE
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
filter removed. This will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• Use HYUNDAI genuine parts.
Use of non-genuine parts could
damage the air flow sensor.
7-30
Filter Inspection
The climate control air filter should
be replaced according to the
Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle
is operated in severely air-polluted
cities or on dusty rough roads for a
long period, it should be inspected
more frequently and replaced earlier.
When you replace the climate control
air filter, replace it performing the following procedure, and be careful to
avoid damaging other components.
OPD076024
1. With the glove box open, remove
the stoppers on both sides to allow
the glove box to hang freely on the
hinges.
OPD076023
2. Remove the support rod (1).
OPD076026
3. Press and hold the lock (1) on
both sides of the cover.
4. Pull out (2) the cover.
5. Replace the climate control air filter.
6. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
NOTICE
Install a new climate control air filter in the correct direction with the
arrow symbol (↓) facing downwards, otherwise, it may be noisy
and the effectiveness of the filter
may be reduced.
7-31
Maintenance
OPD076025
7
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Blade Inspection
Blade Replacement
Contamination of either the windshield
or the wiper blades with foreign matter
can reduce the effectiveness of the
windshield
wiper
functionality.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commercial
car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window
and the blades with a clean cloth
dampened with washer fluid.
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
Front windshield wiper service
positions
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manually.
NOTICE
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, arms or other components, do not:
• Use gasoline, kerosene, paint
thinner, or other solvents on or
near them.
• Attempt to move the wipers
manually.
• Use non-specified wiper blades.
i Information
Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic car washes have been known to
make the windshield difficult to clean.
7-32
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.
NOTICE
• In order to prevent damage to
the hood and the wiper arms, the
wiper arms should only be lifted
when in the top wiping position.
• Always return the wiper arms to
the windshield before driving.
OPD076027
This vehicle has a "hidden" wiper
design which means that the wipers
cannot be lifted when they are in
their bottom resting position.
1. Within 20 seconds of turning off
the engine, lift and hold the wiper
lever up to the MIST position for
about 2 seconds until the wipers
move to the top wipe position.
2. At this time you can lift the wipers
off the windshield.
3. Gently put the wipers back down
onto the windshield.
4. Turn the wipers to any ON position
to return the wipers to the bottom
resting position.
Front windshield wiper blade
replacement
OLMB073021
Maintenance
OLMB073020
1. Put the front windshield wipers
into the service position.
2. Raise the wiper arm and slightly
rotate the wiper blade assembly to
expose the plastic locking clip.
OLMB073022
NOTICE
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it
may chip or crack the windshield.
3. Press the clip (1) and slide the
blade assembly downward (2).
4. Lift it off the arm.
5. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
6. Return the wiper arm on the windshield.
7-33
7
Maintenance
Rear window wiper blade
replacement
OTL075051
OTL075050
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out
the wiper blade assembly.
7-34
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the
slot in the wiper arm until it clicks
into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it
slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, have the wiper
blades replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
BATTERY
WARNING
(Continued)
• NEVER attempt to recharge
the battery when the vehicle’s
battery cables are connected
to the battery.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
NEVER touch these components with the engine running
or when the Engine Start/Stop
button is in the ON position.
Maintenance
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH to you or bystanders,
always follow these precautions
when working near or handling
the battery:
Always read and follow
instructions
carefully
when handling a battery.
Wear eye protection
designed to protect the
eyes from acid splashes.
Keep all flames, sparks,
or smoking materials
away from the battery.
Hydrogen is always present in battery cells, is
highly combustible, and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of
reach of children.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is highly
corrosive. Do not allow
acid to contact your
eyes, skin or clothing.
If acid gets into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If acid
gets on your skin, thoroughly
wash the area. If you feel pain or
a burning sensation, get medical attention immediately.
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle if your battery is
frozen.
(Continued)
7
7-35
Maintenance
WARNING
For Best Battery Service
WARNING
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth
defects and reproductive harm.
Batteries also contain other
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer.
Wash hands after handling.
NOTICE
• When you do not use the vehicle
for a long time in a low temperature area, disconnect the battery
and keep it indoors.
• Always charge the battery fully
to prevent battery case damage
in low temperature areas.
7-36
Battery Recharging
OPD077028L
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled acid from the battery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
Always follow these instructions when recharging your
vehicle's battery to avoid the
risk of SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH from explosions or acid
burns:
• Before performing maintenance or recharging the battery, turn off all accessories
and place the ignition switch
to the LOCK/OFF position.
• Keep all flames, sparks, or
smoking materials away from
the battery.
• Always work outdoors or in an
area with plenty of ventilation.
• Wear eye protection when
checking the battery during
charging.
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in
a well ventilated area.
(Continued)
By jump starting
Reset Features
After a jump start from a good battery, drive the vehicle for 20-30 minutes before it is shutoff. The vehicle
may not restart if you shut it off
before the battery had a chance to
adequately recharge. See "Jump
Starting" in chapter 6 for more information on jump starting procedures.
The following items may need to be
reset after the battery has been discharged or the battery has been disconnected. See chapter 3 for:
• Power Windows
• Trip Computer
• Climate Control System
• Clock
• Audio System
• Sunroof
i Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to
the environment and human
health. Dispose of the battery according to your local
law(s) or regulations.
Maintenance
(Continued)
• Watch the battery during
charging, and stop or reduce
the charging rate if the battery
cells begin boiling violently.
• The negative battery cable
must be removed first and
installed last when the battery
is disconnected. Disconnect
the battery charger in the following order:
(1) Turn off the battery charger main switch.
(2) Unhook
the
negative
clamp from the negative
battery terminal.
(3) Unhook the positive clamp
from the positive battery
terminal.
• Always use a genuine
HYUNDAI approved battery
when you replace the battery.
7
7-37
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
WARNING
Tire failure may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident. To reduce risk of
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH,
take the following precautions:
• Inspect your tires monthly for
proper inflation as well as
wear and damage.
• The recommended cold tire
pressure for your vehicle can
be found in this manual and on
the tire label located on the driver's side center pillar. Always
use a tire pressure gauge to
measure tire pressure. Tires
with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing poor handling.
• Check the pressure of the
spare every time you check
the pressure of the other tires
on your vehicle.
(Continued)
7-38
(Continued)
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are damaged. Worn tires can cause
loss of braking effectiveness,
steering control, or traction.
• ALWAYS replace tires with the
same size as each tire that
was originally supplied with
this vehicle. Using tires and
wheels other than the recommended sizes could cause
unusual handling characteristics, poor vehicle control, or
negatively affect your vehicle's Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) resulting in a serious
accident.
Tire Care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
OPD086007
All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label
attached to the driver's side center
pillar.
Recommended Cold Tire
Inflation Pressures
Recommended pressures must
be maintained for the best ride,
vehicle handling, and minimum
tire wear.
Over-inflation or under-inflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure that
could result in loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
Severe under-inflation can lead
to severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident. This
risk is much higher on hot days
and when driving for long periods at high speeds.
CAUTION
• Under-inflation
results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation is also
possible. Keep your tire pressures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Over-inflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread,
and a greater possibility of
damage from road hazards.
Maintenance
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. "Cold tires" means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or has been driven
for less than one mile (1.6 km).
Warm tires normally exceed recommended cold tire pressures by 4 to 6
psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not release air
from warm tires to adjust the pressure or the tires will be under-inflated. For recommended inflation pressure, refer to "Tire and Wheels" in
chapter 8.
WARNING
7
7-39
Maintenance
Check Tire Inflation Pressure
Check your tires, including the spare
tire, once a month or more.
How to check
Use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to check tire pressure. You
can not tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflated when they are under-inflated.
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire label located on
the driver's side center pillar or in this
manual. No further adjustment is
necessary. If the pressure is low, add
air until you reach the recommended
pressure. Make sure to put the valve
caps back on the valve stems.
Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and
cause air leakage. If a valve cap is
missing, install a new one as soon as
possible.
7-40
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. Without the valve
cap, dirt or moisture could get into
the valve core and cause air leakage.
If a valve cap is missing, install a new
one as soon as possible.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
hour period.
Allow the tire to cool before measuring the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
Tire Rotation
To equalize tread wear, HYUNDAI
recommends that the tires be rotated
according to the maintenance schedule or sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, outof-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of the tire.
Replace the tire if you find any of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness (proper torque is
79~94 lbf·ft [11~13 kgf·m]).
■ Without a spare tire
i Information
ODH073802
WARNING
• Do not use the compact spare
tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause
unusual handling characteristics that may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident.
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
NOTICE
Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle's aluminum
wheels. Use only approved wheel
weights.
7-41
Maintenance
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
Tires that are asymmetrical or directional can only be installed on the
wheel in one direction. The outside
and inside of an asymmetrical tire is
not easily distinguishable. Pay careful
attention to the markings on the sidewalls of the tires, noting the "outside"
marking and also the rotating direction before installing them on the
vehicle.
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance
7
Maintenance
Tire Replacement
WARNING
Tread wear indicator
OLMB073027
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 2/32 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the tread surface to
become level with the tread wear
indicators before replacing the tire.
7-42
To reduce the risk of DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY:
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are
damaged. Worn tires can
cause loss of braking effectiveness, steering control, and
traction.
• Always replace tires with the
same size as each tire that
was originally supplied with
this vehicle. Using tires and
wheels other than the recommended sizes could cause
unusual handling characteristics, poor vehicle control, or
negatively affect your vehicle's Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) resulting in a serious
accident.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, HYUNDAI recommends
that tires be replaced after six
(6) years of normal service.
• When replacing tires (or
wheels), it is recommended to
replace the two front or two
rear tires (or wheels) as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle's
handling. If only replacing one
pair of tires, it is recommended to install the pair of new
tires on the rear axle.
• Heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the
aging process. Failure to follow this warning may cause
sudden tire failure, which
could lead to a loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
Wheel Replacement
Tire Maintenance
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mounting a regular size tire.
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
WARNING
The original tire should be
repaired or replaced as soon as
possible to avoid failure of the
spare and loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. The
compact spare tire is for emergency use only. Do not operate
your vehicle over 50 mph (80
km/h) when using the compact
spare tire.
Tire Traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when the tread depth is at
least 2/32 inch (1.6 mm). To reduce
the possibility of losing control, slow
down whenever there is rain, snow or
ice on the road.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
7-43
Maintenance
Compact spare tire replacement
7
Maintenance
1
5,6
7
4
2
3
1
OLMB073028
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.
2. Tire size designation
A tire's sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replacement tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation
mean.
7-44
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
225/45R17 91W
225 - Tire width in millimeters.
45 - Aspect ratio. The tire's section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
91 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
W - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designation mean.
Example wheel size designation:
7.0J X 17
7.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being
used for passenger vehicle tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire’s designed maximum safe operating speed.
Maximum Speed
112
118
130
149
168
186
mph
mph
mph
mph
mph
mph
(180
(190
(210
(240
(270
(300
km/h)
km/h)
km/h)
km/h)
km/h)
km/h)
4. Tire ply composition and
material
Any tires that are over six years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
The front part of the DOT shows a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1417 represents
that the tire was produced in the 14th
week of 2017.
5. Maximum permissible inflation pressure
7-45
Maintenance
Speed
Rating
Symbol
S
T
H
V
W
Y
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
7
Maintenance
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example:
TREAD WEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
7-46
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-ahalf times (1½) as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straightahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, over-inflation,
or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination,
can cause heat build-up and
possible sudden tire failure.
This may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
Tire Terminology and
Definitions
Air Pressure
The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on the tire. Air
pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight
This means the combined weight of
optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are
automatic transmission, power
seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio
The relationship of a tire's height to
its width.
Belt
A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the
tread. Cords may be made from steel
or other reinforcing materials.
7-47
Maintenance
Temperature - A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grade C
responds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
7
Maintenance
Bead
DOT Markings
Kilopascal (kPa)
The tire bead contains steel wires
wrapped by steel cords that hold the
tire onto the rim.
The metric unit for air pressure.
A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of the
tread.
A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code includes
the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which
can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand and date
of production.
Cold Tire Pressure
GVWR
The amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in pounds per square inch
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire
has built up heat from driving.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Bias Ply Tire
Curb Weight
This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional
equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
A tire designated by its manufacturer
as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load ratings
The maximum load that a tire is rated
to carry for a given inflation pressure.
Load Index
GAWR FRT
Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Front Axle.
An assigned number ranging from 1
to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
GAWR RR
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Rear axle.
The maximum air pressure to which
a cold tire may be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Intended Outboard Sidewall
The side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
7-48
Light truck(LT) tire
Maximum Load Rating
Passenger (P-Metric) tire
The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
A tire used on passenger cars and
some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight
Ply
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber,
chemicals, fabric and steel or other
materials, that, when mounted on an
automotive wheel provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that
sustains the load.
Occupant Distribution
Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall
An asymmetrical tire has a particular
side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The outward facing
sidewall bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Pneumatic options weight
The combined weight of installed
regular production options weighing
over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace,
not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty breaks, ride levelers,
roof rack, heavy duty battery, and
special trim.
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Rim
Sidewall
Maintenance
The number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by 150
pounds (68 kg).
A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords.
Recommended Inflation
Pressure
The portion of a tire between the
tread and the bead.
7
A metal support for a tire and upon
which the tire beads are seated.
Speed Rating
An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at
which a tire can operate.
7-49
Maintenance
Traction
Vehicle Capacity Weight
All Season Tires
The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
The number of designated seating
positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68
kg) plus the rated cargo and luggage
load.
HYUNDAI specifies all season tires
on some models to provide good
performance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Tread
The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire
Treadwear Indicators
Load on an individual tire due to curb
and accessory weight plus maximum
occupant and cargo weight.
Narrow bands, sometimes called
"wear bars", that show across the
tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch of
tread remains.
UTQGS
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards is a tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
7-50
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and dividing by 2.
Vehicle Placard
A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure.
Summer Tires
HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on
some models to provide superior
performance on dry roads. Summer
tire performance is substantially
reduced in snow and ice. Summer
tires do not have the tire traction rating M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
side wall. If you plan to operate your
vehicle in snowy or icy conditions,
HYUNDAI recommends the use of
snow tires or all season tires on all
four wheels.
Snow Tires
Radial-Ply Tires
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radial-ply tires used on this vehicle are of
belted construction, and are selected
to complement the ride and handling
characteristics of your vehicle.
WARNING
Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause unusual handling characteristics that
may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
Low Aspect Ratio Tires
The aspect ratio is lower than 50 on
low aspect ratio tires.
Because low aspect ratio tires are
optimized for handling and braking,
their sidewall is a little stiffer than a
standard tire. Also low aspect ratio
tires tend to be wider and consequently have a greater contact patch
with the road surface. In some
instances they may generate more
road noise compared with standard
tires.
7-51
Maintenance
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; otherwise, poor handling may result. Snow
tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)
more air pressure than the pressure
recommended for the standard tires
on the tire label on the driver’s side of
the center pillar, or up to the maximum pressure shown on the tire
sidewall, whichever is less. Do not
drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h)
when your vehicle is equipped with
snow tires.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size, and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended. Any combinations of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
belted tires when used on the same
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
vehicle handling. The best rule to follow is: Identical pairs of radial-ply
tires should always be used as a set
for the front tires and a set for the
rear tires.
Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval in this chapter to
achieve the tread life potential of
these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.
7
Maintenance
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of a low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
a standard tire, the rim of the
wheel and the tire itself is more
easily susceptible to damage.
Use caution when driving and
follow the guidelines below to
help minimize damage to the
wheel and tire:
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving,
inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not damaged.
- If the tire is subjected to a
severe impact, have the tire
and wheel inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
- Inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 1,800 miles
(3,000km).
7-52
CAUTION
• It is not easy to recognize tire
damage with your own eyes.
But if there is the slightest
hint of tire damage, have the
tire checked or replaced
because the tire damage may
cause air leakage from the
tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driving on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.
FUSES
■ Blade type
Normal
Blown
■ Cartridge type
Normal
■ Multi fuse
Blown
Normal
WARNING
NEVER replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly
cause a fire.
• Do not install a wire or aluminum foil instead of the
proper fuse - even as a temporary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
possibly a fire.
NOTICE
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the system.
Blown
OLF074075
7-53
Maintenance
Blown
Normal
A vehicle's electrical system is protected from electrical overload damage by fuses.
This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,
one located in the driver's side panel
bolster, the other in the engine compartment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle's lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will be melted or broken.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver's side
fuse panel. Before replacing a blown
fuse, turn the engine and all switches
off, and then disconnect the negative
battery cable. Always replace a
blown fuse with one of the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem. Avoid
using the system involved and immediately consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
7
Maintenance
In an emergency, if you do not have
a spare fuse, use a fuse of the same
rating from a circuit you may not
need for operating the vehicle.
If the headlamps or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are undamaged, check the
fuse panel in the engine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be
replaced with the same rating.
Instrument Panel Fuse
Replacement
OPD077035L
OPD076034
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Turn all other switches OFF.
3. Open the fuse panel cover.
4. Refer to the label on the inside of
the fuse panel cover to locate the
suspected fuse location.
7-54
5. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the removal tool provided
in the engine compartment fuse
panel.
6. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. Spare fuses are provided in the instrument panel fuse
panels (or in the engine compartment fuse panel).
7. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Fuse switch
Engine Compartment Panel
Fuse Replacement
i Information
■ Blade type fuse
OPD076036
OPD077032L
■ Cartridge type fuse
Maintenance
Always, place the fuse switch to the
ON position.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as the
audio system and digital clock must
be reset and the smart key may not
work properly.
OPDE046119
If the fuse switch is OFF, the above
message will appear.
NOTICE
• Always place the fuse switch in
the ON position while driving the
vehicle.
• Do not move the fuse switch
repeatedly. The fuse switch may
be damaged.
7
OPD077033L
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Turn all other switches OFF.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tap and pulling up.
7-55
Maintenance
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Main fuse
Multi fuse
CAUTION
After checking the fuse box in
the engine compartment securely close the fuse box cover
inside the engine compartment,
until it clicks.
If the fuse box is not closed
properly, water may leak in side,
possibly causing a malfunction
with the electrical system.
OPD077030L
OPD077031L
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling it up.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling it up.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
i Information
7-56
If the main fuse is blown, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i Information
If the multi fuse is blown, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Fuse/Relay Panel Description
Instrument panel fuse panel
Maintenance
OPD076039
Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you
can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay names and ratings.
i Information
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your
vehicle; the information is accurate at
the time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to
the fuse box label.
7
OPD077106N
7-57
Maintenance
Instrument panel fuse panel
Fuse Name
Fuse Rating
MODULE 5
7.5A
Crash Pad Switch, Electro Chromic Mirror, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, A/C Control Module,
A/T Shift Lever Indicator, Console Switch LH, Head Lamp Leveling Device LH/RH,
Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module
MODULE 3
7.5A
BCM, Sport Mode Switch
SUNROOF 1
20A
Panorama Sunroof
TAIlGATE
OPEN
10A
Tail Gate Relay
P/WDW (LH)
25A
Power Window LH Relay, Driver/Passenger Safety Window Module
MULTIMEDIA
15A
A/V & Navigation Head Unit
P/WDW (RH)
25A
Power Window RH Relay
P/SEAT DRV
25A
Driver Seat Manual Switch
MODULE 4
7.5A
Lane Keeping Assist Module, Blind Spot Detection Radar LH/RH, Stop Lamp Switch,
Electric Parking Brake Switch, Autonomous Emergency Braking Module
SMART KEY 2
7.5A
Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module
SUNROOF 2
20A
Panorama Sunroof
INTERIOR
LAMP
7.5A
Wireless Charger, Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Room Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp, Personal Lamp LH/RH
7-58
Protected Component
Instrument panel fuse panel
Fuse Name
Fuse Rating
MEMORY 2
7.5A
BCM
MEMORY 1
10A
A/C Control Module, Instrument Cluster, Auto Light & Photo Sensor, Electro Chromic Mirror,
ICM Relay Box (Outside Mirror Folding/Unfolding Relay)
AMP
30A
AMP
MODULE 6
7.5A
Smart Key Control Module, BCM
MDPS
7.5A
MDPS Unit
MODULE 1
7.5A
Hazard Switch, Center Door Lock Switch, Ignition Key Interlock Switch,
Driver/Passenger Smart Key Outside Handle, Data Link Connector
MODULE 7
7.5A
Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module
A/BAG IND
7.5A
Instrument Cluster, Center Door Lock Switch
Maintenance
Protected Component
BRAKE
SWITCH
7.5A
Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch
7
START
7.5A
Without Smart Key : Ignition Key Switch
With Smart Key : Smart Key Control Module
CLUSTER
7.5A
Instrument Cluster
DR LOCK
20A
Door Lock/Unlock Relay, ICM Relay Box (T/Turn Unlock Relay)
7-59
Maintenance
Instrument panel fuse panel
Fuse Name
Fuse Rating
AEB
10A
Autonomous Emergency Braking Module
S/HEATER
20A
Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module
A/CON
7.5A
A/C Control Module, Cluster Ionizer, E/R Junction Block (Blower Relay)
SMART KEY 1
15A
Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module
A/BAG
15A
SRS Control Module
IG1
25A
PCB Block (ABS3, ECU5, SENSOR4, TCU2)
MODULE 2
10A
Wireless Charger, Smart Key Control Module, BCM, A/V & Navigation Head Unit,
Power Outside Mirror Switch, E/R Junction Block (Power Outlet Relay), AMP
WASHER
15A
Multifunction Switch
WIPER
(LO/HI)
10A
ECM/PCM, BCM
WIPER (RR)
15A
Rear Wiper Relay, Rear Wiper Motor
HEATED
MIRROR
10A
Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror, A/C Control Module, ECM/PCM
POWER
OUTLET
20A
Rear Power Outlet #2
HEATED
STEERING
15A
BCM
7-60
Protected Component
Engine compartment fuse panel
OPD077037L
Maintenance
Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you
can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay names and ratings.
i Information
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your
vehicle; the information is accurate at
the time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to
the fuse panel label.
7
OPD077103N
7-61
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
Fuse Name
Fuse Rating
MAIN
150A
E/R Junction Block (Fuse - ABS1, ABS2, B/Alarm, Power Outlet1)
MDPS 1
80A
MDPS Unit, Battery
B+5
60A
PCB Block (Fuse - ECU4, ECU3, Horn, Wiper, Engine Control Relay)
B+2
60A
IGPM (Fuse - S/Heater, IPS0, IPS1, IPS2)
B+3
60A
IGPM (IPS3, IPS4, IPS5, IPS6, IPS7, IPS8)
B+4
60A
IGPM (Fuse - AMP, P/WDW LH, P/WDW RH, Tail Gate Open, Sunroof1, Sunroof2, P/Seat (DRV))
COOLING
FAN 1
60A
E/R Junction Block (Cooling Fan1 Relay)
REAR
HEATED
40A
E/R Junction Block (Rear Heated Relay)
BLOWER
40A
E/R Junction Block (Blower Relay)
IG1
40A
Ignition Switch, E/R Junction Block (ACC Relay, IG1 Relay)
IG2
40A
Ignition Switch, E/R Junction Block (IG2 Relay)
PTC
HEATER 1
50A
PTC Heater1
POWER
OUTLET 3
20A
Rear Power Outlet 1
7-62
Protected Component
Engine compartment fuse panel
Fuse Name
Fuse Rating
POWER
OUTLET 2
20A
Front Power Outlet
TCU1
15A
TCM
VACUUM
PUMP
20A
Vacuum Pump
FUEL PUMP
20A
E/R Junction Block (Fuel Pump Relay)
COOLING
FAN 2
40A
E/R Juntion Block (Cooling Fan2 Relay, Cooling Fan3 Relay)
B+1
40A
IGPM (Fuse - Door Lock, Smart Key1, Module1, Brake Switch, Reak Current Autocut Device)
DCT 1
40A
TCM
DCT 2
40A
TCM
Maintenance
Protected Component
B/ALARM
HORN
10A
ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Horn Relay)
7
ABS 1
40A
Multipurpose Check Connector, ESC Control Module
ABS 2
30A
Multipurpose Check Connector, ESC Control Module
POWER
OUTLET 1
40A
E/R Junction Block (Power Outlet Relay)
B/UP LAMP
10A
Back-Up Lamp Switch
7-63
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
■ GAMMA 1.6L T-GDI
Fuse Name
Fuse Rating
Protected Component
SENSOR2
10A
Waste Gate Valve, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Oil Control Valve #1/#2, RCV Control Solenoid Valve,
E/R Junction Block (Cooling Fan2 Relay, Cooling Fan1 Relay)
ECU2
10A
ECM
ECU1
20A
ECM
SENSOR1
15A
Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor (Down)
IGN COIL
20A
Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4
ECU3
15A
ECM
ECU5
10A
ECM
SENSOR4
15A
Vaccum Pump
ABS3
10A
ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector, Clutch Master Cylinder
TCU2
15A
E/R Junction Block (Fuse - B/Up Lamp), Transaxle Range Switch, TCM
SENSOR3
10A
E/R Junction Block (Fuel Pump Relay)
ECU4
15A
ECM
WIPER
25A
Wiper Relay
HORN
15A
Horn Relay
7-64
Engine compartment fuse panel
■ NU 2.0L GDI
Fuse Name
Fuse Rating
Protected Component
10A
ECU2
10A
ECM/PCM
ECU1
20A
ECM/PCM
SENSOR1
15A
Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor (Down)
IGN COIL
20A
Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4, Condenser
ECU3
15A
ECM/PCM
ECU5
10A
ECM/PCM
ABS3
10A
ABS/ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
ABS3
15A
E/R Junction Block (Fuse - B/Up Lamp), Transaxle Range Switch, TCM
SENSOR3
10A
E/R Junction Block (Fuel Pump Relay)
WIPER
25A
Wiper Relay
HORN
15A
Horn Relay
Maintenance
SENSOR2
Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Oil Control Valve #1/#2, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve,
E/R Junction Block (Cooling Fan2 Relay, Cooling Fan3 Relay)
7
7-65
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
(Battery terminal cover)
OPD076066
Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you
can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay names and ratings.
i Information
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your
vehicle; the information is accurate at
the time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to
the fuse panel label.
7-66
OPD076065
NOTICE
After checking the fuse panel in the engine compartment, securely
install the cover. If it is not securely latched, electrical failure may occur
from water contact.
LIGHT BULBS
Consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer to replace most vehicle light
bulbs. It is difficult to replace vehicle
light bulbs because other parts of the
vehicle must be removed before you
can get to the bulb. This is especially
true for removing the headlamp
assembly to get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlamp
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
i Information
• Prior to replacing a lamp,
depress the foot brake, move
the shift lever into P (Park)
apply the parking brake, place
the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, and take
the key with you when leaving
the vehicle to avoid sudden
movement of the vehicle and
to prevent possible electric
shock.
• Be aware the bulbs may be
hot and may burn your fingers.
Headlamp, Parking Lamp,
Daytime Running Light, Turn
Signal Lamp and Side Marker
Type A
OPD076042
(1) Headlamp (Low)
(2) Headlamp (High)
(3) Turn signal lamp
(4) Parking lamp &
Daytime running ight
(5) Side marker
Maintenance
After heavy driving, rain or washing,
headlamp and trunk lenses could
appear frosty. This condition is caused
by the temperature difference
between the lamp inside and the outside temperature. This is similar to the
condensation on your windows inside
your vehicle during the rain and doesn’t indicate a problem with your vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp
bulb circuitry, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
WARNING
7
7-67
Maintenance
WARNING
OLMB073042L
• Handle halogen bulbs with
care. Halogen bulbs contain
pressurized gas that will produce flying pieces of glass that
could cause injuries if broken.
• Wear eye protection when
changing a bulb. Allow the
bulb to cool down before handling it.
7-68
• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with
liquids.
• Never touch the glass with bare
hands. Residual oil may cause the
bulb to overheat and burst when lit.
• A bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlamp.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
■ High/Low beam
Low
High
OPDE076076
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
4. Disconnect the headlamp bulb
socket-connector.
5. Install a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
7. Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
5. Remove the bulb from the headlamp assembly.
6. Install a new headlamp bulb and
snap the headlamp bulb retaining
wire into position by aligning the
wire with the groove on the bulb.
7. Connect the headlamp bulb socket-connector.
8. Install the headlamp bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
OPDE076077
i Information
Turn signal
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
Maintenance
The headlamp aiming should be
adjusted after an accident or after the
headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Parking lamp and daytime running
light
Your vehicle is equipped with LED
lamps. LED lamps do not have
replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp
does not operate, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
7
7-69
Maintenance
Type B
Side Repeater Lamp
Replacement
OAD075082N
Side marker
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pulling out the bulb.
5. Insert a new bulb.
7-70
OPD076041
(1) Headlamp (Low)
(2) Headlamp (High)
(3) Parking lamp & Turn signal lamp
& Daytime running light
(4) Side marker
Headlamp, parking lamp, turn signal lamp, daytime running light
and side marker
Your vehicle is equipped with LED
lamps. LED lamps do not have
replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp
does not operate, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
OPD076044
If the light bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Rear Combination Light Bulb
Replacement
Type A
(1) Stop/Tail lamp
(2) Turn signal lamp
(3) Tail lamp
(4) Back-up lamp
(5) Side marker
OPD076048
Stop/Tail lamp and turn signal lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Open the lamp assembly retaining
screw covers.
3. Loosen the lamp assembly retaining screws with a cross-tip screwdriver.
4. Remove the rear combination
lamp assembly from the body of
the vehicle.
Maintenance
OPD076045
OPD076047
7
7-71
Maintenance
8. Install the socket into the assembly by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the
assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
9. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
Stop/tail lamp
Turn signal lamp
OPD076049
5. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
7-72
Side marker
Your vehicle is equipped with LED
lamps. LED lamps do not have
replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp
does not operate, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
OPDE076072
Tail lamp and backup lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the service cover using a
flat-blade screwdriver.
Type B
Tail lamp
Backup lamp
OPD076047
OPD076052
OPD076046
(1) Stop/Tail lamp
(2) Turn signal lamp
(3) Backup lamp
(4) Side marker
Turn signal lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Open the lamp assembly retaining
screw covers.
3. Loosen the lamp assembly retaining screws with a cross-tip screwdriver.
Maintenance
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
5. Insert a new bulb into the socket.
6. Install the socket into the assembly by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots on the
assembly and turning the socket
clockwise.
7. Reinstall the service cover.
7
Stop/tail lamp and side marker
Your vehicle is equipped with LED
lamps. LED lamps do not have
replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp
does not operate, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
7-73
Maintenance
8. Install the socket into the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
9. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
Turn signal lamp
OPD076048
OPD076064
4. Remove the rear combination
lamp assembly from the body of
the vehicle.
5. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
7-74
High Mounted Stop Lamp
Replacement
Backup lamp
OPD076053
Backup lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the service cover using a
flat-blade screwdriver.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
5. Install the socket into the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
6. Reinstall the service cover.
OPD076054
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Gently remove the cover of the liftgate trim.
3. Remove the spoiler plug hole.
4. Disconnect the connector and
remove the washer hose and the
plug holes.
5. Remove the mounting nuts.
6. Remove the rear spoiler assembly.
7-75
Maintenance
OPDE076072
7
Maintenance
7. Remove the high mounted stop
lamp after removing the mounting
nuts.
8. Install a new lamp
9. Reinstall the rear spoiler and the
liftgate upper trim in the reverse
order.
License Plate Light Bulb
Replacement
Interior Light Bulb
Replacement
Room lamp
■ Room lamp - with sunroof
OPD076055
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens cover from the
lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order.
7-76
OPDE076057
Your vehicle is equipped with LED
lamps. LED lamps do not have
replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp
does not operate, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Map lamp, room lamp, vanity mirror lamp and luggage compartment lamp
■ Map lamp
■ Luggage room lamp
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interior lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
WARNING
OPD076059
OPD076056
■ Vanity mirror lamp
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior lamp housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
Maintenance
■ Room lamp
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the "OFF"
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.
7
NOTICE
OAD075045
OPD076063
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
7-77
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior Care
Exterior general caution
Protecting your vehicle's finish
Washing
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign
materials. Make sure the drain holes
in the lower edges of the doors and
rocker panels are kept clear and
clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain
water may not completely remove all
these deposits. A mild soap, safe for
use on painted surfaces, should be
used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.
High-pressure washing
• When using high-pressure washers, make sure to maintain sufficient distance from the vehicle.
Insufficient clearance or excessive
pressure can lead to component
damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors
or its surrounding area directly with
a high pressure washer. Shock
applied from high pressure water
may cause the device to not operate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or plastic covers)or
connectors as they may be damaged if they come into contact with
high pressure water.
• Do not use any high-pressure nozzles, which induce either one-direct
water stream or water swirling.
7-78
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water before getting on the
road. If braking performance is
impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
NOTICE
• Do not use strong soap, chemical detergents or hot water, and
do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or when the body of the
vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the
side windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through
the windows and wet the interior.
• To prevent damage to the plastic
parts, do not clean with chemical solvents or strong detergents.
OLMB073082
NOTICE
NOTICE
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body
with a dry cloth will scratch the
finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or
caustic agents on chrome-plated or anodized aluminum parts.
This may result in damage to the
protective coating and cause
discoloration or paint deterioration.
Repairing your vehicle's finish
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or
replacement, be sure the body
shop applies anti-corrosion materials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
7-79
Maintenance
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical circuits located in the engine compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic
components inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
Waxing
A good coat of wax provides a barrier between your paint and environmental contamination.
Keeping a good coat of wax on your
vehicle will help protect it.
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
to re-wax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not yet need waxing.
7
Maintenance
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of brightmetal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preservative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may
collect on the underbody. If these
materials are not removed, accelerated rusting can occur on underbody
parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system, even
though they have been treated with
rust protection.
7-80
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody and wheel openings with lukewarm or cold water once a month,
after off-road driving and at the end
of each winter. Pay special attention
to these areas because it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it.
The lower edges of doors, rocker
panels, and frame members have
drain holes that should not be
allowed to clog with dirt; trapped
water in these areas can cause rusting.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated
with a clear protective finish.
NOTICE
• Do not use abrasive cleaner, polishing compound, solvent, or
wire brushes on aluminum
wheels.
• Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, clean the
wheels after driving on salted
roads.
• Do not wash the wheels with
high-speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any cleaners containing acid or alkaline detergents.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, HYUNDAI produces vehicles of the highest quality. However,
this is only part of the job. To achieve
the long-term corrosion resistance
your vehicle can deliver, the owner’s
cooperation and assistance is also
required.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in contact with the car surfaces by moisture
that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it is slow to dry and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to
keep your vehicle clean and free of
mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the vehicle.
To help prevent corrosion
Keep your vehicle clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your vehicle clean and free
of corrosive materials. Attention to
the underside of the vehicle is particularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your vehicle at least
once a month and be sure to clean
the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
7-81
Maintenance
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion on your vehicle are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehicle is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
7
Maintenance
• When cleaning underneath the
vehicle, pay particular attention to
the components under the fenders
and other areas that are hidden
from view. Do a thorough job; just
dampening the accumulated mud
rather than washing it away will
accelerate corrosion rather than
prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly
effective in removing accumulated
mud and corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members,
be sure that drain holes are kept
open so that moisture can escape
and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.
7-82
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your vehicle in a damp,
poorly ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is particularly true if you
wash your vehicle in the garage or
drive it into the garage when it is still
wet or covered with snow, ice or
mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings are highly corrosive
and may damage painted surfaces in
just a few hours. Always remove bird
droppings as soon as possible.
Interior Care
Interior general precautions
Prevent caustic solutions such as
perfume and cosmetic oil, from contacting the interior parts because
they may cause damage or discoloration. If they do contact the interior
parts, wipe them off immediately.
See the instructions for the proper
way to clean vinyl.
NOTICE
• Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic
components inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
• When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol content solutions. If you use
high alcohol content solutions
or acid/ alkaline detergents, the
color of the leather may fade or
the surface may get stripped off.
Cleaning the upholstery and
interior trim
Vinyl (if equipped)
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
CAUTION
• Wrinkles or abrasions which
appear naturally from usage
are not covered by warranty.
• Belts with metallic accessories, zippers or keys inside
the back pocket may damage
the seat fabric.
• Make sure not to wet the seat.
It may change the nature of
natural leather.
• Jeans or clothes which could
bleach may contaminate the
surface of the seat covering
fabric.
Maintenance
Fabric (if equipped)
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not properly maintained.
Leather (if equipped)
• Features of seat leather
- Leather is made from the outer
skin of an animal, which goes
through a special process to be
available for use. Since it is a natural product, each part differs in
thickness or density.
Wrinkles may appear as a natural
result of stretching and shrinking
depending on the temperature
and humidity.
- The seat is made of stretchable
fabric to improve comfort.
- The parts contacting the body are
curved and the side supporting
area is high which provides driving comfort and stability.
- Wrinkles may appear naturally
from usage. It is not a fault of the
products.
7
NOTICE
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may
affect the fabric's appearance and
fire-resistant properties.
7-83
Maintenance
• Caring for the leather seats
- Vacuum the seat periodically to
remove dust and sand on the seat.
It will prevent abrasion or damage
of the leather and maintain its quality.
- Wipe the natural leather seat cover
often with dry or soft cloth.
- Use of proper leather protector
may prevent abrasion of the cover
and helps maintain the color. Be
sure to read the instructions and
consult a specialist when using
leather coating or protective agent.
- Light colored (beige, cream beige)
leather is easily contaminated and
the stain is noticeable. Clean the
seats frequently.
- Avoid wiping with wet cloth. It may
cause the surface to crack.
7-84
• Cleaning the leather seats
- Remove all contaminations instantly. Refer to instructions below for
removal of each contaminant.
- Cosmetic products (sunscreen,
foundation, etc.)
Apply cleansing cream on a cloth
and wipe the contaminated spot.
Wipe off the cream with a wet cloth
and remove water with a dry cloth.
- Beverages (coffee, soft drink, etc.)
Apply a small amount of neutral
detergent and wipe until contaminations do not smear.
- Oil
Remove
oil
instantly
with
absorbable cloth and wipe with
stain remover used only for natural
leather.
- Chewing gum
Harden the gum with ice and
remove gradually.
Cleaning the seat belt webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken
the seat belt.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
NOTICE
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage to the rear
window defroster grid.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the Owner’s
Handbook & Warranty Information
booklet in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems, as follows.
In order to ensure the proper function of the emission control systems,
it is recommended that you have
your vehicle inspected and maintained by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.
For
the
Inspection
and
Maintenance Test (with Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from misfiring during dynamometer testing, turn the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system off by
pressing the ESC switch (ESC
OFF light illuminated).
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC system
back on by pressing the ESC
switch again.
1. Crankcase Emission Control
System
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.
2. Evaporative Emission Control
System Including Onboard
Refueling Vapor Recovery
(ORVR)
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmosphere. The ORVR system is
designed to allow the vapors from
the fuel tank to be loaded into a canister while refueling at the gas station, preventing the escape of fuel
vapors into the atmosphere.
7-85
Maintenance
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
NOTICE
7
Maintenance
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge
tank through the purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms-up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.
7-86
3. Exhaust Emission Control
System
Engine exhaust (carbon monoxide) precautions
The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle performance.
When the engine starts or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to the
emission system.
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes. If you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind in
your vehicle, drive with all the windows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
WARNING
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
on this page to avoid CO poisoning.
WARNING
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Operating precautions for catalytic converters (if equipped)
WARNING
The exhaust system and catalytic converter are very hot
during and immediately after
the engine has been running. To
avoid SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH:
• Do not park, idle, or drive the
vehicle over or near flammable objects, such as grass,
vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.
A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle.
• Keep away from the exhaust
system and catalytic converter or you may get burned.
Also, Do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust system, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle, and do not coat
the vehicle for corrosion control. It may present a fire risk
under certain conditions.
7-87
Maintenance
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components
and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or
emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
• Do not operate the engine in confined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.
7
Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter emission control
device.
To prevent damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle, take
the following precautions:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunction, such as misfire or a noticeable
loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse are
coasting with the engine off and
descending steep grades in gear
with the engine off.
• Do not operate the engine at high
idle speed for extended periods (5
minutes or more).
7-88
• Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and
adjustments must be made by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Avoid driving with extremely low
fuel level. If you run out of gasoline,
it could cause the engine to misfire
and result in excessive loading of
the catalytic converter.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:
Perchlorate containing materials, such as air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless remote entry batteries,
must be disposed of according to Title 22 California Code of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).
Maintenance
7
7-89
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Recommended SAE viscosity number ..........................8-9
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................8-10
Vehicle Certification Label .................................8-10
Tire Specification and Pressure Label .............8-11
Engine Number .....................................................8-11
Refrigerant Label.................................................8-11
Consumer Information.........................................8-12
Reporting Safety Defects ...................................8-13
Specifications & Consumer information
Dimensions ..............................................................8-2
Engine ......................................................................8-2
Bulb Wattage ..........................................................8-3
Tires and Wheels ...................................................8-5
Volume and Weight................................................8-6
Air Conditioning System........................................8-6
Recommended Lubricants and Capacities ..........8-7
8
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
DIMENSIONS
Items
in (mm)
Overall length
170.86 (4,340)
Overall width
70.66 (1,795)
Overall height
57.28 (1,455)
Front tread
Rear tread
225/45 R17
61.14 (1,553)
225/40 R18
60.98 (1,549)
225/45 R17
61.49 (1,562)
225/40 R18
61.53 (1,563)
Wheelbase
104.33 (2,650)
ENGINE
Items
Displacement
cu. in (cc)
Bore x Stroke
in. (mm)
Firing order
No. of cylinders
8-2
Gamma 1.6 T-GDI
Nu 2.0 GDI
97.09 (1,591)
121.98 (1,999)
3.03x3.36 (77x85.4)
3.18x3.82 (81x97)
1-3-4-2
1-3-4-2
In-line 4 cylinder
In-line 4 cylinder
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
BULB WATTAGE
Light Bulb
Headlamp
Type A
Front
Parking lamp
Turn signal lamp
Side marker
Daytime running light
Headlamp
Type B
Position lamp
Turn signal lamp
Side marker
Daytime running light
Side repeater lamp
Rear
Low
High
Stop/Tail lamp
Turn signal lamp
Tail lamp
Type A
Backup lamp
Side marker
Stop/Tail lamp
Turn signal lamp
Type B
Backup lamp
Side marker
High mounted stop light
Low
High
Bulb Type
Wattage
H7
HB3
LED
PY28W
W5W
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
P28/8W
PY27W
W5W
W16W
LED
LED
PY27W
LED
LED
LED
55
65
LED
28
5
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
28/8
27
5
16
LED
LED
27
LED
LED
LED
8
8-3
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Light Bulb
Map lamp
Room lamp
Interior
8-4
Vanity mirror lamp
Luggage compartment lamp
License plate lamp
Type A
Type B
Bulb Type
Wattage
W10W
FESTOON
LED
FESTOON
FESTOON
W5W
10
8
LED
5
10
5
Inflation pressure
kPa (psi)
Items
Tire Size
Full size tire
Compact spare tire
Wheel Size
Normal Load
Maximum Load
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
225/45 R17
7.0J X 17
230 (33)
230 (33)
230 (33)
230 (33)
225/40 R18
7.5J X 18
230 (33)
230 (33)
230 (33)
230 (33)
T125/80 D15
4.0T X 15
420 (60)
420 (60)
420 (60)
420 (60)
T125/80 D16
4.0T X 16
420 (60)
420 (60)
420 (60)
420 (60)
Wheel lug nut
torque kgf•m
(lbf•ft, N•m)
11~13
(79~94,
107~127)
NOTICE
• It is permissible to add 3 psi to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expected soon.
Tires typically loose 1psi (7kPa) for every 12°F temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are
expected, recheck your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.
• An air pressure generally decreases, as you drive up to a high-altitude area above sea level. Thus, if you
plan to drive a high-altitude area, check the tire pressures in advance. If necessary, inflate them to a proper level. (Air inflation per altitude : +2.4 psi/1 mile)
• Tires get higher strain when driving at high speed than under normal condition, and can cause tire failure.
Therefore, if you are driving at sustained high speed (over 100 mile/h or 160 km/h) with 225/40R18 sized
tires, add 5 psi to the standard tire pressure. However, do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or not work properly.
8-5
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
TIRES AND WHEELS
8
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
VOLUME AND WEIGHT
Gamma 1.6 T-GDI
Items
Gross vehicle weight
lbs. (kg)
Nu 2.0 GDI
M/T
DCT
M/T
A/T
4,034 (1,830)
4,078 (1,850)
3,924 (1,780)
3,968 (1,800)
Luggage volume (SAE)
24.9 (705)
cu ft (l)
M/T : Manual transmission
A/T : Automatic transmission
DCT : Dual clutch transmission
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Items
Refrigerant
oz. (g)
Compressor lubricant
oz. (cc)
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for more details.
8-6
Weight of Volume
Classification
17.63 (500)
R-1234yf
3.88±0.35 (110±10)
PAG
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
Lubricant
Engine oil * * (drain and refill)
1
Volume
Classification
2
Recommends
Manual transmission fluid
Automatic transmission fluid
Dual clutch transmission fluid
Gamma
1.6 T-GDI
4.76 US qt. (4.5 l)
Nu 2.0 GDI
4.23 US qt. (4.0 l)
Gamma
1.6 T-GDI/
Nu 2.0 GDI
Nu 2.0 GDI
Gamma
1.6 T-GDI
API SM *3 & ILSAC GF-4 (or above)
ACEA A5/B5 *4
1.8~1.9 US qt. (1.7 ~ 1.8 l)
HK SYN MTF 70W (SK)
SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W MTF (H.K.SHELL)
GS MTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX)
(API GL-4, SAE 70W TGO-9)
7.08 US qt. (6.7 l)
MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV,
NOCA ATF SP-IV, HYUNDAI genuine ATF
SP-IV or other brands meeting the above
specification approved by HYUNDAI Motor
Co.
2.01~2.11 US qt. (1.9~2.0 l)
HK SYN DCTF 70W (SK)
SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W DCTF
(H.K.SHELL)
GS DCTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX)
(API GL-4, SAE 70W)
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
8
8-7
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Lubricant
Gamma
1.6 T-GDI
Coolant
Nu 2.0 GDI
Volume
M/T
DCT
6.55 US qt. (6.2 l)
M/T
6.23 US qt. (5.9 l)
A/T
6.12 US qt. (5.8 l)
Classification
Mixture of antifreeze and water
(Phosphate-based Ethylene glycol coolant for
aluminum radiator)
Brake/Clutch fluid
0.74~0.85 US qt.
(0.7 ~ 0.8 l)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel
14.0 US gal. (53 l)
Refer to "Fuel requirements" in the Foreword
chapter.
*1 : Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*2 : Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure
in everyday driving, but in a year's time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*3 : If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
*4 : If the ACEA A5 engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use ILSAC GF-3 (or above) or ACEA A3 (or above).
8-8
CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain
plug, or dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant.
This is especially important in
dusty or sandy areas and when
the vehicle is used on unpaved
roads. Cleaning the plug and
dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the
engine and other mechanisms
that could be damaged.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operating (engine start and engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity
engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance,
however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication
in hot weather.
Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result in
engine damage.
When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be
operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended
oil viscosity from the chart.
Temperature
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
°C -30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
(°F)
-10
0
20
40
60
80
100
50
120
20W-50
Engine
Oil
Gamma
1.6 T-GDI *1
15W-40
10W-30
5W-30, 5W-40
Nu 2.0
GDI *2
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
8
*1 : For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil
of a viscosity grade 5W-30 (ACEA A5 or above). However, if the
engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper
engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
*2 : For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil
of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4).
However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select
the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
8-9
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
■ Frame number
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
■ VIN label
OPD086001
OPD086002
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in registering your car and in all legal matters
pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the passenger seat. To check
the number, open the cover.
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.
8-10
OPDE086007
The vehicle certification label attached
on the driver's side center pillar gives
the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
ENGINE NUMBER
REFRIGERANT LABEL
(IF EQUIPPED)
■ Gamma 1.6 T-GDI
OPD086005
■ Nu 2.0 GDI
OPD086007
OPDE086008
The tires supplied on your new vehicle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver’s
side center pillar gives the tire pressures recommended for your car.
The refrigerant label provides information such as refrigerant type and
amount.
The label is located on the underside
of the hood.
OPD087012L
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown in the
drawing.
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
8
8-11
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
CONSUMER INFORMATION
This consumer information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation.Your HYUNDAI dealer will help answer any questions you
may have as you read this information.
HYUNDAI motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed all applicable safety standards.
For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read and follow all directions in this Owner’s Manual, particularly the
information under the headings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARNING".
If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regarding the operation of your vehicle, please contact your nearest
HYUNDAI Motor America Regional Office as listed in the following:
Eastern Region:
Connecticut, Delaware,
Maine,
Massachusetts,
New
Hampshire, New Jersey, New York,
Pennsylvania,
Rhode
Island,
Vermont.
Eastern Region
1122 Cranbury South River Road
Jamesburg, NJ 08831
(800) 633-5151
Southern Region:
Florida, Georgia, Maryland, North
Carolina, South Carolina, Virginia,
West Virginia.
Southern Region
3025 Chastain Meadows Parkway
Suite 100 Marietta, GA 30066
(800) 633-5151
8-12
South Central Region:
Alabama, Arkansas, Louisiana,
Mississippi, New Mexico, Oklahoma,
Tennessee, Texas.
South Central Region
1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400
Coppell, TX 75019
(800) 633-5151
Central Region:
Illinois, Indiana, lowa, Kentucky,
Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska,
North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio,
Wisconsin, Kansas, Missouri.
Central Region
2 Trans Am Plaza Dr #500 Oakbrook
Terrace, IL 60181
(800) 633-5151
Western Region:
Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona, California,
Colorado, Idaho, Montana, Nevada,
Oregon,
Utah,
Washington,
Wyoming.
Western Region
10550 Talbert Avenue P.O.Box
20850 Fountain Valley, California
92728-0850
(800) 633-5151
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying HYUNDAI
MOTOR AMERICA.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888- 327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov;
download the SaferCar mobile application;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Ave, SE,
West Building Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
8
8-13
Index
I
Index
A
Advanced smart cruise control system ...........................5-91
Air bag warning labels....................................................2-67
Air bags...........................................................................2-45
Additional safety precautions.....................................2-67
Air bag collision sensors ............................................2-61
Air bag inflation conditions .......................................2-63
Air bag non-inflation conditions ................................2-64
Air bag warning labels ...............................................2-67
Curtain air bags ..........................................................2-49
Do not install a child restraint on the front
passenger's seat .......................................................2-60
Driver's air bag ...........................................................2-47
Driver's knee airbag....................................................2-47
How does the air bags system operate? .....................2-50
Occupant Classification System (OCS) .....................2-56
Passenger's front air bag.............................................2-47
Side air bags ...............................................................2-48
SRS Care ....................................................................2-66
SRS components and functions..................................2-50
SRS warning light ......................................................2-51
What to expect after an air bag inflates .....................2-55
Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision ...............2-61
Air cleaner replacement ..................................................7-29
Air conditioning refrigerant label......................3-103, 3-115
Air conditioning system specification ..............................8-6
I-2
Air ventilation seats ........................................................2-20
Alarm system ..................................................................3-16
Antenna .............................................................................4-3
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .......................................5-47
Appearance care..............................................................7-78
Exterior care ...............................................................7-78
Interior care ................................................................7-82
Armrest ...........................................................................2-14
Audio/Video/Navigation system.......................................4-4
Auto defogging system .................................................3-118
Auto hold ........................................................................5-43
Auto light position ..........................................................3-81
Automatic climate control system ................................3-104
Air conditioning........................................................3-111
Air conditioning refrigerant label.............................3-115
Air intake control......................................................3-110
Automatic heating and air conditioning...................3-105
Fan speed control......................................................3-111
Instrument panel vents .............................................3-108
Manual heating and air conditioning .......................3-106
Mode selection .........................................................3-107
OFF mode.................................................................3-112
SYNC button ............................................................3-109
System maintenance .................................................3-114
Temperature control .................................................3-109
Automatic emergency braking system (AEB)................5-62
Automatic transmission ..................................................5-19
Good driving practices ...............................................5-23
Manual shift mode......................................................5-21
Parking........................................................................5-23
Shift lock system ........................................................5-22
Shift-lock release........................................................5-22
Transmission ranges ...................................................5-20
Automatic ventilation ...................................................3-120
Aux, USB and iPod ..........................................................4-2
B
Battery.............................................................................7-35
Battery recharging ......................................................7-36
Battery saver function.....................................................3-86
Before driving ...................................................................5-4
Blade type fuse ...............................................................7-55
Blind spot detection system (BSD) ................................5-55
Blind spot mirror.............................................................3-28
Blue Link® center ...........................................................3-20
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology hands-free ....................4-4
Bottle holder .................................................................3-123
Index
Brake system...................................................................5-35
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ...................................5-47
Auto hold....................................................................5-43
Disc brakes wear indicator .........................................5-36
Electronic parking brake (EPB) .................................5-38
Electronic stability control (ESC) ..............................5-48
Good braking practices ..............................................5-53
Hill-start assist control (HAC) ...................................5-53
Parking brake (hand type) ..........................................5-36
Power brakes ..............................................................5-35
Vehicle stability management (VSM) ........................5-51
Brake/clutch fluid ...........................................................7-27
Bulb replacement
Daytime running light (DRL) ....................................7-67
Front side marker .......................................................7-67
Front turn signal lamp ................................................7-67
Headlamp....................................................................7-67
High mounted stop lamp ............................................7-75
Interior light bulb .......................................................7-76
License plate light bulb ..............................................7-76
Parking lamp ..............................................................7-67
Rear combination light bulb.......................................7-71
Side repeater lamp......................................................7-70
Bulb wattage .....................................................................8-3
Button Start/Stop, see Engine Start/Stop button...............5-9
I
I-3
Index
C
California perchlorate notice ..........................................7-89
Camera (Rear view) ........................................................3-94
Capacities (Lubricants) .....................................................8-7
Care
Exterior care ...............................................................7-78
Interior care ................................................................7-82
Tire care......................................................................7-38
Cargo area cover ...........................................................3-130
Cartridge type fuse..........................................................7-55
Cellular phone holder ...................................................3-126
Center console storage ..................................................3-121
Central door lock switch.................................................3-14
Certification label ...........................................................8-10
Chains
Tire chains ................................................................5-110
Check tire inflation pressure...........................................7-40
Child restraint system (CRS) ..........................................2-34
Booster seats...............................................................2-37
Forward-facing child restraints ..................................2-37
Installing a child restraint system (CRS) ...................2-37
Lower anchors and tether for children .......................2-38
Rear-facing child seats ...............................................2-36
Securing a child restraint system seat with
"Tether Anchor" system ..........................................2-41
Securing a child restraint system with a lap/
shoulder belt............................................................2-42
I-4
Securing a child restraint system with LATCH
anchors system ........................................................2-40
Selecting a child restraint system (CRS) ...................2-35
Child-protector rear door lock ........................................3-16
Climate control air filter replacement.............................7-30
Climate control system
Automatic climate control system............................3-104
Manual climate control system ..................................3-95
Clock .............................................................................3-128
Clothes hanger ..............................................................3-128
Cluster ionizer...............................................................3-120
Combined instrument, see instrument cluster ................3-45
Compact spare tire replacement .....................................7-43
Consumer information ....................................................8-12
Coolant............................................................................7-23
Cooling fluid, see engine coolant ...................................7-23
Crankcase emission control system ................................7-85
Cruise control system .....................................................5-86
Cup holder.....................................................................3-123
Curtain air bags...............................................................2-49
D
Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel
illumination..................................................................3-46
Dashboard, see instrument cluster ..................................3-45
Day/night rearview mirror ..............................................3-20
Daytime running light (DRL) .........................................3-81
Defogging (Windshield)................................................3-115
E
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with HomeLink® system,
compass and Blue Link® .............................................3-20
Electric power steering (EPS).........................................3-17
Electronic parking brake (EPB)......................................5-38
Electronic stability control (ESC)...................................5-48
Emergency towing ..........................................................6-22
Emission control system .................................................7-85
Crankcase emission control system ...........................7-85
Evaporative emission control System ........................7-85
Exhaust emission control system ...............................7-86
Engine compartment..................................................1-7, 7-3
Engine compartment panel fuse replacement.................7-55
Engine coolant ................................................................7-23
Engine coolant temperature gauge .................................3-47
Engine number ................................................................8-11
Engine oil........................................................................7-21
Engine specification..........................................................8-2
Engine start/stop button ....................................................5-9
EPB (Electronic Parking Brake).....................................5-38
Evaporative emission control System.............................7-85
Exhaust emission control system....................................7-86
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items.................7-18
Exterior care....................................................................7-78
Exterior overview
Front view ....................................................................1-2
Rear view......................................................................1-3
I-5
Index
Defroster........................................................................3-119
Rear window defroster .............................................3-119
Defrosting (Windshield)................................................3-115
Dimensions .......................................................................8-2
Display illumination, see instrument panel
illumination..................................................................3-46
Displays, see instrument cluster .....................................3-45
Door locks .......................................................................3-11
Auto door lock/unlock features..................................3-15
Central door lock switch ............................................3-14
Child-protector rear door lock....................................3-16
Drinks holders, see cup holders....................................3-123
Drive mode integrated control system............................5-54
SPORT mode..............................................................5-54
Driver attention alert system (DAA) ..............................5-82
Driver's air bag................................................................2-47
Driver's knee airbag ........................................................2-47
Driving at night.............................................................5-108
Driving in flooded areas ...............................................5-109
Driving in the rain.........................................................5-108
Dual clutch transmission.................................................5-25
DCT warning messages..............................................5-27
Good driving practices ...............................................5-33
Manual shift mode......................................................5-30
Paddle shifter..............................................................5-31
Parking........................................................................5-32
Shift lock system ........................................................5-32
Shift-lock release........................................................5-32
Transmission ranges ...................................................5-29
I
Index
F
Flat tire............................................................................6-14
Changing tires ............................................................6-15
Jack label ....................................................................6-19
Use of compact spare tires .........................................6-18
Floor mat anchor(s).......................................................3-129
Fluid
Brake/clutch fluid .......................................................7-27
Washer fluid ...............................................................7-28
Front seat adjustment ........................................................2-5
Manual adjustment .......................................................2-6
Power adjustment .........................................................2-8
Seatback pocket..........................................................2-10
Front seat head restraints
Adjusting the height up and down .............................2-15
Removal/Reinstall ......................................................2-16
Fuel filler door ................................................................3-42
Fuel gauge.......................................................................3-48
Fuel requirements .............................................................F-7
Detergent Fuel Additives .............................................F-8
Gasoline containing alcohol or methanol ....................F-7
Gasoline containing MMT ...........................................F-8
Operation in foreign countries .....................................F-9
Using Fuel Additives....................................................F-8
I-6
Fuses ...............................................................................7-53
Blade type fuse ...........................................................7-55
Cartridge type fuse .....................................................7-55
Engine compartment panel fuse replacement ............7-55
Fuse switch .................................................................7-55
Fuse/relay panel description.......................................7-57
Instrument panel fuse replacement.............................7-54
Main fuse....................................................................7-56
Multi fuse ...................................................................7-56
G
Gauges and meters ..........................................................3-47
Glove box......................................................................3-121
H
Hazard warning flasher.....................................................6-2
Hazardous driving conditions .......................................5-107
Head restraints ................................................................2-14
Front seat head restraints............................................2-15
Rear seat head restraints.............................................2-17
Headlamp delay function ................................................3-87
Headlamp position ..........................................................3-82
Headlight bulb replacement ............................................7-67
High beam operation.......................................................3-83
Highway driving ...........................................................5-109
Hill-start assist control (HAC)........................................5-53
Hood................................................................................3-39
Horn ................................................................................3-18
How to use this manual ....................................................F-6
I
I-7
Index
If the engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly.........6-3
If the engine overheats......................................................6-6
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing...................6-2
If the engine stalls while driving ......................................6-2
If the engine turns over normally but doesn't start...........6-3
If the engine will not start.................................................6-3
If you have a flat tire while driving..................................6-3
Ignition switch ..................................................................5-6
Engine Start/Stop button ..............................................5-9
Key ignition switch ......................................................5-6
Impact sensing door unlock ............................................3-15
Improtant safety precautions.............................................2-2
Air bag hazards ............................................................2-2
Always wear your seat belt ..........................................2-2
Control your speed .......................................................2-2
Driver distraction..........................................................2-2
Keep your vehicle in safe condition.............................2-2
Restrain all children .....................................................2-2
In case of emergency while driving..................................6-2
Indicator light..................................................................3-52
Inside rearview mirror ....................................................3-19
Instrument cluster ...........................................................3-45
Assist mode ................................................................3-72
Gauges and meters .....................................................3-47
Instrument cluster illumination ..................................3-46
LCD display control ...................................................3-69
LCD display messages ...............................................3-63
LCD display modes....................................................3-70
Shift indicator pop-up ................................................3-51
Transmission shift indicator .......................................3-50
Trip computer mode ...................................................3-71
User settings mode .....................................................3-73
Warning and indicator lights ......................................3-52
Instrument panel fuse replacement .................................7-54
Instrument panel overview ...............................................1-5
Interior care.....................................................................7-82
Interior features
Bottle holder .............................................................3-123
Cargo area cover.......................................................3-130
Cellular phone holder ...............................................3-126
Clock ........................................................................3-128
Clothes hanger..........................................................3-128
Cup holder ................................................................3-123
Floor mat anchor(s) ..................................................3-129
Luggage net (holder) ................................................3-130
Power outlet..............................................................3-125
Sliding armrest .........................................................3-124
Sunvisor....................................................................3-124
Wireless cellular phone charging system .................3-126
I
Index
Interior lamp AUTO cut..................................................3-87
Interior lights...................................................................3-87
Front lamps.................................................................3-88
Interior lamp AUTO cut .............................................3-87
Luggage compartment lamp.......................................3-89
Rear lamp ...................................................................3-89
Vanity mirror lamp .....................................................3-89
Interior overview...............................................................1-4
J
Jump starting.....................................................................6-4
L
Label
Refrigerant label .........................................................8-11
Tire loading information label..................................5-115
Tire sidewall labeling .................................................7-43
Tire specification and pressure label ..........................8-11
Vehicle certification label...........................................8-10
Lane change signals ........................................................3-86
Lane keeping assist system (LKAS)...............................5-74
Lap/shoulder belt ............................................................2-24
I-8
LCD display
LCD display modes....................................................3-70
Assist mode ................................................................3-72
Quick guide help ........................................................3-71
Trip computer mode ...................................................3-71
Turn By Turn (TBT) mode.........................................3-72
User settings mode .....................................................3-73
Warning mode ............................................................3-73
LCD display messages
Check AEB system.....................................................3-68
Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse ...................................3-65
Check BSD System ....................................................3-68
Check driver attention alert system............................3-68
Check headlamp FAN ................................................3-68
Check headlamp LED ................................................3-68
Check headlight..........................................................3-67
Check LKAS ..............................................................3-68
Check smart high beam system..................................3-68
Door, Hood, Liftgate open .........................................3-65
Engine has overheated................................................3-67
Key not detected.........................................................3-64
Key not in vehicle ......................................................3-64
Lights mode................................................................3-66
Low fuel .....................................................................3-67
Low Key Battery ........................................................3-64
Low pressure ..............................................................3-66
M
Main fuse ........................................................................7-56
Maintenance
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ............7-18
Maintenance services ...................................................7-4
Maintenance under severe usage conditions.....7-11, 7-16
Normal maintenance schedule ............................7-8, 7-13
Owner maintenance......................................................7-5
Scheduled maintenance services ..................................7-7
Tire maintenance ........................................................7-43
Maintenance schedule
Gamma 1.6 T-GDI......................................................7-13
Nu 2.0 GDI...................................................................7-8
Maintenance services ........................................................7-4
Manual climate control system.......................................3-95
Air conditioning .......................................................3-100
Air conditioning refrigerant label.............................3-103
Air intake control .......................................................3-98
Fan speed control .....................................................3-100
Heating and air conditioning......................................3-96
Instrument panel vents ...............................................3-98
Mode selection ...........................................................3-96
System maintenance .................................................3-102
Temperature control ...................................................3-98
Index
Low washer fluid........................................................3-67
Press brake pedal to start engine................................3-64
Press clutch pedal to start engine ...............................3-64
Press START button again .........................................3-64
Press START button with key ....................................3-65
Shift to P.....................................................................3-64
Shift to P or N to start engine ....................................3-63
Sunroof open ..............................................................3-65
Turn on FUSE SWITCH ............................................3-66
Wiper ..........................................................................3-67
LCD display modes ........................................................3-70
Liftgate............................................................................3-40
Emergency liftgate safety release...............................3-41
Light bulbs ......................................................................7-67
Lighting...........................................................................3-81
Auto light position......................................................3-81
Battery saver function ................................................3-86
Daytime running light (DRL) ....................................3-81
Headlamp delay function ...........................................3-87
Headlamp position......................................................3-82
High beam operation ..................................................3-83
Lane change signals ...................................................3-86
Parking lamp position ................................................3-82
Smart high beam ........................................................3-83
Turn signals ................................................................3-86
Lubricants and capacities..................................................8-7
Luggage compartment lamp ...........................................3-89
Luggage net (holder).....................................................3-130
I
I-9
Index
Manual transmission .......................................................5-16
Downshifting ..............................................................5-17
Good driving practices ...............................................5-18
Using the clutch..........................................................5-16
Mirrors ............................................................................3-19
Blind spot mirror ........................................................3-28
Blue Link® center.......................................................3-20
Day/night rearview mirror..........................................3-20
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with HomeLink®
system, compass and Blue Link® ...........................3-20
Folding the side view mirrors ....................................3-29
Inside rearview mirror................................................3-19
Side view mirror control ............................................3-29
Side view mirrors .......................................................3-27
Moonroof, see sunroof....................................................3-34
Multi box.......................................................................3-122
Multi fuse........................................................................7-56
Multimedia system............................................................4-2
Antenna ........................................................................4-3
Audio/Video/Navigation system ..................................4-4
Aux, USB and iPod® port ............................................4-2
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology hands-free................4-4
Steering wheel audio control........................................4-3
I-10
O
Odometer.........................................................................3-49
Oil (Engine) ....................................................................7-21
Outside temperature gauge .............................................3-49
Owner maintenance ..........................................................7-5
P
Paddle shifter ..................................................................5-31
Panoramic sunroof, see sunroof......................................3-34
Parking lamp position .....................................................3-82
Passenger's front air bag .................................................2-47
Power brakes...................................................................5-35
Power outlet ..................................................................3-125
Power steering.................................................................3-17
Power window lock switch.............................................3-33
Pre-tensioner seat belt.....................................................2-27
R
Range ..............................................................................3-50
Rear center seat belt........................................................2-27
Rear seat adjustment .......................................................2-11
Armrest .......................................................................2-14
Folding the rear seat ...................................................2-11
Rear seat head restraints .................................................2-17
Adjusting the height up and down .............................2-17
Rear view camera ...........................................................3-94
Rear window wiper and washer .....................................3-93
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ...................7-39
Recommended lubricants and capacities ..........................8-7
Refrigerant label..............................................................8-11
Remote key .......................................................................3-3
Battery replacement......................................................3-6
Liftgate unlocking ........................................................3-4
Locking.........................................................................3-3
Mechanical key ............................................................3-5
Panic button..................................................................3-4
Unlocking .....................................................................3-3
Removable towing hook .................................................6-21
Replacement light bulb ...................................................7-67
Reporting safety defects .................................................8-13
Rocking the vehicle ......................................................5-107
Rotation (Tire) ................................................................7-40
S
Index
Safety messages................................................................F-6
Scheduled maintenance services.......................................7-7
Seat belt warning light
Driver's seat ................................................................2-22
Front passenger's seat.................................................2-23
Seat belts .........................................................................2-21
Additional seat belt safety precautions ......................2-30
Care of seat belts ........................................................2-33
Do not lie down..........................................................2-32
Driver's 3-point system with emergency locking
retractor ...................................................................2-24
Height adjustment ......................................................2-25
Keep belts clean and dry ............................................2-33
Lap/shoulder belt........................................................2-24
One person per belt ....................................................2-32
Passenger's 3-point system with convertible
locking retractor ......................................................2-26
Periodic inspection .....................................................2-33
Pre-tensioner seat belt ................................................2-27
Rear center seat belt ...................................................2-27
Seat belt restraint system............................................2-23
Seat belt safety precautions........................................2-21
Seat belt use and children...........................................2-31
Seat belt use during pregnancy ..................................2-30
Seat belt warning light ...............................................2-22
Transporting an injured person ..................................2-32
When to replace seat belts..........................................2-33
Seat warmers...................................................................2-18
I
I-11
Index
Seats ..................................................................................2-3
Air ventilation seats....................................................2-20
Front seat adjustment ...................................................2-5
Head restraints............................................................2-14
Rear seat adjustment...................................................2-11
Safety precautions ........................................................2-4
Seat warmers ..............................................................2-18
Side air bags....................................................................2-48
Side view mirrors............................................................3-27
Sliding armrest..............................................................3-124
Smart high beam .............................................................3-83
Smart key ..........................................................................3-6
Battery replacement....................................................3-10
Liftgate unlocking ........................................................3-8
Locking.........................................................................3-7
Mechanical key ............................................................3-9
Panic button..................................................................3-9
Unlocking .....................................................................3-7
Smooth cornering..........................................................5-108
Snow tires......................................................................5-110
Spare tire
Compact spare tire replacement .................................7-43
Special driving conditions
Driving at night ........................................................5-108
Driving in flooded areas...........................................5-109
Driving in the rain ....................................................5-108
Hazardous driving conditions ..................................5-107
Highway driving.......................................................5-109
I-12
Rocking the vehicle..................................................5-107
Smooth cornering .....................................................5-108
Speed sensing door lock .................................................3-15
Speedometer....................................................................3-47
SPORT mode ..................................................................5-54
Starting difficulties, see engine will not start ...................6-3
Steering wheel
Electric power steering (EPS) ....................................3-17
Horn............................................................................3-18
Power steering ............................................................3-17
Tilt steering / Telescope steering................................3-18
Steering wheel audio control ............................................4-3
Storage compartment ....................................................3-121
Center console storage .............................................3-121
Glove box .................................................................3-121
Multi box ..................................................................3-122
Sunglass holder ........................................................3-122
Sunglass holder .............................................................3-122
Sunroof............................................................................3-34
Automatic reverse ......................................................3-36
Closing the sunroof ....................................................3-36
Resetting the sunroof..................................................3-37
Sliding the sunroof .....................................................3-35
Sunroof open warning ................................................3-38
Sunshade.....................................................................3-35
Tilting the sunroof ......................................................3-36
Sunroof inside air recirculation ....................................3-120
Sunvisor ........................................................................3-124
T
U
User settings mode..........................................................3-73
V
Vanity mirror lamp..........................................................3-89
Vehicle break-in process...................................................F-9
Vehicle certification label ...............................................8-10
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders ...........F-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN) ..............................8-10
Vehicle load limit ..........................................................5-114
Tire loading information label..................................5-115
Vehicle modification.........................................................F-9
Vehicle stability management (VSM).............................5-51
Vehicle weight and luggage volume.................................8-6
I-13
Index
Tachometer......................................................................3-47
Theft-alarm system .........................................................3-16
Tilt steering/Telescope steering ......................................3-18
Tire chains.....................................................................5-110
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ........................6-8
Tire rotation ....................................................................7-40
Tire specification and pressure label ..............................8-11
Tires and wheels .............................................................7-38
All season tires ...........................................................7-50
Check tire inflation pressure ......................................7-40
Compact spare tire replacement .................................7-43
Low aspect ratio tires .................................................7-51
Radial-ply tires ...........................................................7-51
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ...............7-39
Snow tires ...................................................................7-51
Summer tires ..............................................................7-50
Tire care......................................................................7-38
Tire maintenance ........................................................7-43
Tire replacement.........................................................7-42
Tire rotation ................................................................7-40
Tire sidewall labeling .................................................7-43
Tire terminology and definitions................................7-47
Tire traction ................................................................7-43
Wheel alignment and tire balance..............................7-41
Wheel replacement .....................................................7-43
Towing ............................................................................6-20
Emergency towing......................................................6-22
Removable towing hook ............................................6-21
Tie-down hook............................................................6-23
Trip computer..................................................................3-77
Accumulated Info display ..........................................3-79
Average fuel economy................................................3-78
Digital speedometer....................................................3-80
Driving Info display ...................................................3-79
Instant fuel economy ..................................................3-78
Turn signals.....................................................................3-86
I
Index
W
Warning and indicator lights...........................................3-52
Air bag warning light .................................................3-52
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) warning light ...........3-53
AUTO HOLD indicator light .....................................3-58
Automatic emergency braking (AEB) warning light..3-63
Charging system warning light ..................................3-55
Cruise indicator light..................................................3-62
Cruise SET indicator light..........................................3-62
Electric power steering (EPS) warning light .............3-54
Electronic brake force warning light..........................3-54
Electronic parking brake (EPB) warning light...........3-58
Electronic stability control (ESC) indicator light ......3-59
Electronic stability control (ESC) OFF indicator
light .........................................................................3-59
Engine oil pressure warning light ..............................3-56
High beam indicator light ..........................................3-61
Icy road warning light ................................................3-62
Immobilizer indicator light ........................................3-59
Lane keeping assist system (LKAS) warning light ...3-63
LED headlamp warning light .....................................3-61
Light ON indicator light.............................................3-61
Low fuel level warning light......................................3-56
Low tire pressure warning light .................................3-57
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).............................3-55
Master warning light ..................................................3-57
Parking brake & brake fluid warning light ................3-52
I-14
Seat belt warning light ...............................................3-52
Smart high beam indicator light.................................3-61
SPORT mode indicator light ......................................3-62
Turn signal indicator light ..........................................3-60
Washer fluid warning light.........................................3-57
Warning light ..................................................................3-52
Washer fluid ....................................................................7-28
Welcome system .............................................................3-90
Headlamp and parking lamp ......................................3-90
Interior lamp ...............................................................3-90
Wheel alignment and tire balance ..................................7-41
Wheel replacement .........................................................7-43
Windows .........................................................................3-30
Auto down window ....................................................3-32
Auto up/down window ...............................................3-32
Automatic reverse ......................................................3-32
Power windows ..........................................................3-31
Power window lock switch ........................................3-33
Resetting the windows ...............................................3-32
Window opening and closing.....................................3-31
Windshield defrosting and defogging ...........................3-115
Windshield washers ........................................................3-92
Windshield wipers...........................................................3-91
Winter driving ...............................................................5-110
Snow tires .................................................................5-110
Tire chains ................................................................5-110
Winter Precautions ........................................................5-112
Wiper blades replacement...............................................7-32
Front windshield wiper blade replacement ................7-33
Front windshield wiper service positions...................7-32
Rear window wiper blade replacement......................7-34
Wipers and washers ........................................................3-91
Auto rear wiper ..........................................................3-93
Front windshield wiper service position ....................3-92
Rear window wiper and washer .................................3-93
Windshield washers....................................................3-92
Windshield wipers ......................................................3-91
Wireless cellular phone charging system......................3-126
Index
I
I-15
Download PDF
Similar pages